S3P8249XXX-QWR9 [SAMSUNG]
Microcontroller, 8-Bit, UVPROM, SAM88RC CPU, 10MHz, CMOS, PQFP80;
| 型号： | S3P8249XXX-QWR9 |
| 厂家： | 
SAMSUNG |
| 描述： | Microcontroller, 8-Bit, UVPROM, SAM88RC CPU, 10MHz, CMOS, PQFP80 可编程只读存储器 微控制器 |
| 文件： | 总305页 (文件大小：1208K) |
| 中文： | 中文翻译 | 下载： | 下载PDF数据表文档文件 |
24-S3-C8245/P8245/C8249/P8249-032004
USER'S MANUAL
S3C8245/P8245/C8249/P8249
8-Bit CMOS
Microcontrollers
Revision 4
NOTIFICATION OF REVISIONS
ORIGINATOR:
Samsung Electronics, LSI Development Group, Ki-Heung, South Korea
S3C8245/P8245/C8249/P8249 8-bit CMOS Microcontroller
S3C8245/P8245/C8249/P8249 User's Manual, Revision 4
PRODUCT NAME:
DOCUMENT NAME:
DOCUMENT NUMBER: 24-S3-C8245/P8245/C8249/P8249-032004
EFFECTIVE DATE:
SUMMARY:
March, 2004
As a result of additional product testing and evaluation, some specifications
published in the S3C8248/C8245/P8245/C8247/C8249/P8249 User's Manual,
Revision 3, have been changed. These changes for S3C8248/C8245/P8245
/C8247/C8249/P8249 microcontroller, which are described in detail in the
Revision Descriptions section below, are related to the
followings:
—
—
—
S3C8248/C8247 moved.
Chapter 1. Features
Chapter 19. Electrical Data
DIRECTIONS:
Please note the changes in your copy (copies) of the S3C8248/C8245/P8245/
C8247/C8249/P8249 User's Manual, Revision 3. Or, simply attach the Revision
Descriptions of the next page to S3C8248/C8245/P8245/C8247/C8249 /P8249
User's Manual, Revision 3.
REVISION HISTORY
Revision
Date
Remark
Preliminary Spec for internal release only.
First edition.
0
1
2
3
4
June, 1999
September, 1999
July, 2000
Second edition.
March, 2002
March, 2004
Third edition.
Fourth edition.
REVISION DESCRIPTIONS
1. DEVICE TYPE
The S3C8247/C8248 device type should be moved. Product name and document name should be changed into
'S3C8245/P8245/C8249/P8249'.
2. FEATURES
The Operating Temperature Range should be changed '-40°C to 85°C' into '-25°C to 85°C' in the page 1-2, from 19-2
to 19-12, and from 21-4 to 21-7.
3. ELECTRICAL DATA
Table 19-2. D.C. Electrical Characteristics (Concluded) (Page 19-4)
°
°
(T = -25 C to + 85 C, V = 1.8 V to 5.5 V)
A
DD
Parameter
Symbol
Conditions
Min
Typ
Max
Unit
(1)
I
Main stop mode: sub-osc
–
1
3
mA
Supply current
DD5
stop V = 5 V ± 10 %,
DD
°
T = 25 C
A
°
= 3V ± 10%, T = 25 C
A
0.5
2
V
DD
Table 19-12. D.C. Electrical Characteristics (Concluded) (Page 19-12)
°
°
(T = -25 C to + 85 C, V = 2.0 V to 5.5 V)
A
DD
Oscillator
Test Condition
= 2.0 V to 5.5 V
Min
Typ
Max
Unit
Crystal
V
–
–
40
4
ms
ms
DD
Ceramic
Stabilization occurs when V is equal to the minimum
–
–
DD
oscillator voltage range.
External clock
X input high and low level width (t , t
)
50
–
500
ns
IN
XH XL
Table 21-4. D.C. Electrical Characteristics (Continued) (Page 19-3, 21-5)
°
°
(T = -25 C to +85 C, V = 1.8 V to 5.5 V)
A
DD
Parameter
Symbol
Conditions
= 5.0 V T = 25 C
Min
300
Typ
600
Max
1500
Unit
°
Oscillator feed back
resistors
R
kW
V
osc1
A
DD
X = V , X
= 0 V
IN
DD OUT
S3C8245/P8245
/C8249/P8249
8-BIT CMOS
MICROCONTROLLERS
USER'S MANUAL
Revision 4
Important Notice
The information in this publication has been carefully
"Typical" parameters can and do vary in different
applications. All operating parameters, including
"Typicals" must be validated for each customer
application by the customer's technical experts.
checked and is believed to be entirely accurate at
the time of publication. Samsung assumes no
responsibility, however, for possible errors or
omissions, or for any consequences resulting from
the use of the information contained herein.
Samsung products are not designed, intended, or
authorized for use as components in systems
intended for surgical implant into the body, for other
applications intended to support or sustain life, or for
any other application in which the failure of the
Samsung product could create a situation where
personal injury or death may occur.
Samsung reserves the right to make changes in its
products or product specifications with the intent to
improve function or design at any time and without
notice and is not required to update this
documentation to reflect such changes.
This publication does not convey to a purchaser of
semiconductor devices described herein any license
under the patent rights of Samsung or others.
Should the Buyer purchase or use a Samsung
product for any such unintended or unauthorized
application, the Buyer shall indemnify and hold
Samsung and its officers, employees, subsidiaries,
affiliates, and distributors harmless against all
claims, costs, damages, expenses, and reasonable
attorney fees arising out of, either directly or
indirectly, any claim of personal injury or death that
may be associated with such unintended or
unauthorized use, even if such claim alleges that
Samsung was negligent regarding the design or
manufacture of said product.
Samsung makes no warranty, representation, or
guarantee regarding the suitability of its products for
any particular purpose, nor does Samsung assume
any liability arising out of the application or use of
any product or circuit and specifically disclaims any
and all liability, including without limitation any
consequential or incidental damages.
S3C8245/P8245/C8249/P8249 8-Bit CMOS Microcontrollers
User's Manual, Revision 4
Publication Number: 24-S3-C8245/P8245/C8249/P8249-032004
© 2004 Samsung Electronics
All rights reserved. No part of this publication may be reproduced, stored in a retrieval system, or transmitted in
any form or by any means, electric or mechanical, by photocopying, recording, or otherwise, without the prior
written consent of Samsung Electronics.
Samsung Electronics' microcontroller business has been awarded full ISO-14001
certification (BSI Certificate No. FM24653). All semiconductor products are
designed and manufactured in accordance with the highest quality standards and
objectives.
Samsung Electronics Co., Ltd.
San #24 Nongseo-Dong, Giheung-Gu
Yongin-City, Gyeonggi-Do, Korea
C.P.O. Box #37, Suwon 446-711
TEL: (82)-(31)-209-5238
FAX: (82)-(31)-209-6494
Home-Page URL: Http://www.samsungsemi.com
Printed in the Republic of Korea
Preface
The S3C8245/P8245/C8249/P8249 Microcontroller User's Manual is designed for application designers and
programmers who are using the S3C8245/P8245/C8249/P8249 microcontroller for application development. It is
organized in two main parts:
Part I Programming Model
Part II Hardware Descriptions
Part I contains software-related information to familiarize you with the microcontroller's architecture, programming
model, instruction set, and interrupt structure. It has six chapters:
Chapter 1
Chapter 2
Chapter 3
Product Overview
Address Spaces
Addressing Modes
Chapter 4
Chapter 5
Chapter 6
Control Registers
Interrupt Structure
Instruction Set
Chapter 1, "Product Overview," is a high-level introduction to S3C8245/P8245/C8249/P8249 with general product
descriptions, as well as detailed information about individual pin characteristics and pin circuit types.
Chapter 2, "Address Spaces," describes program and data memory spaces, the internal register file, and register
addressing. Chapter 2 also describes working register addressing, as well as system stack and user-defined stack
operations.
Chapter 3, "Addressing Modes," contains detailed descriptions of the addressing modes that are supported by the
S3C8-series CPU.
Chapter 4, "Control Registers," contains overview tables for all mapped system and peripheral control register values,
as well as detailed one-page descriptions in a standardized format. You can use these easy-to-read, alphabetically
organized, register descriptions as a quick-reference source when writing programs.
Chapter 5, "Interrupt Structure," describes the S3C8245/P8245/C8249/P8249 interrupt structure in detail and further
prepares you for additional information presented in the individual hardware module descriptions in Part II.
Chapter 6, "Instruction Set," describes the features and conventions of the instruction set used for all S3C8-series
microcontrollers. Several summary tables are presented for orientation and reference. Detailed descriptions of each
instruction are presented in a standard format. Each instruction description includes one or more practical examples
of how to use the instruction when writing an application program.
A basic familiarity with the information in Part I will help you to understand the hardware module descriptions in Part
II. If you are not yet familiar with the S3C8-series microcontroller family and are reading this manual for the first time,
we recommend that you first read Chapters 1–3 carefully. Then, briefly look over the detailed information in Chapters
4, 5, and 6. Later, you can reference the information in Part I as necessary.
Part II "hardware Descriptions," has detailed information about specific hardware components of the
S3C8245/P8245/C8249/P8249 microcontroller. Also included in Part II are electrical, mechanical, OTP, and
development tools data. It has 16 chapters:
Chapter 7
Chapter 8
Chapter 9
Chapter 10
Chapter 11
Chapter 12
Chapter 13
Chapter 14
Clock Circuit
nRESET and Power-Down
I/O Ports
Chapter 15
Chapter 16
Chapter 17
Chapter 18
Chapter 19
Chapter 20
Chapter 21
Chapter 22
10-bit-to-Digital Converter
Serial I/O Interface
Voltage Booster
Voltage Level Detector
Electrical Data
Mechanical Data
S3P8245/P8249 OTP
Development Tools
Basic Timer
8-bit Timer A/B
16-bit Timer 0/1
Watch Timer
LCD Controller/Driver
Two order forms are included at the back of this manual to facilitate customer order for S3C8245/P8245/
C8249/P8249 microcontrollers: the Mask ROM Order Form, and the Mask Option Selection Form. You can
photocopy these forms, fill them out, and then forward them to your local Samsung Sales Representative.
S3C8245/P8245/C8249/P8249 MICROCONTROLLER
iii
Table of Contents
Part I — Programming Model
Chapter 1
Product Overview
S3C8-Series Microcontrollers ...............................................................................................................1-1
S3C8245/P8245/C8249/P8249 Microcontroller .......................................................................................1-1
OTP ...................................................................................................................................................1-1
Features.............................................................................................................................................1-2
Block Diagram ....................................................................................................................................1-3
Pin Assignment...................................................................................................................................1-4
Pin Descriptions..................................................................................................................................1-6
Pin Circuits.........................................................................................................................................1-7
Chapter 2
Address Spaces
Overview.............................................................................................................................................2-1
Program Memory (ROM)......................................................................................................................2-2
Register Architecture...........................................................................................................................2-3
Register Page Pointer (PP)..........................................................................................................2-5
Register Set 1.............................................................................................................................2-6
Register Set 2.............................................................................................................................2-6
Prime Register Space..................................................................................................................2-7
Working Registers.......................................................................................................................2-8
Using the Register Points.............................................................................................................2-9
Register Addressing ............................................................................................................................2-11
Common Working Register Area (C0H–CFH) .................................................................................2-13
4-bit Working Register Addressing................................................................................................2-14
8-bit Working Register Addressing................................................................................................2-16
System and User Stacks.....................................................................................................................2-18
Chapter 3
Addressing Modes
Overview.............................................................................................................................................3-1
Register Addressing Mode (R)..............................................................................................................3-2
Indirect Register Addressing Mode (IR)..................................................................................................3-3
Indexed Addressing Mode (X) ...............................................................................................................3-7
Direct Address Mode (DA)....................................................................................................................3-10
Indirect Address Mode (IA)...................................................................................................................3-12
Relative Address Mode (RA).................................................................................................................3-13
Immediate Mode (IM)...........................................................................................................................3-14
S3C8245/P8245/C8249/P8249 MICROCONTROLLER
v
Table of Contents (Continued)
Chapter 4
Control Registers
Overview.............................................................................................................................................4-1
Chapter 5
Interrupt Structure
Overview.............................................................................................................................................5-1
Interrupt Types ............................................................................................................................5-2
S3C8245/C8249 Interrupt Structure...............................................................................................5-3
Interrupt Vector Addresses...........................................................................................................5-4
Enable/Disable Interrupt Instructions (EI, DI) ..................................................................................5-6
System-Level Interrupt Control Registers .......................................................................................5-6
Interrupt Processing Control Points...............................................................................................5-7
Peripheral Interrupt Control Registers ............................................................................................5-8
System Mode Register (SYM)......................................................................................................5-9
Interrupt Mask Register (IMR).......................................................................................................5-10
Interrupt Priority Register (IPR) .....................................................................................................5-11
Interrupt Request Register (IRQ) ...................................................................................................5-13
Interrupt Pending Function Types..................................................................................................5-14
Interrupt Source Polling Sequence................................................................................................5-15
Interrupt Service Routines.............................................................................................................5-15
Generating Interrupt Vector Addresses ..........................................................................................5-16
Nesting Of Vectored Interrupts......................................................................................................5-16
Instruction Pointer (IP).................................................................................................................5-16
Fast Interrupt Processing.............................................................................................................5-16
Chapter 6
Instruction Set
Overview.............................................................................................................................................6-1
Data Types .................................................................................................................................6-1
Register Addressing ....................................................................................................................6-1
Addressing Modes.......................................................................................................................6-1
Flags Register (Flags)..................................................................................................................6-6
Flag Descriptions ........................................................................................................................6-7
Instruction Set Notation................................................................................................................6-8
Condition Codes..........................................................................................................................6-12
Instruction Descriptions................................................................................................................6-13
vi
S3C8245/P8245/C8249/P8249 MICROCONTROLLER
Table of Contents (Continued)
Part II Hardware Descriptions
Chapter 7
Clock Circuit
Overview.............................................................................................................................................7-1
System Clock Circuit...................................................................................................................7-1
Clock Status During Power-Down Modes.......................................................................................7-2
System Clock Control Register (CLKCON).....................................................................................7-3
Chapter 8
nRESET and Power-Down
System nRESET.................................................................................................................................8-1
Overview.....................................................................................................................................8-1
Normal Mode Reset Operation......................................................................................................8-1
Hardware Reset Values................................................................................................................8-2
Power-Down Modes.............................................................................................................................8-5
Stop Mode..................................................................................................................................8-5
Idle Mode....................................................................................................................................8-6
Chapter 9
I/O Ports
Overview.............................................................................................................................................9-1
Port Data Registers .....................................................................................................................9-2
Port 0.........................................................................................................................................9-3
Port 1.........................................................................................................................................9-6
Port 2.........................................................................................................................................9-8
Port 3.........................................................................................................................................9-10
Port 4.........................................................................................................................................9-12
Port 5.........................................................................................................................................9-14
Chapter 10
Basic Timer
Overview.............................................................................................................................................10-1
Basic Timer (BT) .............................................................................................................................10-1
Basic Timer Control Register (BTCON)..............................................................................................10-1
Basic Timer Function Description......................................................................................................10-3
S3C8245/P8245/C8249/P8249 MICROCONTROLLER
vii
Table of Contents (Continued)
Chapter 11
8-bit Timer A/B
8-Bit Timer A.......................................................................................................................................11-1
Overview.....................................................................................................................................11-1
Function Description....................................................................................................................11-2
Timer A Control Register (TACON)................................................................................................11-3
Block Diagram ............................................................................................................................11-4
8-Bit Timer B.......................................................................................................................................11-5
Overview.....................................................................................................................................11-5
Timer B Pulse Width Calculations.................................................................................................11-7
Chapter 12
16-bit Timer 0/1
16-Bit Timer 0.....................................................................................................................................12-1
Overview.....................................................................................................................................12-1
Function Description....................................................................................................................12-1
Timer 0 Control Register (T0CON).................................................................................................12-2
Block Diagram ............................................................................................................................12-3
16-Bit Timer 1.....................................................................................................................................12-5
Overview.....................................................................................................................................12-5
Function Description....................................................................................................................12-6
Timer 1 Control Register (T1CON).................................................................................................12-7
Block Diagram ............................................................................................................................12-8
Chapter 13
Watch Timer
Overview.............................................................................................................................................13-1
Watch Timer Control Register (WTCON: R/W)...............................................................................13-2
Watch Timer Circuit Diagram........................................................................................................13-3
Chapter 14
LCD Controller/Driver
Overview.............................................................................................................................................14-1
LCD Circuit Diagram....................................................................................................................14-2
LCD RAM Address Area ..............................................................................................................14-3
LCD Control Register (LCON), D0H...............................................................................................14-4
LCD Mode Register (LMOD).........................................................................................................14-5
LCD Drive Voltage .......................................................................................................................14-7
LCD SEG/SEG Signals................................................................................................................14-7
LCD Voltage Driving Method.........................................................................................................14-12
viii
S3C8245/P8245/C8249/P8249 MICROCONTROLLER
Table of Contents (Continued)
10-bit Analog-to-Digital Converter
Chapter 15
Overview.............................................................................................................................................15-1
Function Description............................................................................................................................15-1
Conversion Timing .......................................................................................................................15-2
A/D Converter Control Register (ADCON).......................................................................................15-2
Internal Reference Voltage Levels..................................................................................................15-3
Block Diagram ....................................................................................................................................15-4
Chapter 16
Serial I/O Interface
Overview.............................................................................................................................................16-1
Programming Procedure...............................................................................................................16-1
SIO Control Register (SIOCON) ....................................................................................................16-2
SIO Pre-Scaler Register (SIOPS)..................................................................................................16-3
Block Diagram ....................................................................................................................................16-3
Serial I/O Timing Diagram.............................................................................................................16-4
Chapter 17
Voltage Booster
Overview.............................................................................................................................................17-1
Function Description............................................................................................................................17-1
Block Diagram ....................................................................................................................................17-2
Chapter 18
Voltage Level Detector
Overview.............................................................................................................................................18-1
Voltage Level Detector Control Register (VLDCON).........................................................................18-2
S3C8245/P8245/C8249/P8249 MICROCONTROLLER
ix
Table of Contents (Concluded)
Chapter 19
Electrical Data
Overview.............................................................................................................................................19-1
Chapter 20
Mechanical Data
Overview.............................................................................................................................................20-1
Chapter 21
S3P8245/P8249 OTP
Overview.............................................................................................................................................21-1
Operating Mode Characteristics....................................................................................................21-4
Chapter 22
Development Tools
Overview.............................................................................................................................................22-1
SHINE........................................................................................................................................22-1
SAMA Assembler........................................................................................................................22-1
SASM88.....................................................................................................................................22-1
HEX2ROM..................................................................................................................................22-1
Target Boards .............................................................................................................................22-1
TB8245/8249 Target Board...........................................................................................................22-3
SMDS2+ Selection (SAM8)..........................................................................................................22-5
IDLE LED...................................................................................................................................22-5
STOP LED..................................................................................................................................22-5
x
S3C8245/P8245/C8249/P8249 MICROCONTROLLER
List of Figures
Figure
Title
Page
Number
Number
1-1
1-2
1-3
1-4
1-5
1-6
1-7
1-8
1-9
1-10
S3C8245/C8249 Block Diagram............................................................................1-3
S3C8245/C8249 Pin Assignment (80-QFP-1420C)..................................................1-4
S3C8245/C8249 Pin Assignment (80-TQFP-1212)..................................................1-5
Pin Circuit Type B (nRESET)................................................................................1-8
Pin Circuit Type C...............................................................................................1-8
Pin Circuit Type D-2 (P3)......................................................................................1-8
Pin Circuit Type D-4 (P0)......................................................................................1-8
Pin Circuit Type E-2 (P1)......................................................................................1-9
Pin Circuit Type F-10 (P2.0–P2.6).........................................................................1-9
Pin Circuit Type F-18 (P2.7/VLD ) .....................................................................1-9
REF
1-11
1-12
1-13
Pin Circuit Type H (SEG/COM).............................................................................1-9
Pin Circuit Type H-4.............................................................................................1-10
Pin Circuit Type H-14 (P4, P5)..............................................................................1-10
2-1
2-2
2-3
2-4
2-5
2-6
2-7
2-8
Program Memory Address Space.........................................................................2-2
Internal Register File Organization.........................................................................2-4
Register Page Pointer (PP)..................................................................................2-5
Set 1, Set 2, Prime Area Register, and LCD Data Register Map ..............................2-7
8-Byte Working Register Areas (Slices).................................................................2-8
Contiguous 16-Byte Working Register Block..........................................................2-9
Non-Contiguous 16-Byte Working Register Block...................................................2-10
16-Bit Register Pair .............................................................................................2-11
Register File Addressing......................................................................................2-12
Common Working Register Area...........................................................................2-13
4-Bit Working Register Addressing........................................................................2-15
4-Bit Working Register Addressing Example..........................................................2-15
8-Bit Working Register Addressing........................................................................2-16
8-Bit Working Register Addressing Example..........................................................2-17
Stack Operations ................................................................................................2-18
2-9
2-10
2-11
2-12
2-13
2-14
2-15
3-1
3-2
3-3
3-4
3-5
3-6
3-7
3-8
Register Addressing ............................................................................................3-2
Working Register Addressing ...............................................................................3-2
Indirect Register Addressing to Register File..........................................................3-3
Indirect Register Addressing to Program Memory ...................................................3-4
Indirect Working Register Addressing to Register File.............................................3-5
Indirect Working Register Addressing to Program or Data Memory...........................3-6
Indexed Addressing to Register File......................................................................3-7
Indexed Addressing to Program or Data Memory with Short Offset...........................3-8
Indexed Addressing to Program or Data Memory....................................................3-9
Direct Addressing for Load Instructions..................................................................3-10
Direct Addressing for Call and Jump Instructions ....................................................3-11
Indirect Addressing..............................................................................................3-12
Relative Addressing.............................................................................................3-13
Immediate Addressing .........................................................................................3-14
3-9
3-10
3-11
3-12
3-13
3-14
4-1
Register Description Format .................................................................................4-4
S3C8245/P8245/C8249/P8249 MICROCONTROLLER
xi
List of Figures (Continued)
Figure
Title
Page
Number
Number
5-1
5-2
5-3
5-4
5-5
5-6
5-7
5-8
5-9
S3C8-Series Interrupt Types.................................................................................5-2
S3C8245/C8249 Interrupt Structure.......................................................................5-3
ROM Vector Address Area...................................................................................5-4
Interrupt Function Diagram ...................................................................................5-7
System Mode Register (SYM)..............................................................................5-9
Interrupt Mask Register (IMR)...............................................................................5-10
Interrupt Request Priority Groups ..........................................................................5-11
Interrupt Priority Register (IPR) .............................................................................5-12
Interrupt Request Register (IRQ) ...........................................................................5-13
6-1
System Flags Register (FLAGS)...........................................................................6-6
7-1
7-2
7-3
7-4
7-5
7-6
Main Oscillator Circuit (Crystal or Ceramic Oscillator).............................................7-1
Main Oscillator Circuit (RC Oscillator) ...................................................................7-1
System Clock Circuit Diagram..............................................................................7-2
System Clock Control Register (CLKCON).............................................................7-3
Oscillator Control Register (OSCCON)...................................................................7-4
STOP Control Register (STPCON) ........................................................................7-4
9-1
9-2
9-3
9-4
9-5
9-6
9-7
9-8
Port 0 High-Byte Control Register (P0CONH).........................................................9-4
Port 0 Low-Byte Control Register (P0CONL) ..........................................................9-4
Port 0 Interrupt Control Register (P0INT) ................................................................9-5
Port 0 Interrupt Pending Register (P0PND).............................................................9-5
Port 1 High-Byte Control Register (P1CONH).........................................................9-6
Port 1 Low-Byte Control Register (P1CONL) ..........................................................9-7
Port 1 Pull-up Control Register (P1PUP)................................................................9-7
Port 2 High-Byte Control Register (P2CONH).........................................................9-8
Port 2 Low-Byte Control Register (P2CONL) ..........................................................9-9
Port 3 High-Byte Control Register (P3CONH).........................................................9-10
Port 3 Low-Byte Control Register (P3CONL) ..........................................................9-11
Port 4 High-Byte Control Register (P4CONH).........................................................9-12
Port 4 Low-Byte Control Register (P4CONL) ..........................................................9-13
Port 5 High-Byte Control Register (P5CONH).........................................................9-14
Port 5 Low-Byte Control Register (P5CONL) ..........................................................9-15
9-9
9-10
9-11
9-12
9-13
9-14
9-15
xii
S3C8245/P8245/C8249/P8249 MICROCONTROLLER
List of Figures (Continued)
Page
Title
Page
Number
Number
10-1
10-2
Basic Timer Control Register (BTCON)..................................................................10-2
Basic Timer Block Diagram..................................................................................10-4
11-1
11-2
11-3
11-4
11-5
11-6
Timer A Control Register (TACON)........................................................................11-3
Timer A Functional Block Diagram........................................................................11-4
Timer B Functional Block Diagram........................................................................11-5
Timer B Control Register (TBCON)........................................................................11-6
Timer B Data Register (TBDATAH/L).....................................................................11-6
Timer B Output Flip-Flop Waveforms in Repeat Mode .............................................11-8
12-1
12-2
12-3
12-4
12-5
12-6
12-7
12-8
Timer 0 Control Register (T0CON).........................................................................12-2
Timer 0 Functional Block Diagram.........................................................................12-3
Timer 0 Counter Register (T0CNTH/L)....................................................................12-4
Timer 0 Data Register (T0DATAH/L)......................................................................12-4
Timer 1 Control Register (T1CON).........................................................................12-7
Timer 1 Functional Block Diagram.........................................................................12-8
Timer 1Counter Register (T1CNTH/L).....................................................................12-9
Timer 1 Data Register (T1DATAH/L)......................................................................12-9
13-1
Watch Timer Circuit Diagram................................................................................13-3
14-1
14-2
14-3
14-4
14-5
14-6
14-7
14-8
14-9
14-10
LCD Function Diagram.........................................................................................14-1
LCD Circuit Diagram............................................................................................14-2
LCD Display Data RAM Organization ....................................................................14-3
Select/No-Select Bias Signals in Static Display Mode............................................14-7
Select/No-Select Bias Signals in 1/2 Duty, 1/2 Bias Display Mode ..........................14-8
Select/No-Select Bias Signals in 1/3 Duty, 1/3 Bias Display Mode ..........................14-8
LCD Signal and Wave Forms Example in 1/2 Duty, 1/2 Bias Display Mode...............14-9
LCD Signals and Wave Forms Example in 1/3 Duty, 1/3 Bias Display Mode.............14-10
LCD Signals and Wave Forms Example in 1/4 Duty, 1/3 Bias Display Mode.............14-11
Voltage Dividing Resistor Circuit Diagram ..............................................................14-12
15-1
15-2
15-3
15-4
A/D Converter Control Register (ADCON)...............................................................15-2
A/D Converter Data Register (ADDATAH/L)............................................................15-3
A/D Converter Functional Block Diagram ...............................................................15-4
Recommended A/D Converter Circuit for Highest Absolute Accuracy........................15-5
16-1
16-2
16-3
16-4
16-5
Serial I/O Module Control Registers (SIOCON).......................................................16-2
SIO Pre-scale Registers (SIOPS)..........................................................................16-3
SIO Functional Block Diagram..............................................................................16-3
Serial I/O Timing in Transmit/Receive Mode (Tx at falling, SIOCON.4 = 0).................16-4
Serial I/O Timing in Transmit/Receive Mode (Tx at rising, SIOCON.4 = 1) .................16-4
S3C8245/P8245/C8249/P8249 MICROCONTROLLER
xiii
List of Figures (Concluded)
Page
Title
Page
Number
Number
17-1
17-2
Voltage Booster Block Diagram............................................................................17-2
Pin Connection Example......................................................................................17-2
18-1
18-2
Block Diagram for Voltage Level Detect.................................................................18-1
Voltage Level Detect Circuit and Control Register...................................................18-2
19-1
19-2
19-3
19-4
19-5
19-6
19-7
Input Timing for External Interrupts (Ports 0)...........................................................19-6
Input Timing for nRESET......................................................................................19-6
Stop Mode Release Timing Initiated by nRESET....................................................19-7
Stop Mode(main) Release Timing Initiated by Interrupts ..........................................19-8
Stop Mode(sub) Release Timing Initiated by Interrupts............................................19-8
Serial Data Transfer Timing...................................................................................19-11
Clock Timing Measurement at X .........................................................................19-13
IN
19-8
Operating Voltage Range .....................................................................................19-14
20-1
20-2
Package Dimensions(80-QFP-1420C) ...................................................................20-1
Package Dimensions(80-TQFP-1212)....................................................................20-2
21-1
21-2
S3P8245/P8249 Pin Assignments (80-QFP Package) ............................................21-2
Operating Voltage Range .....................................................................................21-7
22-1
22-2
22-3
22-4
SMDS Product Configuration (SMDS2+)................................................................22-2
TB8245/9 Target Board Configuration.....................................................................22-3
40-Pin Connectors (J101, J102) for TB8245/9.........................................................22-6
S3E8240 Cables for 80-QFP Package...................................................................22-6
xiv
S3C8245/P8245/C8249/P8249 MICROCONTROLLER
List of Tables
Table
Title
Page
Number
Number
1-1
S3C8245/C8249 Pin Descriptions .........................................................................1-5
2-1
2-2
S3C8249/P8249 Register Type Summary ..............................................................2-3
S3C8245/P8245 Register Type Summary ..............................................................2-3
4-1
4-2
4-3
Set 1 Registers ...................................................................................................4-1
Set 1, Bank 0 Registers.......................................................................................4-2
Set 1, Bank 1 Registers.......................................................................................4-3
5-1
5-2
5-3
Interrupt Vectors..................................................................................................5-5
Interrupt Control Register Overview........................................................................5-6
Interrupt Source Control and Data Registers...........................................................5-8
6-1
6-2
6-3
6-4
6-5
6-6
Instruction Group Summary..................................................................................6-2
Flag Notation Conventions....................................................................................6-8
Instruction Set Symbols.......................................................................................6-8
Instruction Notation Conventions ...........................................................................6-9
Opcode Quick Reference.....................................................................................6-10
Condition Codes..................................................................................................6-12
8-1
8-2
8-3
S3C8245/C8249 Set 1 Register and Values after nRESET......................................8-2
S3C8245/C8249 Set 1, Bank 0 Register Values after nRESET................................8-3
S3C8245/C8249 Set 1, Bank 1 Register Values after nRESET................................8-4
9-1
9-2
S3C8245/C8249 Port Configuration Overview..........................................................9-1
Port Data Register Summary................................................................................9-2
13-1
Watch Timer Control Register (WTCON): Set 1, Bank 1, FAH, R/W.........................13-2
14-1
14-2
14-3
14-4
14-5
14-6
LCD Control Register (LCON) Organization............................................................14-4
Relationship of LCON.0 and LMOD.3 Bit Settings...................................................14-4
LCD Clock Signal (LCDCK) Frame Frequency........................................................14-5
LCD Mode Control Register (LMOD) Organization, D1H ..........................................14-6
Maximum Number of Display Digits per Duty Cycle................................................14-6
LCD Drive Voltage Values ....................................................................................14-7
S3C8245/P8245/C8249/P8249 MICROCONTROLLER
xv
List of Tables (Continued)
Table
Title
Page
Number
Number
18-1
VLDCON Value and Detection Level......................................................................18-2
19-1
19-2
19-3
19-4
19-5
19-6
19-7
19-8
19-9
19-10
19-11
Absolute Maximum Ratings..................................................................................19-2
D.C. Electrical Characteristics..............................................................................19-2
D.C Electrical Characteristics of S3C8245.............................................................19-5
A.C. Electrical Characteristics..............................................................................19-6
Input/Output Capacitance.....................................................................................19-7
Data Retention Supply Voltage in Stop Mode.........................................................19-7
A/D Converter Electrical Characteristics ................................................................19-9
Voltage Booster Electrical Characteristics.............................................................19-10
Characteristics of Voltage Level Detect Circuit .......................................................19-10
Synchronous SIO Electrical Characteristics...........................................................19-11
Main Oscillator Frequency (f
).........................................................................19-12
OSC1
19-12
19-13
19-14
Main Oscillator Clock Stabilization Time (t
).......................................................19-12
ST1
Sub Oscillator Frequency (f
)..........................................................................19-13
OSC2
Sub Oscillator(crystal) Stabilization Time (t
)......................................................19-14
ST2
21-1
21-2
21-3
21-4
21-5
Descriptions of Pins Used to Read/Write the EPROM.............................................21-3
Comparison of S3P8245/P8249 and S3C8245/C8249 Features................................21-3
Operating Mode Selection Criteria.........................................................................21-4
D.C Electrical Characteristics...............................................................................21-4
D.C Electrical Characteristics of S3C8245.............................................................21-7
22-1
22-2
22-3
22-4
Power Selection Settings for TB8245/9..................................................................22-4
Main-clock Selection Settings for TB8245/9...........................................................22-4
Device Selection Settings for TB8245/9 .................................................................22-5
The SMDS2+ Tool Selection Setting .....................................................................22-5
xvi
S3C8245/P8245/C8249/P8249 MICROCONTROLLER
List of Programming Tips
Description
Chapter 2:
Page
Number
Address Spaces
Using the Page Pointer for RAM clear (Page 0, Page1).......................................................................2-5
Setting the Register Pointers............................................................................................................2-9
Using the RPs to Calculate the Sum of a Series of Registers ..............................................................2-10
Addressing the Common Working Register Area................................................................................2-14
Standard Stack Operations Using PUSH and POP.............................................................................2-19
Chapter 11:
8-bit Timer A/B
To Generate 38 kHz, 1/3 duty signal through P3.0..............................................................................11-9
To Generate a one pulse signal through P3.0.....................................................................................11-10
S3C8245/P8245/C8249/P8249 MICROCONTROLLER
xvii
List of Register Descriptions
Register
Identifier
Full Register Name
Page
Number
ADCON
BTCON
CLKCON
EMT
A/D Converter Control Register .............................................................................4-5
Basic Timer Control Register................................................................................4-6
System Clock Control Register.............................................................................4-7
External Memory Timing Register .........................................................................4-8
System Flags Register ........................................................................................4-9
Interrupt Mask Register........................................................................................4-10
Interrupt Pending Register....................................................................................4-11
Instruction Pointer (High Byte) .............................................................................4-12
Instruction Pointer (Low Byte) ..............................................................................4-12
Interrupt Priority Register......................................................................................4-13
Interrupt Request Register....................................................................................4-14
LCD Control Register...........................................................................................4-15
LCD Mode Control Register..................................................................................4-16
Oscillator Control Register....................................................................................4-17
Port 0 Control Register (High Byte) .......................................................................4-18
Port 0 Control Register (Low Byte)........................................................................4-19
Port 0 Interrupt Control Register............................................................................4-20
Port 0 Interrupt Pending Register ..........................................................................4-22
Port 1 Control Register (High Byte) .......................................................................4-22
Port 1 Control Register (Low Byte)........................................................................4-23
Port 1 Pull-up Control Register..............................................................................4-24
Port 2 Control Register (High Byte) .......................................................................4-25
Port 2 Control Register (Low Byte)........................................................................4-26
Port 3 Control Register (High Byte) .......................................................................4-27
Port 3 Control Register (Low Byte)........................................................................4-28
Port 4 Control Register (High Byte) .......................................................................4-29
Port 4 Control Register (Low Byte)........................................................................4-30
Port 5 Control Register (High Byte) .......................................................................4-31
Port 5 Control Register (Low Byte)........................................................................4-32
FLAGS
IMR
INTPND
IPH
IPL
IPR
IRQ
LCON
LMOD
OSCCON
P0CONH
P0CONL
P0INT
P0PND
P1CONH
P1CONL
P1PUR
P2CONH
P2CONL
P3CONH
P3CONL
P4CONH
P4CONL
P5CONH
P5CONL
S3C8245/P8245/C8249/P8249 MICROCONTROLLER
xix
List of Register Descriptions (Continued)
Register
Identifier
Full Register Name
Page
Number
PP
Register Page Pointer..........................................................................................4-33
Register Pointer 0................................................................................................4-34
Register Pointer 1................................................................................................4-34
SIO Control Register............................................................................................4-35
Stack Pointer (High Byte).....................................................................................4-36
Stack Pointer (Low Byte) .....................................................................................4-36
Stop Control Register...........................................................................................4-37
System Mode Register ........................................................................................4-38
Timer 0 Control Register.......................................................................................4-39
Timer 1 Control Register.......................................................................................4-40
Timer A Control Register......................................................................................4-41
Timer B Control Register......................................................................................4-42
Voltage Level Detector Control Register.................................................................4-43
Watch Timer Control Register...............................................................................4-44
RP0
RP1
SIOCON
SPH
SPL
STPCON
SYM
T0CON
T1CON
TACON
TBCON
VLDCON
WTCON
xx
S3C8245/P8245/C8249/P8249 MICROCONTROLLER
List of Instruction Descriptions
Instruction
Mnemonic
Full Register Name
Page
Number
ADC
ADD
AND
BAND
BCP
BITC
BITR
BITS
BOR
BTJRF
BTJRT
BXOR
CALL
CCF
CLR
COM
CP
Add with Carry ....................................................................................................6-14
Add....................................................................................................................6-15
Logical AND........................................................................................................6-16
Bit AND..............................................................................................................6-17
Bit Compare........................................................................................................6-18
Bit Complement ..................................................................................................6-19
Bit Reset ............................................................................................................6-20
Bit Set................................................................................................................6-21
Bit OR................................................................................................................6-22
Bit Test, Jump Relative on False...........................................................................6-23
Bit Test, Jump Relative on True.............................................................................6-24
Bit XOR..............................................................................................................6-25
Call Procedure ....................................................................................................6-26
Complement Carry Flag .......................................................................................6-27
Clear..................................................................................................................6-28
Complement .......................................................................................................6-29
Compare.............................................................................................................6-30
Compare, Increment, and Jump on Equal...............................................................6-31
Compare, Increment, and Jump on Non-Equal........................................................6-32
Decimal Adjust....................................................................................................6-33
Decrement..........................................................................................................6-35
Decrement Word.................................................................................................6-36
Disable Interrupts ................................................................................................6-37
Divide (Unsigned).................................................................................................6-38
Decrement and Jump if Non-Zero ..........................................................................6-39
Enable Interrupts.................................................................................................6-40
Enter..................................................................................................................6-41
Exit....................................................................................................................6-42
Idle Operation......................................................................................................6-43
Increment ...........................................................................................................6-44
Increment Word...................................................................................................6-45
Interrupt Return ...................................................................................................6-46
Jump..................................................................................................................6-47
Jump Relative......................................................................................................6-48
Load...................................................................................................................6-49
Load Bit..............................................................................................................6-51
CPIJE
CPIJNE
DA
DEC
DECW
DI
DIV
DJNZ
EI
ENTER
EXIT
IDLE
INC
INCW
IRET
JP
JR
LD
LDB
S3C8245/P8245/C8249/P8249 MICROCONTROLLER
xxi
List of Instruction Descriptions(Continued)
Instruction
Mnemonic
Full Register Name
Page
Number
LDC/LDE
LDCD/LDED
LDCI/LDEI
LDCPD/LDEPD
LDCPI/LDEPI
LDW
Load Memory......................................................................................................6-52
Load Memory and Decrement...............................................................................6-54
Load Memory and Increment ................................................................................6-55
Load Memory with Pre-Decrement ........................................................................6-56
Load Memory with Pre-Increment..........................................................................6-57
Load Word..........................................................................................................6-58
Multiply (Unsigned)..............................................................................................6-59
Next...................................................................................................................6-60
No Operation.......................................................................................................6-61
Logical OR..........................................................................................................6-62
Pop from Stack...................................................................................................6-63
Pop User Stack (Decrementing)............................................................................6-64
Pop User Stack (Incrementing).............................................................................6-65
Push to Stack.....................................................................................................6-66
Push User Stack (Decrementing)..........................................................................6-67
Push User Stack (Incrementing) ...........................................................................6-68
Reset Carry Flag.................................................................................................6-69
Return................................................................................................................6-70
Rotate Left..........................................................................................................6-71
Rotate Left through Carry .....................................................................................6-72
Rotate Right........................................................................................................6-73
Rotate Right through Carry ...................................................................................6-74
Select Bank 0.....................................................................................................6-75
Select Bank 1.....................................................................................................6-76
Subtract with Carry..............................................................................................6-77
Set Carry Flag.....................................................................................................6-78
Shift Right Arithmetic...........................................................................................6-79
Set Register Pointer ............................................................................................6-80
Stop Operation....................................................................................................6-81
Subtract .............................................................................................................6-82
Swap Nibbles......................................................................................................6-83
Test Complement under Mask..............................................................................6-84
Test under Mask .................................................................................................6-85
Wait for Interrupt..................................................................................................6-86
Logical Exclusive OR...........................................................................................6-87
MULT
NEXT
NOP
OR
POP
POPUD
POPUI
PUSH
PUSHUD
PUSHUI
RCF
RET
RL
RLC
RR
RRC
SB0
SB1
SBC
SCF
SRA
SRP/SRP0/SRP1
STOP
SUB
SWAP
TCM
TM
WFI
XOR
S3C8245/P8245/C8249/P8249 MICROCONTROLLER
xxiii
S3C8245/P8245/C8249/P8249
PRODUCT OVERVIEW
1
PRODUCT OVERVIEW
S3C8-SERIES MICROCONTROLLERS
Samsung's S3C8 series of 8-bit single-chip CMOS microcontrollers offers a fast and efficient CPU, a wide range of
integrated peripherals, and various mask-programmable ROM sizes. Among the major CPU features are:
— Efficient register-oriented architecture
— Selectable CPU clock sources
— Idle and Stop power-down mode release by interrupt
— Built-in basic timer with watchdog function
A sophisticated interrupt structure recognizes up to eight interrupt levels. Each level can have one or more interrupt
sources and vectors. Fast interrupt processing (within a minimum of four CPU clocks) can be assigned to specific
interrupt levels.
S3C8245/P8245/C8249/P8249 MICROCONTROLLER
The S3C8245/P8245/C8249/P8249 single-chip CMOS
microcontroller are fabricated using the highly
advanced CMOS process, based on Samsung’s
newest CPU architecture.
— Six programmable I/O ports, including five 8-bit
ports and one 5-bit port, for a total of 45 pins.
— Eight bit-programmable pins for external
interrupts.
The S3C8245, S3C8249 are a microcontroller with a
16K-byte, 32K-byte mask-programmable ROM
embedded respectively.
— One 8-bit basic timer for oscillation stabilization
and watchdog functions (system reset).
— Two 8-bit timer/counter and two 16-bit
timer/counter with selectable operating modes.
The S3P8245 is a microcontroller with a 16K-byte
one-time-programmable ROM embedded.
The S3P8249 is a microcontroller with a 32K-byte
one-time-programmable ROM embedded.
— Watch timer for real time.
— 8-input A/D converter
— Serial I/O interface
Using a proven modular design approach, Samsung
engineers have successfully developed the
S3C8245/P8245/C8249/P8249 by integrating the
following peripheral modules with the powerful SAM8
core:
The S3C8245/P8245/C8249/P8249 is versatile
microcontroller for camera, LCD and ADC application,
etc. They are currently available in 80-pin TQFP and
80-pin QFP package
OTP
The S3P8245/P8249 are OTP (One Time Programmable) version of the S3C8245/C8249 microcontroller. The
S3P8245 microcontroller has an on-chip 16K-byte one-time-programmable EPROM instead of a masked ROM. The
S3P8249 microcontroller has an on-chip 32K-byte one-time-programmable EPROM instead of a masked ROM. The
S3P8245 is comparable to the S3P8245, both in function and in pin configuration.
The S3P8249 is comparable to the S3P8249, both in function and in pin configuration.
1-1
PRODUCT OVERVIEW
S3C8245/P8245/C8249/P8249
FEATURES
Memory
45 I/O Pins
•
•
•
•
•
ROM: 32K-byte (S3C8249/P8249)
ROM: 16K-byte (S3C8245/P8245)
RAM: 1056-Byte (S3C8249/P8249)
RAM: 544-Byte (S3C8245/P8245)
Data memory mapped I/O
•
45 configurable I/O pins
Basic Timer
•
•
Overflow signal makes a system reset.
Watchdog function
8-Bit Timer/Counter A
Oscillation Sources
•
•
•
Programmable 8-bit timer
•
•
•
Crystal, ceramic, RC (main)
Interval, capture, PWM mode
Crystal for subsystem clock
Match/capture, overflow interrupt
Main system clock frequency 1-10 MHz
(3 MHz at 1.8 V, 10 MHz at 2.7 V)
Subsystem clock frequency: 32.768 kHz
CPU clock divider (1/1, 1/2, 1/8, 1/16)
8-Bit Timer/Counter B
•
•
Programmable 8-bit timer
Carrier frequency generator
•
•
16-Bit Timer/Counter 0
Two Power-Down Modes
•
•
Programmable 16-bit timer
Match interrupt generates
•
•
Idle (only CPU clock stops)
Stop (System clock stops)
16-Bit Timer/Counter 1
Interrupts
•
•
6 level 8 vector 8 internal interrupt
2 level 8 vector 8 external interrupt
•
•
•
Programmable 16-bit timer
Interval, capture, PWM mode
Match/capture, overflow interrupt
Watch Timer
Voltage Detector
•
•
•
Real-time and interval time measurement
•
Programmable detection voltage
(2.2 V, 2.4 V, 3.0 V, 4.0 V)
Clock generation for LCD
•
En/Disable S/W selectable
Four frequency outputs for buzzer sound
Instruction Execution Times
LCD Controller/Driver
•
•
400 ns at 10 MHz (main)
•
•
•
Maximum 16-digit LCD direct drive capability
Display modes: static, 1/2 duty (1/2 bias)
1/3 duty (1/2 or 1/3 bias), 1/4 duty (1/3 bias)
122 us at 32.768 kHz (subsystem)
Operating Temperature Range
-25 °C to 85 °C
Operating Voltage Range
1.8 V to 5.5 V
Package Type
A/D Converter
•
•
•
Eight analog input channels
50 ms conversion speed at 1 MHz f
clock
ADC
•
•
10-bit conversion resolution
8-Bit Serial I/O Interface
•
•
80-QFP-1420C
80-TQFP-1212
•
•
•
•
8-bit transmit/receive mode
8-bit receive mode
LSB-first/MSB-first transmission selectable
Internal/external clock source
Voltage Booster
•
•
•
LCD display voltage supply
S/W control en/disable
3.0 V drive
1-2
S3C8245/P8245/C8249/P8249
PRODUCT OVERVIEW
BLOCK DIAGRAM
X
IN XTIN
BUZ/P1.4
TAOUT/TAPWM/P3.1
TACLK/P3.2
XOUT XTOUT
nRESET
8-Bit
Timer/
Counter A
Voltage
VVLDREF/
TACAP/P3.3
Detector
P2.7/ADC7
8-Bit
Timer/
Counter B
OSC/
nRESET
Basic
Timer
Watch
Timer
TBPWM/P3.0
CB
CA
Voltage
Booster
16-Bit
Timer/
Counter 0
VLC0-VLC2
COM0-COM3
SEG0-SEG15
T1CAP/P1.0
T1CLK/P1.1
T1OUT/T1PWM/P1.2
LCD
Driver
16-Bit
Timer/
Counter 1
I/O Port and Interrupt Control
SEG16-SEG23/
P4.0-P4.7
SEG24-SEG31/
P5.0-P5.7
P0.0-P0.7/
INT0-INT7
I/O Port 0
I/O Port 1
P1.0-P1.7
SAM88 RC CPU
SI/P1.7
Serial I/O
Port
SO/P1.5
SCK/P1.6
AVREF
AVSS
A/D
Converter
P4.0-P4.7/
SEG16-SEG23
I/O Port 4
I/O Port 5
P2.0-P2.7/
ADC0-ADC7
544/1056 Byte
Register File
16/32-Kbyte
ROM
I/O Port 2
I/O Port 3
P5.0-P5.7/
SEG24-SEG31
P3.0-P3.4
Figure 1-1. Block Diagram
1-3
PRODUCT OVERVIEW
S3C8245/P8245/C8249/P8249
PIN ASSIGNMENT
SEG26/P5.2
SEG27/P5.3
SEG28/P5.4
SEG29/P5.5
SEG30/P5.6
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
64
63
62
61
60
59
58
57
56
55
54
53
52
51
50
49
48
47
46
45
44
43
42
41
SEG9
SEG8
SEG7
SEG6
SEG5
SEG4
SEG3
SEG2
SEG1
SEG0
COM3
COM2
COM1
COM0
SEG31/P5.7
P3.0/TBPWM
P3.1/TAOUT/TAPWM
P3.2/TACLK
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
P3.3/TACAP/SDAT
P3.4/SCLK
S3C8245/C8249
V
DD
SS
OUT
IN
V
X
X
(80-QFP-1420C)
V
V
V
LC2
LC1
LC0
TEST
XTIN
XTOUT
CA
CB
AVSS
AVREF
P2.7/ADC7/VVLDREF
P2.6/ADC6
P2.5/ADC5
nRESET
P0.0/INT0
P0.1/INT1
P0.2/INT2
P0.3/INT3
P0.4/INT4
NOTE: The sequence of pins in TQFP package is identical with that in QFP package.
Figure 1-2. S3C8245/C8249 Pin Assignments (80-QFP-1420C)
1-4
S3C8245/P8245/C8249/P8249
PRODUCT OVERVIEW
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
60
59
58
57
56
55
54
53
52
51
50
49
48
47
46
45
44
43
42
41
SEG26/P5.2
SEG27/P5.3
SEG28/P5.4
SEG29/P5.5
SEG30/P5.6
SEG5
SEG4
SEG3
SEG2
SEG1
SEG0
COM3
COM2
COM1
COM0
SEG31/P5.7
P3.0/TBPWM
P3.1/TAOUT/TAPWM
P3.2/TACLK
9
S3C8245/C8249
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
P3.3/TACAP/SDAT
P3.4/SCLK
V
V
V
LC2
LC1
LC0
(80-TQFP-1212)
V
DD
SS
OUT
IN
V
X
X
CA
CB
AVSS
AVREF
P2.7/ADC7/V LDREF
P2.6/ADC6
P2.5/ADC5
TEST
XTIN
XTOUT
nRESET
P0.0/INT0
Figure 1-3. S3C8245/C8249 Pin Assignments (80-TQFP-1212)
1-5
PRODUCT OVERVIEW
S3C8245/P8245/C8249/P8249
PIN DESCRIPTIONS
Table 1-1. S3C8245/C8249 Pin Descriptions
Pin
Names
Pin
Type
Pin
Description
Circuit
Type
Pin
Share
Pins
(note)
Numbers
P0.0–P0.7
I/O
I/O port with bit programmable pins;
Schmitt trigger input or output mode
selected by software; software assignable
pull-up. P0.0–P0.7 can be used as inputs
for external interrupts INT0–INT7
D–4
20–27
INT0–INT7
(with noise filter and interrupt control).
P1.0–1.7
I/O
I/O port with bit programmable pins; Input
or output mode selected by software;
Open-drain output mode can be selected
by software; software assignable pull-up.
Alternately P1.0–P1.7 can be used as SI,
SO, SCK, BUZ, T1CAP, T1CLK, T1OUT,
T1PWM
E–2
28-35
SI, SO, SCK,
BUZ, T1CAP
T1CLK
T1OUT
T1PWM
P2.0–P2.7
P3.0–P3.4
I/O
I/O
I/O port with bit programmable pins;
normal input and AD input or output mode
selected by software; software assignable
pull-up.
F–10
F–18
36–42,
43
ADC0–ADC6
V
VLDREF
(ADC7)
I/O port with bit programmable pins. Input
or push-pull output with software
assignable pull-up. Alternately P3.0–P3.3
can be used as TACAP, TACLK, TAOUT,
TAPWM, TBPWM
D–2
7–11
TACAP
TACLK
TAOUT
TAPWM
TBPWM
P4.0–P4.7
P5.0–P5.7
I/O
I/O
I/O port with bit programmable pins. Push-
pull or open drain output and input with
software assignable pull-up.
P4.0–P4.7 can alternately be used as
outputs for LCD SEG
H–14
H–14
71–78
79–6
SEG16–SEG23
I/O port with bit programmable pins. Push-
pull or open drain output and input with
software assignable pull-up.
SEG24–SEG31
P5.0–P5.7 can alternately be used as
outputs for LCD SEG.
1-6
S3C8245/P8245/C8249/P8249
PRODUCT OVERVIEW
Table 1-1. S3C8245/C8249 Pin Descriptions (Continued)
Pin
Names
Pin
Type
Pin
Description
Circuit
Type
Pin
Share
Pins
(note)
Numbers
ADC0–ADC6
ADC7
I
A/D converter analog input channels
F–10
F–18
36–42
43
P2.0–P2.6
P2.7
AV
–
–
A/D converter reference voltage
A/D converter ground
–
–
44
45
–
–
REF
AV
SS
INT0–INT7
nRESET
I
I
External interrupt input pins
D–4
B
20–27
19
P0.0–P0.7
–
System reset pin
(pull-up resistor: 250 kW)
TEST
I
0 V: Normal MCU operating
5 V: Test mode
–
16
–
12 V: for OTP writing
SDAT, SCLK
O
–
Serial OTP interface pins; serial data
and clock
D–2
–
10, 11
12, 13
P3.3, P3.4
–
V
V
Power input pins for CPU operation
(internal) and Power input for OTP
Writing
DD, SS
X
X
–
Main oscillator pins
–
14, 15
–
OUT, IN
SO, SCK, SI
I/O
I
Serial I/O interface clock signal
E–2
33–35
43
P1.5–P1.7
P2.7
V
Voltage detector reference voltage input
F–18
VLDREF
TACAP
I
Timer A Capture input
D–2
D–2
D–2
D–2
E–2
E–2
E–2
H
10
9
P3.3
P3.2
P3.1
P3.0
P1.0
P1.1
P1.2
–
TACLK
I
Timer A External clock input
Timer A output and PWM output
Timer B PWM output
TAOUT/TAPWM
TBPWM
O
O
I
8
7
T1CAP
Timer 1 Capture input
28
T1CLK
I
Timer 1 External clock input
Timer 1 output and PWM output
LCD common signal output
LCD segment output
29
T1OUT/T1PWM
COM0–COM3
SEG0–SEG15
SEG16–SEG23
SEG24–SEG31
O
O
O
O
O
O
30
51–54
55–70
71–78
79–6
48–50
H
–
LCD segment output
H–14
H–14
–
P4.0–P4.7
P5.0–P5.7
–
LCD Segment output
V
–V
LCD power supply
LC0 LC2
BUZ
O
0.5, 1, 2 or 4 kHz frequency output for
buzzer sound with 4.19 MHz main
system clock or 32768 Hz subsystem
clock
E–2
32
P1.4
CA, CB
–
Capacitor terminal for voltage booster
–
46–47
–
1-7
PRODUCT OVERVIEW
S3C8245/P8245/C8249/P8249
PIN CIRCUITS
VDD
VDD
Pull-up
Enable
P-Channel
I/O
Data
Circuit
Type C
Output
Disable
In
Figure 1-6. Pin Circuit Type D-2 (P3)
Figure 1-4. Pin Circuit Type B (nRESET)
VDD
V
DD
VDD
Pull-up
Enable
Data
P-Channel
Out
Pin Circuit
Type C
Data
I/O
Output
Disable
N-Channel
Output
Disable
Noise
Filter
Ext.INT
Input
Normal
Figure 1-7. Pin Circuit Type D-4 (P0)
Figure 1-5. Pin Circuit Type C
1-8
S3C8245/P8245/C8249/P8249
PRODUCT OVERVIEW
VDD
VDD
Open drain
Enable
Pull-up
Resistor
Pull-up
Enable
VDD
P-CH
N-CH
Data
Output
Disable
Circuit
Type C
Data
I/O
I/O
ADC & VLD
Enable
Output
Disable
Data
VLDREF
To ADC
Schmitt Trigger
Figure 1-8. Pin Circuit Type E-2 (P1)
Figure 1-10. Pin Circuit Type F-18 (P2.7/VLD
)
REF
VDD
V
LC2
LC1
Pull-up
Enable
V
Data
Circuit
Type C
Output
SEG/
COM
Out
I/O
Disable
ADCEN
Data
VLC0
To ADC
Figure 1-9. Pin Circuit Type F-10 (P2.0–P2.6)
Figure 1-11. Pin Circuit Type H (SEG/COM)
1-9
PRODUCT OVERVIEW
S3C8245/P8245/C8249/P8249
V
LC2
LC1
V
SEG
Output
Disable
VLC0
Figure 1-12. Pin Circuit Type H-4
VDD
VDD
Open Drain EN
Data
Pull-up
Enable
LCD Out EN
SEG
Circuit
Type H-4
Output
Disable
Figure 1-13. Pin Circuit Type H-14 (P4, P5)
1-10
S3C8245/P8245/C8249/P8249
ADDRESS SPACES
2
ADDRESS SPACES
OVERVIEW
The S3C8245/C8249 microcontroller has two types of address space:
— Internal program memory (ROM)
— Internal register file
A 16-bit address bus supports program memory operations. A separate 8-bit register bus carries addresses and data
between the CPU and the register file.
The S3C8245 has an internal 16-Kbyte mask-programmable ROM. The S3C8249 has an internal 32-Kbyte mask-
programmable ROM.
The 256-byte physical register space is expanded into an addressable area of 320 bytes using addressing modes.
A 16-byte LCD display register file is implemented.
There are 1,109 mapped registers in the internal register file. Of these, 1,040 are for general-purpose.
(This number includes a 16-byte working register common area used as a “scratch area” for data operations, four
192-byte prime register areas, and four 64-byte areas (Set 2)). Thirteen 8-bit registers are used for the CPU and the
system control, and 53 registers are mapped for peripheral controls and data registers. Twelve register locations are
not mapped.
2-1
ADDRESS SPACES
S3C8245/P8245/C8249/P8249
PROGRAM MEMORY (ROM)
Program memory (ROM) stores program codes or table data. The S3C8249 has 32K bytes internal mask-
programmable program memory, the S3C8245 has 16K bytes.
The first 256 bytes of the ROM (0H–0FFH) are reserved for interrupt vector addresses. Unused locations in this
address range can be used as normal program memory. If you use the vector address area to store a program code,
be careful not to overwrite the vector addresses stored in these locations.
The ROM address at which a program execution starts after a reset is 0100H.
(Decimal)
32,767
(HEX)
7FFFH (S3C8249)
32K-byte
16384
16383
4000H
3FFFH (S3C8245)
16K-byte
255
0
0FFH
0H
Interrupt
Vector Area
Figure 2-1. Program Memory Address Space
2-2
S3C8245/P8245/C8249/P8249
ADDRESS SPACES
REGISTER ARCHITECTURE
In the S3C8245/C8249 implementation, the upper 64-byte area of register files is expanded two 64-byte areas, called
set 1 and set 2. The upper 32-byte area of set 1 is further expanded two 32-byte register banks (bank 0 and bank 1),
and the lower 32-byte area is a single 32-byte common area.
In case of S3C8249/P8249 the total number of addressable 8-bit registers is 1122. Of these 1122 registers, 16 bytes
are for CPU and system control registers, 16 bytes are for LCD data registers, 50 bytes are for peripheral control and
data registers, 16 bytes are used as a shared working registers, and 1024 registers are for general-purpose use,
page 0-page 4 (in case of S3C8245/P8245, page 0-page 2).
You can always address set 1 register locations, regardless of which of the four register pages is currently selected.
Set 1 locations, however, can only be addressed using register addressing modes.
The extension of register space into separately addressable areas (sets, banks, and pages) is supported by various
addressing mode restrictions, the select bank instructions, SB0 and SB1, and the register page pointer (PP).
Specific register types and the area (in bytes) that they occupy in the register file are summarized in Table 2–1.
Table 2-1. S3C8249/P8249 Register Type Summary
Register Type
Number of Bytes
General-purpose registers (including the 16-byte common
working register area, four 192-byte prime register area,
and four 64-byte set 2 area)
1,040
LCD data registers
CPU and system control registers
Mapped clock, peripheral, I/O control, and data registers
16
16
50
1,122
Total Addressable Bytes
Table 2-2. S3C8245/P8245 Register Type Summary
Register Type
Number of Bytes
General-purpose registers (including the 16-byte common
working register area, four 192-byte prime register area,
and four 64-byte set 2 area)
528
LCD data registers
CPU and system control registers
Mapped clock, peripheral, I/O control, and data registers
16
16
50
610
Total Addressable Bytes
2-3
ADDRESS SPACES
S3C8245/P8245/C8249/P8249
Page3
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
Set1
Page 2
Page 1
Bank 1
FFH
Bank 0
Page 0
Set 2
32
Bytes
System and
Peripheral Control
Registers
General-Purpose
Data Registers
E0H
(Register Addressing Mode)
E0H
DFH
64
Bytes
(Indirect Register, Indexed
Mode, and Stack
Operations)
System Registers
(Register Addressing Mode)
256
Bytes
D0H
CFH
C0H
BFH
General Purpose Register
(Register Addressing Mode)
Page 0
C0H
0FH
~
~
Page 4
~
Prime
Data Registers
192
Bytes
~
~
Prime
Data Registers
(All Addressing Modes)
16
Bytes
~
~
(All addressing modes)
LCD Display Reigster
00H
00H
NOTE:
In case of S3C8245/P8245, there are page 0, page 1, and page 4.
Page 4 is for LCD display register, 16 bytes.
Figure 2-2. Internal Register File Organization
2-4
S3C8245/P8245/C8249/P8249
ADDRESS SPACES
REGISTER PAGE POINTER (PP)
The S3C8-series architecture supports the logical expansion of the physical 256-byte internal register file (using an
8-bit data bus) into as many as 16 separately addressable register pages. Page addressing is controlled by the
register page pointer (PP, DFH). In the S3C8245/C8249 microcontroller, a paged register file expansion is
implemented for LCD data registers, and the register page pointer must be changed to address other pages.
After a reset, the page pointer's source value (lower nibble) and the destination value (upper nibble) are always
"0000", automatically selecting page 0 as the source and destination page for register addressing.
Register Page Pointer (PP)
DFH ,Set 1, R/W
MSB
.7
.6
.5
.4
.3
.2
.1
.0
LSB
Destination register page selection bits:
Source register page selection bits:
0000 Source: Page 0
0000
Destination: Page 0
NOTE:
A hardware reset operation writes the 4-bit destination and
source values shown above to the register page pointer. These values should
be modified to address other pages.
Figure 2-3. Register Page Pointer (PP)
+
PROGRAMMING TIP — Using the Page Pointer for RAM clear (Page 0, Page 1)
LD
SRP
LD
CLR
DJNZ
CLR
PP,#00H
#0C0H
R0,#0FFH
@R0
R0,RAMCL0
@R0
;
;
Destination ¬ 0, Source ¬
0
0
Page 0 RAM clear starts
RAMCL0
;
R0 = 00H
LD
LD
CLR
DJNZ
CLR
PP,#10H
R0,#0FFH
@R0
R0,RAMCL1
@R0
;
;
Destination ¬ 1, Source ¬
Page 1 RAM clear starts
RAMCL1
;
R0 = 00H
NOTE: You should refer to page 6-39 and use DJNZ instruction properly when DJNZ instruction is used in your program.
2-5
ADDRESS SPACES
S3C8245/P8245/C8249/P8249
REGISTER SET 1
The term set 1 refers to the upper 64 bytes of the register file, locations C0H–FFH.
The upper 32-byte area of this 64-byte space (E0H–FFH) is expanded two 32-byte register banks, bank 0 and bank
1. The set register bank instructions, SB0 or SB1, are used to address one bank or the other. A hardware reset
operation always selects bank 0 addressing.
The upper two 32-byte areas (bank 0 and bank 1) of set 1 (E0H–FFH) contains 50 mapped system and peripheral
control registers. The lower 32-byte area contains 16 system registers (D0H–DFH) and a 16-byte common working
register area (C0H–CFH). You can use the common working register area as a “scratch” area for data operations
being performed in other areas of the register file.
Registers in set 1 locations are directly accessible at all times using Register addressing mode. The 16-byte
working register area can only be accessed using working register addressing (For more information about working
register addressing, please refer to Chapter 3, “Addressing Modes.”)
REGISTER SET 2
The same 64-byte physical space that is used for set 1 locations C0H–FFH is logically duplicated to add another 64
bytes of register space. This expanded area of the register file is called set 2. For the S3C8249,
the set 2 address range (C0H–FFH) is accessible on pages 0–3.
S3C8245, the set 2 address range (C0H-FFH) is accessible on pages 0-1.
The logical division of set 1 and set 2 is maintained by means of addressing mode restrictions. You can use only
Register addressing mode to access set 1 locations. In order to access registers in set 2, you must use Register
Indirect addressing mode or Indexed addressing mode.
The set 2 register area is commonly used for stack operations.
2-6
S3C8245/P8245/C8249/P8249
PRIME REGISTER SPACE
ADDRESS SPACES
The lower 192 bytes (00H–BFH) of the S3C8245/C8249's four or two 256-byte register pages is called prime register
area. Prime registers can be accessed using any of the seven addressing modes
(see Chapter 3, "Addressing Modes.")
The prime register area on page 0 is immediately addressable following a reset. In order to address prime registers
on pages 0, 1, 2, 3, or 4 you must set the register page pointer (PP) to the appropriate source and destination
values.
FFH
Page 3
FFH
Page 2
FFH
FFH
Set 1
Page 1
Bank 0
Bank 1
Page 0
FFH
FCH
E0H
D0H
Set 2
C0H
BFH
Page 0
C0H
Prime
Space
CPU and system control
General-purpose
Page 4
0FH
00H
LCD Data
Register Area
Peripheral and I/O
LCD data register
00H
Figure 2-4. Set 1, Set 2, Prime Area Register, and LCD Data Register Map
2-7
ADDRESS SPACES
S3C8245/P8245/C8249/P8249
WORKING REGISTERS
Instructions can access specific 8-bit registers or 16-bit register pairs using either 4-bit or 8-bit address fields. When
4-bit working register addressing is used, the 256-byte register file can be seen by the programmer as one that
consists of 32 8-byte register groups or "slices." Each slice comprises of eight 8-bit registers.
Using the two 8-bit register pointers, RP1 and RP0, two working register slices can be selected at any one time to
form a 16-byte working register block. Using the register pointers, you can move this 16-byte register block
anywhere in the addressable register file, except the set 2 area.
The terms slice and block are used in this manual to help you visualize the size and relative locations of selected
working register spaces:
— One working register slice is 8 bytes (eight 8-bit working registers, R0–R7 or R8–R15)
— One working register block is 16 bytes (sixteen 8-bit working registers, R0–R15)
All the registers in an 8-byte working register slice have the same binary value for their five most significant address
bits. This makes it possible for each register pointer to point to one of the 24 slices in the register file. The base
addresses for the two selected 8-byte register slices are contained in register pointers RP0 and RP1.
After a reset, RP0 and RP1 always point to the 16-byte common area in set 1 (C0H–CFH).
FFH
Slice 32
F8H
F7H
F0H
Slice 31
1 1 1 1 1 X X X
Set 1
Only
RP1 (Registers R8-R15)
Each register pointer points to
one 8-byte slice of the register
space, selecting a total 16-byte
working register block.
CFH
C0H
~
~
0 0 0 0 0 X X X
10H
FH
8H
7H
0H
RP0 (Registers R0-R7)
Slice 2
Slice 1
Figure 2-5. 8-Byte Working Register Areas (Slices)
2-8
S3C8245/P8245/C8249/P8249
ADDRESS SPACES
USING THE REGISTER POINTS
Register pointers RP0 and RP1, mapped to addresses D6H and D7H in set 1, are used to select two movable 8-byte
working register slices in the register file. After a reset, they point to the working register common area: RP0 points
to addresses C0H–C7H, and RP1 points to addresses C8H–CFH.
To change a register pointer value, you load a new value to RP0 and/or RP1 using an SRP or LD instruction.
(see Figures 2-6 and 2-7).
With working register addressing, you can only access those two 8-bit slices of the register file that are currently
pointed to by RP0 and RP1. You cannot, however, use the register pointers to select a working register space in set
2, C0H–FFH, because these locations can be accessed only using the Indirect Register or Indexed addressing
modes.
The selected 16-byte working register block usually consists of two contiguous 8-byte slices. As a general
programming guideline, it is recommended that RP0 point to the "lower" slice and RP1 point to the "upper" slice
(see Figure 2-6). In some cases, it may be necessary to define working register areas in different (non-contiguous)
areas of the register file. In Figure 2-7, RP0 points to the "upper" slice and RP1 to the "lower" slice.
Because a register pointer can point to either of the two 8-byte slices in the working register block, you can flexibly
define the working register area to support program requirements.
+
PROGRAMMING TIP — Setting the Register Pointers
SRP
SRP1
SRP0
CLR
LD
#70H
#48H
#0A0H
RP0
RP1,#0F8H
;
;
;
;
;
RP0 ¬ 70H, RP1 ¬ 78H
RP0 ¬ no change, RP1 ¬ 48H,
RP0 ¬ A0H, RP1 ¬ no change
RP0 ¬ 00H, RP1 ¬ no change
RP0 ¬ no change, RP1 ¬ 0F8H
Register File
Contains 32
8-Byte Slices
0 0 0 0 1 X X X
RP1
FH (R15)
16-Byte
Contiguous
Working
8-Byte Slice
8-Byte Slice
8H
7H
0 0 0 0 0 X X X
RP0
Register block
0H (R0)
Figure 2-6. Contiguous 16-Byte Working Register Block
2-9
ADDRESS SPACES
S3C8245/P8245/C8249/P8249
F7H (R7)
F0H (R0)
8-Byte Slice
16-Byte
Contiguous
working
Register File
Contains 32
8-Byte Slices
1 1 1 1 0 X X X
Register block
RP0
0 0 0 0 0 X X X
RP1
7H (R15)
0H (R0)
8-Byte Slice
Figure 2-7. Non-Contiguous 16-Byte Working Register Block
+
PROGRAMMING TIP — Using the RPs to Calculate the Sum of a Series of Registers
Calculate the sum of registers 80H–85H using the register pointer. The register addresses from 80H through 85H
contain the values 10H, 11H, 12H, 13H, 14H, and 15 H, respectively:
SRP0
ADD
ADC
ADC
ADC
ADC
#80H
;
;
;
;
;
;
RP0 ¬ 80H
R0 ¬ R0 + R1
R0 ¬ R0 + R2 + C
R0 ¬ R0 + R3 + C
R0 ¬ R0 + R4 + C
R0 ¬ R0 + R5 + C
R0,R1
R0,R2
R0,R3
R0,R4
R0,R5
The sum of these six registers, 6FH, is located in the register R0 (80H). The instruction string used in this example
takes 12 bytes of instruction code and its execution time is 36 cycles. If the register pointer is not used to calculate
the sum of these registers, the following instruction sequence would have to be used:
ADD
ADC
ADC
ADC
ADC
80H,81H
80H,82H
80H,83H
80H,84H
80H,85H
;
;
;
;
;
80H ¬ (80H) + (81H)
80H ¬ (80H) + (82H) + C
80H ¬ (80H) + (83H) + C
80H ¬ (80H) + (84H) + C
80H ¬ (80H) + (85H) + C
Now, the sum of the six registers is also located in register 80H. However, this instruction string takes 15 bytes of
instruction code rather than 12 bytes, and its execution time is 50 cycles rather than 36 cycles.
2-10
S3C8245/P8245/C8249/P8249
ADDRESS SPACES
REGISTER ADDRESSING
The S3C8-series register architecture provides an efficient method of working register addressing that takes full
advantage of shorter instruction formats to reduce execution time.
With Register (R) addressing mode, in which the operand value is the content of a specific register or register pair,
you can access any location in the register file except for set 2. With working register addressing, you use a register
pointer to specify an 8-byte working register space in the register file and an 8-bit register within that space.
Registers are addressed either as a single 8-bit register or as a paired 16-bit register space. In a 16-bit register pair,
the address of the first 8-bit register is always an even number and the address of the next register is always an odd
number. The most significant byte of the 16-bit data is always stored in the even-numbered register, and the least
significant byte is always stored in the next (+1) odd-numbered register.
Working register addressing differs from Register addressing as it uses a register pointer to identify a specific 8-byte
working register space in the internal register file and a specific 8-bit register within that space.
MSB
Rn
LSB
n = Even address
Rn+1
Figure 2-8. 16-Bit Register Pair
2-11
ADDRESS SPACES
S3C8245/P8245/C8249/P8249
Special-Purpose Registers
General-Purpose Register
FFH
Bank 1
Bank 1
FFH
Control
Registers
E0H
D0H
Set 2
System
Registers
CFH
C0H
C0H
BFH
RP1
RP0
Register
Pointers
Each register pointer (RP) can independently point
to one of the 24 8-byte "slices" of the register file
(other than set 2). After a reset, RP0 points to
locations C0H-C7H and RP1 to locations C8H-CFH
(that is, to the common working register area).
Prime
Registers
LCD Data
Registers
NOTE:
In the S3C8245/C8249 microcontroller,
pages 0-4 are implemented.
Pages 0-4 contain all of the addressable
registers in the internal register file.
00H
Page 0
Page 0
Register Addressing Only
All
Indirect Register,
All
Addressing
Modes
Indexed
Addressing
Modes
Addressing
Modes
Can be Pointed by Register Pointer
Can be Pointed to
By register Pointer
Figure 2-9. Register File Addressing
2-12
S3C8245/P8245/C8249/P8249
ADDRESS SPACES
COMMON WORKING REGISTER AREA (C0H–CFH)
After a reset, register pointers RP0 and RP1 automatically select two 8-byte register slices in set 1, locations C0H–
CFH, as the active 16-byte working register block:
RP0 ® C0H–C7H
RP1 ® C8H–CFH
This 16-byte address range is called common area. That is, locations in this area can be used as working registers
by operations that address any location on any page in the register file. Typically, these working registers serve as
temporary buffers for data operations between different pages.
FFH
Page 3
FFH
Page 2
FFH
Page 1
Set 1
FFH
Page 0
FFH
FCH
Set 2
E0H
D0H
C0H
C0H
BFH
Page 0
~
~
Following a hardware reset, register
pointers RP0 and RP1 point to the
common working register area,
locations C0H-CFH.
~
Prime
Space
~
~
Page 4
0FH
00H
LCD Data
Registers
RP0 = 1 1 0 0
RP1 = 1 1 0 0
0 0 0 0
1 0 0 0
00H
Figure 2-10. Common Working Register Area
2-13
ADDRESS SPACES
S3C8245/P8245/C8249/P8249
+
PROGRAMMING TIP — Addressing the Common Working Register Area
As the following examples show, you should access working registers in the common area, locations C0H–CFH,
using working register addressing mode only.
Examples 1. LD
0C2H,40H
;
Invalid addressing mode!
Use working register addressing instead:
SRP
LD
#0C0H
R2,40H
;
;
R2 (C2H) ® the value in location 40H
2. ADD
0C3H,#45H
Invalid addressing mode!
Use working register addressing instead:
SRP
ADD
#0C0H
R3,#45H
;
R3 (C3H) ® R3 + 45H
4-BIT WORKING REGISTER ADDRESSING
Each register pointer defines a movable 8-byte slice of working register space. The address information stored in a
register pointer serves as an addressing "window" that makes it possible for instructions to access working registers
very efficiently using short 4-bit addresses. When an instruction addresses a location in the selected working
register area, the address bits are concatenated in the following way to form a complete 8-bit address:
— The high-order bit of the 4-bit address selects one of the register pointers ("0" selects RP0, "1" selects RP1).
— The five high-order bits in the register pointer select an 8-byte slice of the register space.
— The three low-order bits of the 4-bit address select one of the eight registers in the slice.
As shown in Figure 2-11, the result of this operation is that the five high-order bits from the register pointer are
concatenated with the three low-order bits from the instruction address to form the complete address. As long as the
address stored in the register pointer remains unchanged, the three bits from the address will always point to an
address in the same 8-byte register slice.
Figure 2-12 shows a typical example of 4-bit working register addressing. The high-order bit of the instruction
"INC R6" is "0", which selects RP0. The five high-order bits stored in RP0 (01110B) are concatenated with the three
low-order bits of the instruction's 4-bit address (110B) to produce the register address 76H (01110110B).
2-14
S3C8245/P8245/C8249/P8249
ADDRESS SPACES
RP0
RP1
Selects
RP0 or RP1
Address
OPCODE
4-bit address
provides three
low-order bits
Register pointer
provides five
high-order bits
Together they create an
8-bit register address
Figure 2-11. 4-Bit Working Register Addressing
RP0
0 1 1 1 0
RP1
0 1 1 1 1
0 0 0
0 0 0
Selects RP0
R6
OPCODE
1 1 1 0
Register
address
(76H)
Instruction
'INC R6'
0 1 1 1 0
1 1 0
0 1 1 0
Figure 2-12. 4-Bit Working Register Addressing Example
2-15
ADDRESS SPACES
S3C8245/P8245/C8249/P8249
8-BIT WORKING REGISTER ADDRESSING
You can also use 8-bit working register addressing to access registers in a selected working register area. To
initiate 8-bit working register addressing, the upper four bits of the instruction address must contain the value
"1100B." This 4-bit value (1100B) indicates that the remaining four bits have the same effect as 4-bit working register
addressing.
As shown in Figure 2-13, the lower nibble of the 8-bit address is concatenated in much the same way as for 4-bit
addressing: Bit 3 selects either RP0 or RP1, which then supplies the five high-order bits of the final address; the
three low-order bits of the complete address are provided by the original instruction.
Figure 2-14 shows an example of 8-bit working register addressing. The four high-order bits of the instruction address
(1100B) specify 8-bit working register addressing. Bit 4 ("1") selects RP1 and the five high-order bits in RP1
(10101B) become the five high-order bits of the register address. The three low-order bits of the register address
(011) are provided by the three low-order bits of the 8-bit instruction address. The five address bits from RP1 and the
three address bits from the instruction are concatenated to form the complete register address, 0ABH (10101011B).
RP0
RP1
Selects
RP0 or RP1
Address
These address
bits indicate 8-bit
working register
addressing
8-bit logical
address
1
1
0
0
Register pointer
provides five
Three low-order bits
high-order bits
8-bit physical address
Figure 2-13. 8-Bit Working Register Addressing
2-16
S3C8245/P8245/C8249/P8249
ADDRESS SPACES
RP0
0 1 1 0 0
RP1
1 0 1 0 1
0 0 0
0 0 0
Selects RP1
R11
8-bit address
form instruction
'LD R11, R2'
Register
address
(0ABH)
1 1 0 0
1
0 1 1
1 0 1 0 1
0 1 1
Specifies working
register addressing
Figure 2-14. 8-Bit Working Register Addressing Example
2-17
ADDRESS SPACES
S3C8245/P8245/C8249/P8249
SYSTEM AND USER STACK
The S3C8-series microcontrollers use the system stack for data storage, subroutine calls and returns. The PUSH
and POP instructions are used to control system stack operations. The S3C8245/C8249 architecture supports stack
operations in the internal register file.
Stack Operations
Return addresses for procedure calls, interrupts, and data are stored on the stack. The contents of the PC are saved
to stack by a CALL instruction and restored by the RET instruction. When an interrupt occurs, the contents of the
PC and the FLAGS register are pushed to the stack. The IRET instruction then pops these values back to their
original locations. The stack address value is always decreased by one before a push operation and increased by
one after a pop operation. The stack pointer (SP) always points to the stack frame stored on the top of the stack, as
shown in Figure 2-15.
High Address
PCL
PCL
PCH
Top of
stack
PCH
Top of
stack
Flags
Stack contents
after a call
Stack contents
after an
instruction
interrupt
Low Address
Figure 2-15. Stack Operations
User-Defined Stacks
You can freely define stacks in the internal register file as data storage locations. The instructions PUSHUI,
PUSHUD, POPUI, and POPUD support user-defined stack operations.
Stack Pointers (SPL, SPH)
Register locations D8H and D9H contain the 16-bit stack pointer (SP) that is used for system stack operations. The
most significant byte of the SP address, SP15–SP8, is stored in the SPH register (D8H), and the least significant
byte, SP7–SP0, is stored in the SPL register (D9H). After a reset, the SP value is undetermined.
Because only internal memory space is implemented in the S3C8245/C8249, the SPL must be initialized to an 8-bit
value in the range 00H–FFH. The SPH register is not needed and can be used as a general-purpose register, if
necessary.
When the SPL register contains the only stack pointer value (that is, when it points to a system stack in the register
file), you can use the SPH register as a general-purpose data register. However, if an overflow or underflow condition
occurs as a result of increasing or decreasing the stack address value in the SPL register during normal stack
operations, the value in the SPL register will overflow (or underflow) to the SPH register, overwriting any other data
that is currently stored there. To avoid overwriting data in the SPH register, you can initialize the SPL value to "FFH"
instead of "00H".
2-18
S3C8245/P8245/C8249/P8249
ADDRESS SPACES
+
PROGRAMMING TIP — Standard Stack Operations Using PUSH and POP
The following example shows you how to perform stack operations in the internal register file using PUSH and POP
instructions:
LD
SPL,#0FFH
;
;
;
SPL ¬ FFH
(Normally, the SPL is set to 0FFH by the initialization
routine)
•
•
•
PUSH
PUSH
PUSH
PUSH
•
PP
;
;
;
;
Stack address 0FEH ¬ PP
Stack address 0FDH ¬ RP0
Stack address 0FCH ¬ RP1
Stack address 0FBH ¬ R3
RP0
RP1
R3
•
•
POP
POP
POP
POP
R3
;
;
;
;
R3 ¬ Stack address 0FBH
RP1 ¬ Stack address 0FCH
RP0 ¬ Stack address 0FDH
PP ¬ Stack address 0FEH
RP1
RP0
PP
2-19
S3C8245/P8245/C8249/P8249
ADDRESSING MODES
3
ADDRESSING MODES
OVERVIEW
Instructions that are stored in program memory are fetched for execution using the program counter. Instructions
indicate the operation to be performed and the data to be operated on. Addressing mode is the method used to
determine the location of the data operand. The operands specified in SAM88RC instructions may be condition
codes, immediate data, or a location in the register file, program memory, or data memory.
The S3C8-series instruction set supports seven explicit addressing modes. Not all of these addressing modes are
available for each instruction. The seven addressing modes and their symbols are:
— Register (R)
— Indirect Register (IR)
— Indexed (X)
— Direct Address (DA)
— Indirect Address (IA)
— Relative Address (RA)
— Immediate (IM)
3-1
ADDRESSING MODES
S3C8245/P8245/C8249/P8249
REGISTER ADDRESSING MODE (R)
In Register addressing mode (R), the operand value is the content of a specified register or register pair
(see Figure 3-1).
Working register addressing differs from Register addressing in that it uses a register pointer to specify an 8-byte
working register space in the register file and an 8-bit register within that space (see Figure 3-2).
Program Memory
Register File
OPERAND
8-bit Register
File Address
dst
Point to One
Register in Register
File
OPCODE
One-Operand
Instruction
(Example)
Value used in
Instruction Execution
Sample Instruction:
DEC
CNTR
; Where CNTR is the label of an 8-bit register address
Figure 3-1. Register Addressing
Register File
MSB Point to
RP0 ot RP1
RP0 or RP1
Selected
RP points
to start
Program Memory
of working
register
block
4-bit
Working Register
3 LSBs
dst
src
Point to the
Working Register
(1 of 8)
OPCODE
OPERAND
Two-Operand
Instruction
(Example)
Sample Instruction:
ADD R1, R2
;
Where R1 and R2 are registers in the currently
selected working register area.
Figure 3-2. Working Register Addressing
3-2
S3C8245/P8245/C8249/P8249
ADDRESSING MODES
INDIRECT REGISTER ADDRESSING MODE (IR)
In Indirect Register (IR) addressing mode, the content of the specified register or register pair is the address of the
operand. Depending on the instruction used, the actual address may point to a register in the register file, to program
memory (ROM), or to an external memory space (see Figures 3-3 through 3-6).
You can use any 8-bit register to indirectly address another register. Any 16-bit register pair can be used to indirectly
address another memory location. Please note, however, that you cannot access locations C0H–FFH in set 1 using
the Indirect Register addressing mode.
Program Memory
Register File
ADDRESS
8-bit Register
File Address
dst
Point to One
Register in Register
File
OPCODE
One-Operand
Instruction
(Example)
Address of Operand
used by Instruction
OPERAND
Value used in
Instruction Execution
Sample Instruction:
RL
@SHIFT
; Where SHIFT is the label of an 8-bit register address
Figure 3-3. Indirect Register Addressing to Register File
3-3
ADDRESSING MODES
S3C8245/P8245/C8249/P8249
INDIRECT REGISTER ADDRESSING MODE (Continued)
Register File
Program Memory
REGISTER
PAIR
Example
Instruction
References
Program
dst
Points to
Register Pair
OPCODE
16-Bit
Memory
Address
Points to
Program
Memory
Program Memory
OPERAND
Sample Instructions:
Value used in
Instruction
CALL
JP
@RR2
@RR2
Figure 3-4. Indirect Register Addressing to Program Memory
3-4
S3C8245/P8245/C8249/P8249
ADDRESSING MODES
INDIRECT REGISTER ADDRESSING MODE (Continued)
Register File
MSB Points to
RP0 or RP1
RP0 or RP1
Selected
RP points
to start fo
working register
block
Program Memory
~
~
~
~
4-bit
Working
Register
Address
3 LSBs
dst
src
Point to the
Working Register
(1 of 8)
OPCODE
ADDRESS
OPERAND
Sample Instruction:
OR R3, @R6
Value used in
Instruction
Figure 3-5. Indirect Working Register Addressing to Register File
3-5
ADDRESSING MODES
S3C8245/P8245/C8249/P8249
INDIRECT REGISTER ADDRESSING MODE (Concluded)
Register File
MSB Points to
RP0 or RP1
RP0 or RP1
Selected
RP points
to start of
working
register
block
Program Memory
4-bit Working
Register Address
dst
src
Register
Pair
Next 2-bit Point
to Working
Register Pair
(1 of 4)
OPCODE
Example Instruction
References either
Program Memory or
Data Memory
16-Bit
address
points to
program
memory
or data
Program Memory
or
Data Memory
LSB Selects
memory
Value used in
Instruction
OPERAND
Sample Instructions:
LCD
LDE
LDE
R5,@RR6
R3,@RR14
@RR4, R8
; Program memory access
; External data memory access
; External data memory access
Figure 3-6. Indirect Working Register Addressing to Program or Data Memory
3-6
S3C8245/P8245/C8249/P8249
ADDRESSING MODES
INDEXED ADDRESSING MODE (X)
Indexed (X) addressing mode adds an offset value to a base address during instruction execution in order to calculate
the effective operand address (see Figure 3-7). You can use Indexed addressing mode to access locations in the
internal register file or in external memory. Please note, however, that you cannot access locations C0H–FFH in
set 1 using Indexed addressing mode.
In short offset Indexed addressing mode, the 8-bit displacement is treated as a signed integer in the range –128 to
+127. This applies to external memory accesses only (see Figure 3-8.)
For register file addressing, an 8-bit base address provided by the instruction is added to an 8-bit offset contained in
a working register. For external memory accesses, the base address is stored in the working register pair
designated in the instruction. The 8-bit or 16-bit offset given in the instruction is then added to that base address (see
Figure 3-9).
The only instruction that supports Indexed addressing mode for the internal register file is the Load instruction (LD).
The LDC and LDE instructions support Indexed addressing mode for internal program memory and for external data
memory, when implemented.
Register File
RP0 or RP1
~
~
~
~
Selected RP
points to
start of
working
register
block
Value used in
Instruction
OPERAND
+
Program Memory
Base Address
3 LSBs
Two-Operand
Instruction
Example
dst/src
x
INDEX
Point to One of the
Woking Register
(1 of 8)
OPCODE
Sample Instruction:
LD R0, #BASE[R1]
;
Where BASE is an 8-bit immediate value
Figure 3-7. Indexed Addressing to Register File
3-7
ADDRESSING MODES
S3C8245/P8245/C8249/P8249
INDEXED ADDRESSING MODE (Continued)
Register File
RP0 or RP1
MSB Points to
RP0 or RP1
Selected
RP points
to start of
~
~
working
Program Memory
OFFSET
register
block
NEXT 2 Bits
4-bit Working
Register Address
dst/src
x
Register
Pair
Point to Working
Register Pair
(1 of 4)
OPCODE
16-Bit
address
added to
offset
Program Memory
or
LSB Selects
Data Memory
+
16-Bits
8-Bits
Value used in
Instruction
OPERAND
16-Bits
Sample Instructions:
LDC
LDE
R4, #04H[RR2]
R4,#04H[RR2]
; The values in the program address (RR2 + 04H)
are loaded into register R4.
; Identical operation to LDC example, except that
external program memory is accessed.
Figure 3-8. Indexed Addressing to Program or Data Memory with Short Offset
3-8
S3C8245/P8245/C8249/P8249
ADDRESSING MODES
INDEXED ADDRESSING MODE (Concluded)
Register File
RP0 or RP1
MSB Points to
RP0 or RP1
Selected
RP points
to start of
working
register
block
Program Memory
~
~
OFFSET
OFFSET
NEXT 2 Bits
4-bit Working
Register Address
dst/src
src
Register
Pair
Point to Working
Register Pair
OPCODE
16-Bit
address
added to
offset
Program Memory
or
LSB Selects
Data Memory
+
16-Bits
8-Bits
Value used in
Instruction
OPERAND
16-Bits
Sample Instructions:
LDC
LDE
R4, #1000H[RR2]
R4,#1000H[RR2]
; The values in the program address (RR2 + 1000H)
are loaded into register R4.
; Identical operation to LDC example, except that
external program memory is accessed.
Figure 3-9. Indexed Addressing to Program or Data Memory
3-9
ADDRESSING MODES
S3C8245/P8245/C8249/P8249
DIRECT ADDRESS MODE (DA)
In Direct Address (DA) mode, the instruction provides the operand's 16-bit memory address. Jump (JP) and Call
(CALL) instructions use this addressing mode to specify the 16-bit destination address that is loaded into the PC
whenever a JP or CALL instruction is executed.
The LDC and LDE instructions can use Direct Address mode to specify the source or destination address for Load
operations to program memory (LDC) or to external data memory (LDE), if implemented.
Program or
Data Memory
Memory
Address
Used
Program Memory
Upper Address Byte
Lower Address Byte
dst/src "0" or "1"
OPCODE
LSB Selects Program
Memory or Data Memory:
"0" = Program Memory
"1" = Data Memory
Sample Instructions:
LDC
LDE
R5,1234H
R5,1234H
;
;
The values in the program address (1234H)
are loaded into register R5.
Identical operation to LDC example, except that
external program memory is accessed.
Figure 3-10. Direct Addressing for Load Instructions
3-10
S3C8245/P8245/C8249/P8249
ADDRESSING MODES
DIRECT ADDRESS MODE (Continued)
Program Memory
Next OPCODE
Memory
Address
Used
Upper Address Byte
Lower Address Byte
OPCODE
Sample Instructions:
JP
C,JOB1
;
;
Where JOB1 is a 16-bit immediate address
Where DISPLAY is a 16-bit immediate address
CALL DISPLAY
Figure 3-11. Direct Addressing for Call and Jump Instructions
3-11
ADDRESSING MODES
S3C8245/P8245/C8249/P8249
INDIRECT ADDRESS MODE (IA)
In Indirect Address (IA) mode, the instruction specifies an address located in the lowest 256 bytes of the program
memory. The selected pair of memory locations contains the actual address of the next instruction to be executed.
Only the CALL instruction can use the Indirect Address mode.
Because the Indirect Address mode assumes that the operand is located in the lowest 256 bytes of program
memory, only an 8-bit address is supplied in the instruction; the upper bytes of the destination address are assumed
to be all zeros.
Program Memory
Next Instruction
LSB Must be Zero
dst
Current
OPCODE
Instruction
Lower Address Byte
Upper Address Byte
Program Memory
Locations 0-255
Sample Instruction:
CALL #40H
; The 16-bit value in program memory addresses 40H
and 41H is the subroutine start address.
Figure 3-12. Indirect Addressing
3-12
S3C8245/P8245/C8249/P8249
ADDRESSING MODES
RELATIVE ADDRESS MODE (RA)
In Relative Address (RA) mode, a twos-complement signed displacement between – 128 and + 127 is specified in
the instruction. The displacement value is then added to the current PC value. The result is the address of the next
instruction to be executed. Before this addition occurs, the PC contains the address of the instruction immediately
following the current instruction.
Several program control instructions use the Relative Address mode to perform conditional jumps. The instructions
that support RA addressing are BTJRF, BTJRT, DJNZ, CPIJE, CPIJNE, and JR.
Program Memory
Next OPCODE
Program Memory
Address Used
Current
PC Value
+
Displacement
OPCODE
Current Instruction
Signed
Displacement Value
Sample Instructions:
JR
ULT,$+OFFSET
; Where OFFSET is a value in the range +127 to -128
Figure 3-13. Relative Addressing
3-13
ADDRESSING MODES
S3C8245/P8245/C8249/P8249
IMMEDIATE MODE (IM)
In Immediate (IM) addressing mode, the operand value used in the instruction is the value supplied in the operand
field itself. The operand may be one byte or one word in length, depending on the instruction used. Immediate
addressing mode is useful for loading constant values into registers.
Program Memory
OPERAND
OPCODE
(The Operand value is in the instruction)
Sample Instruction:
LD R0,#0AAH
Figure 3-14. Immediate Addressing
3-14
S3C8245/P8245/C8249/P8249
CONTROL REGISTER
4
CONTROL REGISTERS
OVERVIEW
In this chapter, detailed descriptions of the S3C8245/C8249 control registers are presented in an easy-to-read
format. You can use this chapter as a quick-reference source when writing application programs. Figure 4-1
illustrates the important features of the standard register description format.
Control register descriptions are arranged in alphabetical order according to register mnemonic. More detailed
information about control registers is presented in the context of the specific peripheral hardware descriptions in Part
II of this manual.
Data and counter registers are not described in detail in this reference chapter. More information about all of the
registers used by a specific peripheral is presented in the corresponding peripheral descriptions in Part II of this
manual.
The locations and read/write characteristics of all mapped registers in the S3C8245/C8249 register file are listed in
Table 4-1. The hardware reset value for each mapped register is described in Chapter 8, "nRESET and Power-Down."
Table 4-1. Set 1 Registers
Register Name
LCD control register
Mnemonic
LCON
LMOD
INTPND
BTCON
CLKCON
FLAGS
RP0
Decimal
208
209
210
211
212
213
214
215
216
217
218
219
220
221
222
223
Hex
D0H
D1H
D2H
D3H
D4H
D5H
D6H
D7H
D8H
D9H
DAH
DBH
DCH
DDH
DEH
DFH
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R
LCD mode register
Interrupt pending register
Basic timer control register
Clock control register
System flags register
Register pointer 0
Register pointer 1
RP1
Stack pointer (high byte)
Stack pointer (low byte)
Instruction pointer (high byte)
Instruction pointer (low byte)
Interrupt request register
Interrupt mask register
System mode register
Register page pointer
SPH
SPL
IPH
IPL
IRQ
IMR
R/W
R/W
R/W
SYM
PP
4-1
CONTROL REGISTERS
S3C8245/P8245/C8249/P8249
Table 4-2. Set 1, Bank 0 Registers
Register Name
Mnemonic
P0CONH
P0CONL
P0INT
Decimal
224
225
226
227
228
229
230
231
232
233
234
235
236
237
238
239
240
241
242
243
244
245
246
247
248
249
250
251
Hex
E0H
E1H
E2H
E3H
E4H
E5H
E6H
E7H
E8H
E9H
EAH
EBH
ECH
EDH
EEH
EFH
F0H
F1H
F2H
F3H
F4H
F5H
F6H
F7H
F8H
F9H
FAH
FBH
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R
Port 0 control High register
Port 0 control Low register
Port 0 interrupt control register
Port 0 interrupt pending register
Port 1 control High register
Port 1 control Low register
Port 2 control High register
Port 2 control Low register
Port 3 control High register
Port 3 control Low register
Timer B data register (high byte)
Timer B data register (low byte)
Timer B control register
Timer A control register
Timer A counter register
Timer A data register
P0PND
P1CONH
P1CONL
P2CONH
P2CONL
P3CONH
P3CONL
TBDATAH
TBDATAL
TBCON
TACON
TACNT
TADATA
SIOCON
SIODATA
SIOPS
OSCCON
STPCON
P1PUP
P0
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
Serial I/O control register
Serial I/O data register
Serial I/O pre-scale register
Oscillator control register
STOP control register
Port 1 pull-up control register
Port 0 data register
Port 1 data register
P1
Port 2 data register
P2
Port 3 data register
P3
Port 4 data register
P4
Port 5 data register
P5
Location FCH is factory use only.
Basic timer data register
External memory timing register
Interrupt priority register
BTCNT
EMT
253
FDH
FEH
FFH
R
254
255
R/W
R/W
IPR
4-2
S3C8245/P8245/C8249/P8249
CONTROL REGISTER
Table 4-3. Set 1, Bank 1 Registers
Register Name
Mnemonic
Decimal
Hex
R/W
Locations E0H–EBH is not mapped.
Port 4 control High register
Port 4 control Low register
Port 5 control High register
Port 5 control Low register
P4CONH
P4CONL
P5CONH
P5CONL
236
237
238
239
ECH
EDH
EEH
EFH
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
Locations F0H is factory use only.
Timer 0 control register
T0CON
T0CNTH
T0CNTL
241
F1H
F2H
F3H
F4H
F5H
F6H
F7H
F8H
F9H
FAH
FBH
FCH
FDH
FEH
FFH
R/W
R
Timer 0 counter register (high byte)
Timer 0 counter register (low byte)
Timer 0 data register (high byte)
Timer 0 data register (low byte)
Voltage level detector control register
A/D converter control register
A/D converter data register (high byte)
A/D converter data register (low byte)
Watch timer control register
242
243
244
245
246
247
248
249
250
251
252
253
254
255
R
T0DATAH
T0DATAL
VLDCON
ADCON
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R
ADDATAH
ADDATAL
WTCON
T1CON
Timer 1 control register
Timer 1 counter register (high byte)
Timer 1 counter register (low byte)
Timer 1 data register (high byte)
Timer 1 data register (low byte)
T1CNTH
T1CNTL
R
T1DATAH
T1DATAL
R/W
R/W
4-3
CONTROL REGISTERS
S3C8245/P8245/C8249/P8249
Bit number(s) that is/are appended to
the register name for bit addressing
Name of individual
bit or related bits
Register location
in the internal
register file
Register address
(hexadecimal)
Register ID
Full Register name
FLAGS - System Flags Register
D5H
Set 1
Bit Identifier
nRESET Value
Read/Write
Bit Addressing
Mode
.7
x
.6
x
.5
x
.4
x
.3
x
.2
.1
.0
0
x
x
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
Register addressing mode only
.7
Carry Flag (C)
0
0
Operation does not generate a carry or borrow condition
Operation generates carry-out or borrow into high-order bit 7
.6
.5
Zero Flag (Z)
Operation result is a non-zero value
Operation result is zero
0
0
Sign Flag (S)
0
0
Operation generates positive number (MSB = "0")
Operation generates negative number (MSB = "1")
R = Read-only
W = Write-only
R/W = Read/write
'-' = Not used
Description of the
effect of specific
bit settings
Bit number:
MSB = Bit 7
LSB = Bit 0
Type of addressing
that must be used to
address the bit
nRESET value notation:
'-' = Not used
'x' = Undetermined value
(1-bit, 4-bit, or 8-bit)
'0' = Logic zero
'1' = Logic one
Figure 4-1. Register Description Format
4-4
S3C8245/P8245/C8249/P8249
CONTROL REGISTER
ADCON— A/D Converter Control Register
F7H
Set 1, Bank 1
Bit Identifier
.7
–
.6
0
.5
0
.4
0
.3
0
.2
.1
0
.0
0
nRESET Value
Read/Write
0
–
R/W
R/W
R/W
R
R/W
R/W
R/W
Addressing Mode
Register addressing mode only
Not used for the S3C8245/C8249
A/D Input Pin Selection Bits
.7
.6–.4
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
0
0
1
1
0
0
1
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
ADC0
ADC1
ADC2
ADC3
ADC4
ADC5
ADC6
ADC7
.3
End-of-Conversion bit (read-only)
0
1
Conversion not complete
Conversion complete
.2–.1
Clock Source Selection Bits
0
0
1
1
0
1
0
1
fxx/16
fxx/8
fxx/4
fxx
.0
Start or Enable Bit
0
1
Disable operation
Start operation
4-5
CONTROL REGISTERS
S3C8245/P8245/C8249/P8249
BTCON— Basic Timer Control Register
D3H
Set 1
Bit Identifier
.7
0
.6
0
.5
0
.4
0
.3
0
.2
0
.1
0
.0
nRESET Value
Read/Write
0
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
Addressing Mode
Register addressing mode only
.7–.4
.3–.2
Watchdog Timer Function Disable Code (for System Reset)
1
0
1
0
Disable watchdog timer function
Enable watchdog timer function
Others
Basic Timer Input Clock Selection Bits
(3)
0
0
fxx/4096
fxx/1024
fxx/128
fxx/16
0
1
1
1
0
1
(1)
.1
Basic Timer Counter Clear Bit
0
1
No effect
Clear the basic timer counter value
(2)
.0
Clock Frequency Divider Clear Bit for Basic Timer and Timer/Counters
0
1
No effect
Clear both clock frequency dividers
NOTES:
1. When you write a “1” to BTCON.1, the basic timer counter value is cleared to "00H". Immediately following the write
operation, the BTCON.1 value is automatically cleared to “0”.
2. When you write a "1" to BTCON.0, the corresponding frequency divider is cleared to "00H". Immediately following the
write operation, the BTCON.0 value is automatically cleared to "0".
3. The fxx is selected clock for system (main OSC. or sub OSC.).
4-6
S3C8245/P8245/C8249/P8249
CONTROL REGISTER
CLKCON— System Clock Control Register
D4H
Set 1
Bit Identifier
.7
0
.6
0
.5
0
.4
0
.3
0
.2
0
.1
0
.0
0
nRESET Value
Read/Write
–
–
–
R/W
R/W
–
–
–
Addressing Mode
Register addressing mode only
Not used for the S3C8245/C8249
.7–.5
.4–.3
(note)
CPU Clock (System Clock) Selection Bits
0
0
1
1
0
1
0
1
fxx/16
fxx/8
fxx/2
fxx
.2–.0
Not used for the S3C8245/C8249
NOTE: After a reset, the slowest clock (divided by 16) is selected as the system clock. To select faster clock speeds, load
the appropriate values to CLKCON.3 and CLKCON.4.
4-7
CONTROL REGISTERS
S3C8245/P8245/C8249/P8249
EMT— External Memory Timing Register
FEH
Set 1, Bank 0
Bit Identifier
.7
0
.6
–
.5
–
.4
–
.3
–
.2
–
.1
–
.0
–
nRESET Value
Read/Write
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
Addressing Mode
Register addressing mode only
Not used for the S3C8245/C8249
.7–.0
4-8
S3C8245/P8245/C8249/P8249
CONTROL REGISTER
FLAGS — System Flags Register
D5H
Set 1
Bit Identifier
.7
x
.6
x
.5
x
.4
x
.3
x
.2
x
.1
0
.0
0
nRESET Value
Read/Write
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R
R/W
Addressing Mode
Register addressing mode only
.7
.6
.5
.4
.3
.2
.1
.0
Carry Flag (C)
0
1
Operation does not generate a carry or borrow condition
Operation generates a carry-out or borrow into high-order bit 7
Zero Flag (Z)
0
1
Operation result is a non-zero value
Operation result is zero
Sign Flag (S)
0
1
Operation generates a positive number (MSB = "0")
Operation generates a negative number (MSB = "1")
Overflow Flag (V)
0
1
Operation result is £ +127 or ³ –128
Operation result is > +127 or < –128
Decimal Adjust Flag (D)
0
1
Add operation completed
Subtraction operation completed
Half-Carry Flag (H)
0
1
No carry-out of bit 3 or no borrow into bit 3 by addition or subtraction
Addition generated carry-out of bit 3 or subtraction generated borrow into bit 3
Fast Interrupt Status Flag (FIS)
0
1
Interrupt return (IRET) in progress (when read)
Fast interrupt service routine in progress (when read)
Bank Address Selection Flag (BA)
0
1
Bank 0 is selected
Bank 1 is selected
4-9
CONTROL REGISTERS
S3C8245/P8245/C8249/P8249
IMR— Interrupt Mask Register
DDH
Set 1
Bit Identifier
.7
x
.6
x
.5
x
.4
x
.3
x
.2
x
.1
x
.0
nRESET Value
Read/Write
x
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
Addressing Mode
Register addressing mode only
.7
.6
.5
.4
.3
.2
.1
.0
Interrupt Level 7 (IRQ7) Enable Bit; External Interrupts P0.4–0.7
0
1
Disable (mask)
Enable (unmask)
Interrupt Level 6 (IRQ6) Enable Bit; External Interrupts P0.0–0.3
0
1
Disable (mask)
Enable (unmask)
Interrupt Level 5 (IRQ5) Enable Bit; Watch Timer Overflow
0
1
Disable (mask)
Enable (unmask)
Interrupt Level 4 (IRQ4) Enable Bit; SIO Interrupt
0
1
Disable (mask)
Enable (unmask)
Interrupt Level 3 (IRQ3) Enable Bit; Timer 1 Match/Capture or Overflow
0
1
Disable (mask)
Enable (unmask)
Interrupt Level 2 (IRQ2) Enable Bit; Timer 0 Match
0
1
Disable (mask)
Enable (unmask)
Interrupt Level 1 (IRQ1) Enable Bit; Timer B Match
0
1
Disable (mask)
Enable (unmask)
Interrupt Level 0 (IRQ0) Enable Bit; Timer A Match/Capture or Overflow
0
1
Disable (mask)
Enable (unmask)
NOTE: When an interrupt level is masked, any interrupt requests that may be issued are not recognized by the CPU.
4-10
S3C8245/P8245/C8249/P8249
CONTROL REGISTER
INTPND— Interrupt Pending Register
D2H
Set 1
Bit Identifier
.7
–
.6
–
.5
–
.4
–
.3
–
.2
0
.1
0
.0
0
nRESET Value
Read/Write
–
–
–
–
–
R/W
R/W
R/W
Addressing Mode
Register addressing mode only
Not used for the S3C8245/C8249
.7–.3
.2
Timer 1 Overflow Interrupt Pending Bit
Interrupt request is not pending, pending bit clear when write 0
Interrupt request is pending
0
1
.1
.0
Timer 1 Match/Capture Interrupt Pending Bit
0
1
Interrupt request is not pending, pending bit clear when write 0
Interrupt request is pending
Timer A Overflow Interrupt Pending bit
0
1
Interrupt request is not pending, pending bit clear when write 0
Interrupt request is pending
4-11
CONTROL REGISTERS
S3C8245/P8245/C8249/P8249
IPH— Instruction Pointer (High Byte)
DAH
Set 1
Bit Identifier
.7
x
.6
x
.5
x
.4
x
.3
x
.2
x
.1
x
.0
x
nRESET Value
Read/Write
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
Addressing Mode
Register addressing mode only
.7–.0
Instruction Pointer Address (High Byte)
The high-byte instruction pointer value is the upper eight bits of the 16-bit instruction
pointer address (IP15–IP8). The lower byte of the IP address is located in the IPL
register (DBH).
IPL — Instruction Pointer (Low Byte)
DBH
Set 1
Bit Identifier
.7
x
.6
x
.5
x
.4
x
.3
x
.2
x
.1
x
.0
nRESET Value
Read/Write
x
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
Addressing Mode
Register addressing mode only
.7–.0
Instruction Pointer Address (Low Byte)
The low-byte instruction pointer value is the lower eight bits of the 16-bit instruction
pointer address (IP7–IP0). The upper byte of the IP address is located in the IPH
register (DAH).
4-12
S3C8245/P8245/C8249/P8249
CONTROL REGISTER
IPR— Interrupt Priority Register
FFH
Set 1, Bank 0
Bit Identifier
.7
x
.6
x
.5
x
.4
x
.3
x
.2
x
.1
x
.0
x
nRESET Value
Read/Write
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
Addressing Mode
Register addressing mode only
.7, .4, and .1
Priority Control Bits for Interrupt Groups A, B, and C
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
0
0
1
1
0
0
1
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
Group priority undefined
B > C > A
A > B > C
B > A > C
C > A > B
C > B > A
A > C > B
Group priority undefined
.6
.5
.3
.2
.0
Interrupt Subgroup C Priority Control Bit
0
1
IRQ6 > IRQ7
IRQ7 > IRQ6
Interrupt Group C Priority Control Bit
0
1
IRQ5 > (IRQ6, IRQ7)
(IRQ6, IRQ7) > IRQ5
Interrupt Subgroup B Priority Control Bit
0
1
IRQ3 > IRQ4
IRQ4 > IRQ3
Interrupt Group B Priority Control Bit
0
1
IRQ2 > (IRQ3, IRQ4)
(IRQ3, IRQ4) > IRQ2
Interrupt Group A Priority Control Bit
0
1
IRQ0 > IRQ1
IRQ1 > IRQ0
4-13
CONTROL REGISTERS
S3C8245/P8245/C8249/P8249
IRQ— Interrupt Request Register
DCH
Set 1
Bit Identifier
.7
0
.6
0
.5
0
.4
0
.3
0
.2
0
.1
0
.0
0
nRESET Value
Read/Write
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
Addressing Mode
Register addressing mode only
.7
.6
.5
.4
.3
.2
.1
.0
Level 7 (IRQ7) Request Pending Bit; External Interrupts P0.4–0.7
0
1
Not pending
Pending
Level 6 (IRQ6) Request Pending Bit; External Interrupts P0.0–0.3
0
1
Not pending
Pending
Level 5 (IRQ5) Request Pending Bit; Watch Timer Overflow
0
1
Not pending
Pending
Level 4 (IRQ4) Request Pending Bit; SIO Interrupt
0
1
Not pending
Pending
Level 3 (IRQ3) Request Pending Bit; Timer 1 Match/Capture or Overflow
0
1
Not pending
Pending
Level 2 (IRQ2) Request Pending Bit; Timer 0 Match
0
1
Not pending
Pending
Level 1 (IRQ1) Request Pending Bit; Timer B Match
0
1
Not pending
Pending
Level 0 (IRQ0) Request Pending Bit; Timer A Match/Capture or Overflow
0
1
Not pending
Pending
4-14
S3C8245/P8245/C8249/P8249
CONTROL REGISTER
LCON — LCD Control Register
D0H
Set 1
Bit Identifier
.7
0
.6
0
.5
0
.4
0
.3
0
.2
0
.1
0
.0
0
nRESET Value
Read/Write
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
–
R/W
R/W
R/W
Addressing Mode
Register addressing mode only
.7
.6
.5
.4
LCD Output Segment and Pin Configuration Bits
0
1
P5.4–P5.7 I/O is selected
SEG28–SEG31 is selected, P5.4–P5.7 I/O is disabled
LCD Output Segment and Pin Configuration Bits
0
1
P5.0–P5.3 I/O is selected
SEG24–SEG27 is selected, P5.0–P5.3 I/O is disabled
LCD Output Segment and Pin Configuration Bits
0
1
P4.4–P4.7 I/O is selected
SEG20–EG23 is selected, P4.4–P4.7 I/O is disabled
LCD Output Segment and Pin Configuration Bits
0
1
P4.0–P4.3 I/O is selected
SEG16–SEG19 is selected, P4.0–P4.3 I/O is disabled
.3
.2
Not used for the S3C8245/C8249
LCD Bias Voltage Selection Bit
0
1
Enable LCD initial circuit (internal bias voltage)
Disable LCD initial circuit for external LCD driving resister (external bias voltage)
.1
.0
Voltage Booster Enable/disable Bit
0
1
Stop voltage booster (Clock stop and cut off current charge path)
Run voltage booster (Clock run current and turn on charge path)
LCD Display Control Bit
0
LCD output low; turn display off, COM and SEG output low cut off voltage booster
(Booster clock disable)
1
COM and SEG output is in display mode; turn display on
4-15
CONTROL REGISTERS
S3C8245/P8245/C8249/P8249
LMOD — LCD Mode Control Register
D1H
Set 1
Bit Identifier
.7
0
.6
0
.5
0
.4
0
.3
0
.2
0
.1
0
.0
nRESET Value
Read/Write
0
–
–
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
Addressing Mode
Register addressing mode only
Not used for the S3C8245/C8249
.7–.6
.5–.4
LCD Clock (LCDCK) Frequency Selection Bits
9
0
0
1
1
0
1
0
1
32.768 kHz watch timer clock (fw)/2 = 64 Hz
8
32.768 kHz watch timer clock (fw)/2 = 128 Hz
7
32.768 kHz watch timer clock (fw)/2 = 256 Hz
6
32.768 kHz watch timer clock (fw)/2 = 512 Hz
.3–.0
Duty and Bias Selection for LCD Display
0
1
1
1
1
1
x
0
0
0
0
1
x
0
0
1
1
x
x
0
1
1
0
x
LCD display off (COM and SEG output low)
1/4 duty, 1/3 bias
1/3 duty, 1/3 bias
1/3 duty, 1/2 bias
1/2 duty, 1/2 bias
Static
4-16
S3C8245/P8245/C8249/P8249
CONTROL REGISTER
OSCCON — Oscillator Control Register
F3H
Set 1,Bank 0
Bit Identifier
.7
0
.6
0
.5
0
.4
0
.3
0
.2
0
.1
0
.0
0
nRESET Value
Read/Write
–
–
–
R/W
R/W
R/W
–
R/W
Addressing Mode
Register addressing mode only
Not used for the S3C8245/C8249
.7–.5
.4
Sub-system Oscillator Driving Ability Control Bit
0
1
Strong driving ability
Normal driving ability
.3
.2
Main System Oscillator Control Bit
0
1
Main System Oscillator RUN
Main System Oscillator STOP
Sub System Oscillator Control Bit
0
1
Sub system oscillator RUN
Sub system oscillator STOP
.1
.0
Not used for the S3C8245/C8249
System Clock Selection Bit
0
1
Main oscillator select
Subsystem oscillator select
NOTE: When OSCCON.4 is set to "0", Sub operating current and sub idle current are large.
4-17
CONTROL REGISTERS
S3C8245/P8245/C8249/P8249
P0CONH— Port 0 Control Register (High Byte)
E0H Set 1,Bank 0
Bit Identifier
.7
0
.6
0
.5
0
.4
0
.3
0
.2
0
.1
0
.0
0
nRESET Value
Read/Write
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
Addressing Mode
Register addressing mode only
.7–.6
.5–.4
.3–.2
.1–.0
P0.7/INT7
0
0
1
1
0
1
0
1
Schmitt trigger input mode; pull-up ; interrupt on falling edge
Schmitt trigger input mode; interrupt on rising edge
Schmitt trigger input mode; interrupt on rising or falling edge
Output mode, push-pull
P0.6/INT6
0
0
1
1
0
1
0
1
Schmitt trigger input mode; pull-up ; interrupt on falling edge
Schmitt trigger input mode; interrupt on rising edge
Schmitt trigger input mode; interrupt on rising or falling edge
Output mode, push-pull
P0.5/INT5
0
0
1
1
0
1
0
1
Schmitt trigger input mode; pull-up ; interrupt on falling edge
Schmitt trigger input mode; interrupt on rising edge
Schmitt trigger input mode; interrupt on rising or falling edge
Output mode, push-pull
P0.4/INT4
0
0
1
1
0
1
0
1
Schmitt trigger input mode; pull-up ; interrupt on falling edge
Schmitt trigger input mode; interrupt on rising edge
Schmitt trigger input mode; interrupt on rising or falling edge
Output mode, push-pull
4-18
S3C8245/P8245/C8249/P8249
CONTROL REGISTER
P0CONL — Port 0 Control Register (Low Byte)
E1H
Set 1, Bank 0
Bit Identifier
.7
0
.6
0
.5
0
.4
0
.3
0
.2
0
.1
0
.0
0
nRESET Value
Read/Write
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
Addressing Mode
Register addressing mode only
.7–.6
.5–.4
.3–.2
.1–.0
P0.3/INT3
0
0
1
1
0
1
0
1
Schmitt trigger input mode; pull-up ; interrupt on falling edge
Schmitt trigger input mode; interrupt on rising edge
Schmitt trigger input mode; interrupt on rising or falling edge
Output mode, push-pull
P0.2/INT2
0
0
1
1
0
1
0
1
Schmitt trigger input mode; pull-up ; interrupt on falling edge
Schmitt trigger input mode; interrupt on rising edge
Schmitt trigger input mode; interrupt on rising or falling edge
Output mode, push-pull
P0.1/INT1
0
0
1
1
0
1
0
1
Schmitt trigger input mode; pull-up ; interrupt on falling edge
Schmitt trigger input mode; interrupt on rising edge
Schmitt trigger input mode; interrupt on rising or falling edge
Output mode, push-pull
P0.0/INT0
0
0
1
1
0
1
0
1
Schmitt trigger input mode; pull-up ; interrupt on falling edge
Schmitt trigger input mode; interrupt on rising edge
Schmitt trigger input mode; interrupt on rising or falling edge
Output mode, push-pull
4-19
CONTROL REGISTERS
S3C8245/P8245/C8249/P8249
P0INT — Port 0 Interrupt Control Register
E2H
Set 1, Bank 0
Bit Identifier
.7
0
.6
0
.5
0
.4
0
.3
0
.2
0
.1
0
.0
0
nRESET Value
Read/Write
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
Addressing Mode
Register addressing mode only
.7
.6
.5
.4
.3
.2
.1
.0
P0.7 External Interrupt (INT7) Enable Bit
0
1
Disable interrupt
Enable interrupt
P0.6 External Interrupt (INT6) Enable Bit
0
1
Disable interrupt
Enable interrupt
P0.5 External Interrupt (INT5) Enable Bit
0
1
Disable interrupt
Enable interrupt
P0.4 External Interrupt (INT4) Enable Bit
0
1
Disable interrupt
Enable interrupt
P0.3 External Interrupt (INT3) Enable Bit
0
1
Disable interrupt
Enable interrupt
P0.2 External Interrupt (INT2) Enable Bit
0
1
Disable interrupt
Enable interrupt
P0.1 External Interrupt (INT1) Enable Bit
0
1
Disable interrupt
Enable interrupt
P0.0 External Interrupt (INT0) Enable Bit
0
1
Disable interrupt
Enable interrupt
4-20
S3C8245/P8245/C8249/P8249
CONTROL REGISTER
P0PND— Port 0 Interrupt Pending Register
E3H
Set 1, Bank 0
Bit Identifier
.7
0
.6
0
.5
0
.4
0
.3
0
.2
0
.1
0
.0
0
nRESET Value
Read/Write
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
Addressing Mode
Register addressing mode only
.7
.6
.5
.4
.3
.2
.1
.0
P0.7/INT7 Interrupt Pending Bit
0
1
Interrupt request is not pending, pending bit clear when write 0
Interrupt request is pending
P0.6/INT6 Interrupt Pending Bit
0
1
Interrupt request is not pending, pending bit clear when write 0
Interrupt request is pending
P0.5/INT5 Interrupt Pending Bit
0
1
Interrupt request is not pending, pending bit clear when write 0
Interrupt request is pending
P0.4/INT4 Interrupt Pending Bit
0
1
Interrupt request is not pending, pending bit clear when write 0
Interrupt request is pending
P0.3/INT3 Interrupt Pending Bit
0
1
Interrupt request is not pending, pending bit clear when write 0
Interrupt request is pending
P0.2/INT2 Interrupt Pending Bit
0
1
Interrupt request is not pending, pending bit clear when write 0
Interrupt request is pending
P0.1/INT1 Interrupt Pending Bit
0
1
Interrupt request is not pending, pending bit clear when write 0
Interrupt request is pending
P0.0/INT0 Interrupt Pending Bit
0
1
Interrupt request is not pending, pending bit clear when write 0
Interrupt request is pending
4-21
CONTROL REGISTERS
S3C8245/P8245/C8249/P8249
P1CONH — Port 1 Control Register (High Byte)
E4H
Set 1, Bank 0
Bit Identifier
.7
0
.6
0
.5
0
.4
0
.3
0
.2
0
.1
0
.0
0
nRESET Value
Read/Write
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
Addressing Mode
Register addressing mode only
.7–.6
.5–.4
.3–.2
.1–.0
P1.7/SI
0
0
1
1
0
1
0
1
Input mode (SI)
Output mode, open-drain
Alternative function (push-pull output)
Output mode, push-pull
P1.6/SCK
0
0
1
1
0
1
0
1
Input mode (SCK)
Output mode, open-drain
Alternative function (SCK out)
Output mode, push-pull
P1.5/SO
0
0
1
1
0
1
0
1
Input mode
Output mode, open-drain
Alternative function (SO)
Output mode, push-pull
P1.4/BUZ
0
0
1
1
0
1
0
1
Input mode
Output mode, open-drain
Alternative function (BUZ)
Output mode, push-pull
4-22
S3C8245/P8245/C8249/P8249
CONTROL REGISTER
P1CONL — Port 1 Control Register (Low Byte)
E5H
Set 1, Bank 0
Bit Identifier
.7
0
.6
0
.5
0
.4
0
.3
0
.2
0
.1
0
.0
0
nRESET Value
Read/Write
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
Addressing Mode
Register addressing mode only
.7–.6
.5–.4
.3–.2
.1–.0
P1.3
0
0
1
1
0
1
0
1
Input mode
Output mode, open-drain
Alternative function (push-pull output mode)
Output mode, push-pull
P1.2/T1OUT/T1PWM
0
0
1
1
0
1
0
1
Input mode
Output mode, open-drain
Alternative function (T1OUT, T1PWM)
Output mode, push-pull
P1.1/T1CLK
0
0
1
1
0
1
0
1
Input mode (T1CLK)
Output mode, open-drain
Alternative function (push-pull output mode)
Output mode, push-pull
P1.0/T1CAP
0
0
1
1
0
1
0
1
Input mode (T1CAP)
Output mode, open-drain
Alternative function (push-pull output mode)
Output mode, push-pull
4-23
CONTROL REGISTERS
S3C8245/P8245/C8249/P8249
P1PUP — Port 1 Pull-up Control Register
F5H
Set 1, Bank 0
Bit Identifier
.7
0
.6
0
.5
0
.4
0
.3
0
.2
0
.1
0
.0
0
nRESET Value
Read/Write
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
Addressing Mode
Register addressing mode only
.7
.6
.5
.4
.3
.2
.1
.0
P1.7 Pull-up Resistor Enable Bit
0
1
Pull-up disable
Pull-up enable
P1.6 Pull-up Resistor Enable Bit
0
1
Pull-up disable
Pull-up enable
P1.5 Pull-up Resistor Enable Bit
0
1
Pull-up disable
Pull-up enable
P1.4 Pull-up Resistor Enable Bit
0
1
Pull-up disable
Pull-up enable
P1.3 Pull-up Resistor Enable Bit
0
1
Pull-up disable
Pull-up enable
P1.2 Pull-up Resistor Enable Bit
0
1
Pull-up disable
Pull-up enable
P1.1 Pull-up Resistor Enable Bit
0
1
Pull-up disable
Pull-up enable
P1.0 Pull-up Resistor Enable Bit
0
1
Pull-up disable
Pull-up enable
4-24
S3C8245/P8245/C8249/P8249
CONTROL REGISTER
P2CONH— Port 2 Control Register (High Byte)
E6H
Set 1, Bank 0
Bit Identifier
.7
0
.6
0
.5
0
.4
0
.3
0
.2
0
.1
0
.0
0
nRESET Value
Read/Write
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
Addressing Mode
Register addressing mode only
.7–.6
.5-.4
.3–.2
.1–.0
P2.7/VLDREF/ADC7
0
0
1
1
0
1
0
1
Input mode
Input mode, pull-up
Alternative function (ADC & VLD mode)
Output mode, push-pull
P2.6/ADC6
0
0
1
1
0
1
0
1
Input mode
Input mode, pull-up
Alternative function (ADC mode)
Output mode, push-pull
P2.5/ ADC5
0
0
1
1
0
1
0
1
Input mode
Input mode, pull-up
Alternative function (ADC mode)
Output mode, push-pull
P2.4/ ADC4
0
0
1
1
0
1
0
1
Input mode
Input mode, pull-up
Alternative function (ADC mode)
Output mode, push-pull
4-25
CONTROL REGISTERS
S3C8245/P8245/C8249/P8249
P2CONL — Port 2 Control Register (Low Byte)
E7H
Set 1, Bank 0
Bit Identifier
.7
0
.6
0
.5
0
.4
0
.3
0
.2
0
.1
0
.0
0
nRESET Value
Read/Write
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
Addressing Mode
Register addressing mode only
.7–.6
.5–.4
.3–.2
.1–.0
P2.3/ADC3
0
0
1
1
0
1
0
1
Input mode
Input mode, pull-up
Alternative function (ADC mode)
Output mode, push-pull
P2.2/ADC2
0
0
1
1
0
1
0
1
Input mode
Input mode, pull-up
Alternative function (ADC mode)
Output mode, push-pull
P2.1/ADC1
0
0
1
1
0
1
0
1
Input mode
Input mode, pull-up
Alternative function (ADC mode)
Output mode, push-pull
P2.0/ADC0
0
0
1
1
0
1
0
1
Input mode
Input mode, pull-up
Alternative function (ADC mode)
Output mode, push-pull
4-26
S3C8245/P8245/C8249/P8249
CONTROL REGISTER
P3CONH— Port 3 Control Register (High Byte)
E8H
Set 1, Bank 0
Bit Identifier
.7
0
.6
0
.5
0
.4
0
.3
0
.2
0
.1
0
.0
0
nRESET Value
Read/Write
–
–
–
–
–
–
R/W
R/W
Addressing Mode
Register addressing mode only
Not used for the S3C8245/C8249
P3.4 Mode Selection Bits
.7–.2
.1–.0
0
0
1
0
1
x
Input mode
Input mode, pull-up
Output mode, push-pull
4-27
CONTROL REGISTERS
S3C8245/P8245/C8249/P8249
P3CONL — Port 3 Control Register (Low Byte)
E9H
Set 1, Bank 0
Bit Identifier
.7
0
.6
0
.5
0
.4
0
.3
0
.2
0
.1
0
.0
0
nRESET Value
Read/Write
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
Addressing Mode
Register addressing mode only
.7–.6
.5–.4
.3–.2
.1–.0
P3.3/TACAP Mode Selection Bits
0
0
1
1
0
1
0
1
Input mode (TACAP)
Input mode, pull-up (TACAP)
Output mode, push-pull
Output mode, push-pull
P3.2/TACLK Mode Selection Bits
0
0
1
1
0
1
0
1
Input mode (TACLK)
Input mode, pull-up
Output mode, push-pull
Output mode, push-pull
P3.1/TAOUT/TAPWM Mode Selection Bits
0
0
1
1
0
1
0
1
Input mode
Input mode, pull-up
Alternative function (TAOUT or TAPWM)
Output mode, push-pull
P3.0/TBPWM Mode Selection Bits
0
0
1
1
0
1
0
1
Input mode
Input mode, pull-up
Alternative function (TBPWM)
Output mode, push-pull
4-28
S3C8245/P8245/C8249/P8249
CONTROL REGISTER
P4CONH— Port 4 Control Register (High Byte)
ECH
Set 1, Bank 1
Bit Identifier
.7
0
.6
0
.5
0
.4
0
.3
0
.2
0
.1
0
.0
0
nRESET Value
Read/Write
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
Addressing Mode
Register addressing mode only
.7–.6
.5–.4
.3–.2
.1–.0
P4.7/SEG23 Mode Selection Bits
0
0
1
1
0
1
0
1
Input mode
Input mode, pull-up
Open-drain output mode
Push-pull output mode
P4.6/SEG22 Mode Selection Bits
0
0
1
1
0
1
0
1
Input mode
Input mode, pull-up
Open-drain output mode
Push-pull output mode
P4.5/SEG21 Mode Selection Bits
0
0
1
1
0
1
0
1
Input mode
Input mode, pull-up
Open-drain output mode
Push-pull output mode
P4.4/SEG20 Mode Selection Bits
0
0
1
1
0
1
0
1
Input mode
Input mode, pull-up
Open-drain output mode
Push-pull output mode
4-29
CONTROL REGISTERS
S3C8245/P8245/C8249/P8249
P4CONL — Port 4 Control Register (Low Byte)
EDH
Set 1, Bank 1
Bit Identifier
.7
0
.6
0
.5
0
.4
0
.3
0
.2
0
.1
0
.0
0
nRESET Value
Read/Write
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
Addressing Mode
Register addressing mode only
.7–.6
.5–.4
.3–.2
.1–.0
P4.3/SEG19 Mode Selection Bits
0
0
1
1
0
1
0
1
Input mode
Input mode, pull-up
Open-drain output mode
Push-pull output mode
P4.2/SEG18 Mode Selection Bits
0
0
1
1
0
1
0
1
Input mode
Input mode, pull-up
Open-drain output mode
Push-pull output mode
P4.1/SEG17 Mode Selection Bits
0
0
1
1
0
1
0
1
Input mode
Input mode, pull-up
Open-drain output mode
Push-pull output mode
P4.0/SEG16 Mode Selection Bits
0
0
1
1
0
1
0
1
Input mode
Input mode, pull-up
Open-drain output mode
Push-pull output mode
4-30
S3C8245/P8245/C8249/P8249
CONTROL REGISTER
P5CONH— Port 5 Control Register (High Byte)
EEH
Set 1, Bank 1
Bit Identifier
.7
0
.6
0
.5
0
.4
0
.3
0
.2
0
.1
0
.0
0
nRESET Value
Read/Write
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
Addressing Mode
Register addressing mode only
.7–.6
.5–.4
.3–.2
.1–.0
P5.7/SEG31 Mode Selection Bits
0
0
1
1
0
1
0
1
Input mode
Input mode, pull-up
Open-drain output mode
Push-pull output mode
P5.6/SEG30 Mode Selection Bits
0
0
1
1
0
1
0
1
Input mode
Input mode, pull-up
Open-drain output mode
Push-pull output mode
P5.5/ SEG29 Mode Selection Bits
0
0
1
1
0
1
0
1
Input mode
Input mode, pull-up
Open-drain output mode
Push-pull output mode
P5.4/ SEG28 Mode Selection Bits
0
0
1
1
0
1
0
1
Input mode
Input mode, pull-up
Open-drain output mode
Push-pull output mode
4-31
CONTROL REGISTERS
S3C8245/P8245/C8249/P8249
P5CONL — Port 5 Control Register (Low Byte)
EFH
Set 1, Bank 1
Bit Identifier
.7
0
.6
0
.5
0
.4
0
.3
0
.2
0
.1
0
.0
0
nRESET Value
Read/Write
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
Addressing Mode
Register addressing mode only
.7–.6
.5–.4
.3–.2
.1–.0
P5.3/SEG27 Mode Selection Bits
0
0
1
1
0
1
0
1
Input mode
Input mode, pull-up
Open-drain output mode
Push-pull output mode
P5.2/SEG26 Mode Selection Bits
0
0
1
1
0
1
0
1
Input mode
Input mode, pull-up
Open-drain output mode
Push-pull output mode
P5.1/SEG25 Mode Selection Bits
0
0
1
1
0
1
0
1
Input mode
Input mode, pull-up
Open-drain output mode
Push-pull output mode
P5.0/SEG24 Mode Selection Bits
0
0
1
1
0
1
0
1
Input mode
Input mode, pull-up
Open-drain output mode
Push-pull output mode
4-32
S3C8245/P8245/C8249/P8249
CONTROL REGISTER
PP— Register Page Pointer
DFH
Set 1
Bit Identifier
.7
0
.6
0
.5
0
.4
0
.3
0
.2
0
.1
0
.0
0
nRESET Value
Read/Write
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
Addressing Mode
Register addressing mode only
.7–.4
Destination Register Page Selection Bits
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
0
0
1
1
0
0
1
0
1
0
Destination: page 0
Destination: page 1
Destination: page 2
Destination: page 3
Destination: page 4
.3 – .0
Source Register Page Selection Bits
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
0
0
1
1
0
0
1
0
1
0
Source: page 0
Source: page 1
Source: page 2
Source: page 3
Source: page 4
NOTE: In the S3CC8249 microcontroller, the internal register file is configured as five pages (Pages 0-4).
The pages 0-3 are used for general purpose register file, and page 4 is used for LCD data register or general
purpose registers.
In case of S3C8245, pages 0-1 are used for general purpose and page 2 is used for LCD data register
or general purpose registers.
4-33
CONTROL REGISTERS
S3C8245/P8245/C8249/P8249
RP0— Register Pointer 0
D6H
Set 1
Bit Identifier
.7
1
.6
1
.5
0
.4
0
.3
0
.2
–
.1
–
.0
–
nRESET Value
Read/Write
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
–
–
–
Addressing Mode
Register addressing only
.7–.3
Register Pointer 0 Address Value
Register pointer 0 can independently point to one of the 256-byte working register
areas in the register file. Using the register pointers RP0 and RP1, you can select two
8-byte register slices at one time as active working register space. After a reset, RP0
points to address C0H in register set 1, selecting the 8-byte working register slice
C0H–C7H.
.2–.0
Not used for the S3C8245/C8249
RP1— Register Pointer 1
D7H
Set 1
Bit Identifier
.7
1
.6
1
.5
0
.4
0
.3
1
.2
–
.1
–
.0
–
nRESET Value
Read/Write
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
–
–
–
Addressing Mode
Register addressing only
.7 – .3
Register Pointer 1 Address Value
Register pointer 1 can independently point to one of the 256-byte working register
areas in the register file. Using the register pointers RP0 and RP1, you can select two
8-byte register slices at one time as active working register space. After a reset, RP1
points to address C8H in register set 1, selecting the 8-byte working register slice
C8H–CFH.
.2 – .0
Not used for the S3C8245/C8249
4-34
S3C8245/P8245/C8249/P8249
CONTROL REGISTER
SIOCON— SIO Control Register
FOH
Set 1, Bank 0
Bit Identifier
.7
1
.6
0
.5
0
.4
0
.3
0
.2
0
.1
0
.0
0
nRESET Value
Read/Write
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
Addressing Mode
Register addressing mode only
SIO Shift Clock Selection Bit
.7
.6
.5
.4
0
1
Internal clock (P.S clock)
External clock (SCK)
Data Direction Control Bit
0
1
MSB-first mode
LSB-first mode
SIO Mode Selection Bit
0
1
Receive-only mode
Transmit/receive mode
Shift Clock Edge Selection Bit
0
1
Tx at falling edges, Rx at rising edges
Tx at rising edges, Rx at falling edges
SIO Counter Clear and Shift Start Bit
.3
.2
.1
.0
0
1
No action
Clear 3-bit counter and start shifting
SIO Shift Operation Enable Bit
0
1
Disable shifter and clock counter
Enable shifter and clock counter
SIO Interrupt Enable Bit
0
1
Disable SIO Interrupt
Enable SIO Interrupt
SIO Interrupt Pending Bit
0
0
1
No interrupt pending
Clear pending condition (when write)
Interrupt is pending
4-35
CONTROL REGISTERS
S3C8245/P8245/C8249/P8249
SPH— Stack Pointer (High Byte)
D8H
Set 1
Bit Identifier
.7
x
.6
x
.5
x
.4
x
.3
x
.2
x
.1
x
.0
nRESET Value
Read/Write
x
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
Addressing Mode
Register addressing mode only
.7–.0
Stack Pointer Address (High Byte)
The high-byte stack pointer value is the upper eight bits of the 16-bit stack pointer
address (SP15–SP8). The lower byte of the stack pointer value is located in register
SPL (D9H). The SP value is undefined following a reset.
SPL — Stack Pointer (Low Byte)
D9H
Set 1
Bit Identifier
.7
x
.6
x
.5
x
.4
x
.3
x
.2
x
.1
x
.0
nRESET Value
Read/Write
x
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
Addressing Mode
Register addressing mode only
.7–.0
Stack Pointer Address (Low Byte)
The low-byte stack pointer value is the lower eight bits of the 16-bit stack pointer
address (SP7–SP0). The upper byte of the stack pointer value is located in register
SPH (D8H). The SP value is undefined following a reset.
4-36
S3C8245/P8245/C8249/P8249
CONTROL REGISTER
STPCON— Stop Control Register
F4H
Set 1, Bank 0
Bit Identifier
.7
0
.6
0
.5
0
.4
0
.3
0
.2
0
.1
0
.0
0
nRESET Value
Read/Write
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
Addressing Mode
Register addressing mode only
.7–.0
STOP Control Bits
1 0 1 0 0 1 0 1 Enable stop instruction
Other values Disable stop instruction
NOTE: Before execute the STOP instruction, You must set this STPCON register as “10100101b”. Otherwise the STOP
instruction will not execute.
4-37
CONTROL REGISTERS
S3C8245/P8245/C8249/P8249
SYM — System Mode Register
DEH
Set 1
Bit Identifier
.7
0
.6
–
.5
–
.4
x
.3
x
.2
x
.1
0
.0
nRESET Value
Read/Write
0
R/W
–
–
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
Addressing Mode
Register addressing mode only
Not used, But you must keep "0"
Not used for the S3C8245/C8249
.7
.6–.5
.4–.2
(1)
Fast Interrupt Level Selection Bits
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
0
0
1
1
0
0
1
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
IRQ0
IRQ1
IRQ2
IRQ3
IRQ4
IRQ5
IRQ6
IRQ7
(2)
.1
Fast Interrupt Enable Bit
0
1
Disable fast interrupt processing
Enable fast interrupt processing
(3)
.0
Global Interrupt Enable Bit
0
1
Disable all interrupt processing
Enable all interrupt processing
NOTES:
1. You can select only one interrupt level at a time for fast interrupt processing.
2. Setting SYM.1 to "1" enables fast interrupt processing for the interrupt level currently selected by SYM.2–SYM.4.
3. Following a reset, you must enable global interrupt processing by executing an EI instruction
(not by writing a "1" to SYM.0).
4-38
S3C8245/P8245/C8249/P8249
CONTROL REGISTER
T0CON— Timer 0 Control Register
F1H
Set 1, Bank 1
Bit Identifier
.7
0
.6
0
.5
0
.4
–
.3
0
.2
0
.1
0
.0
0
nRESET Value
Read/Write
R/W
R/W
R/W
–
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
Addressing Mode
Register addressing mode only
.7–.5
Timer 0 Input Clock Selection Bits
0
0
1
1
x
0
1
0
1
x
0
0
0
0
1
TBOF (T-FF)
fxx/256
fxx/64
fxx/8
fxx
.4
.3
Not used for the S3C8245/C8249
Timer 0 Counter Clear Bit
0
1
No effect
Clear the timer 0 counter (when write)
.2
.1
.0
Timer 0 Counter Enable Bit
0
1
Disable counting operation
Enable counting operation
Timer 0 Interrupt Enable Bit
0
1
Disable timer 0 interrupt
Enable timer 0 interrupt
Timer 0 Interrupt Pending Bit
0
0
1
No timer 0 interrupt pending (when read)
Clear timer 0 interrupt pending condition (when write)
T0 interrupt is pending
4-39
CONTROL REGISTERS
S3C8245/P8245/C8249/P8249
T1CON— Timer 1 Control Register
FBH
Set 1, Bank 1
Bit Identifier
.7
0
.6
0
.5
0
.4
0
.3
0
.2
0
.1
0
.0
0
nRESET Value
Read/Write
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
Addressing Mode
Register addressing mode only
.7–.5
Timer 1 Input Clock Selection Bits
0
0
1
1
0
0
1
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
fxx/1024
fxx/256
fxx/64
fxx/8
fxx/1
External clock (T1CLK) falling edge
External clock (T1CLK) rising edge
Counter stop
.4–.3
Timer 1 Operating Mode Selection Bits
0
0
1
1
0
1
0
1
Interval mode
Capture mode (Capture on rising edge, counter running, OVF can occur)
Capture mode (Capture on falling edge, counter running, OVF can occur)
PWM mode (OVF & match interrupt can occur)
.2
.1
.0
Timer 1 Counter Enable Bit
0
1
No effect
Clear the timer 1 counter (when write)
Timer 1 Match/Capture Interrupt Enable Bit
0
1
Disable interrupt
Enable interrupt
Timer 1 Overflow Interrupt Enable
0
1
Disable overflow interrupt
Enable overflow interrupt
4-40
S3C8245/P8245/C8249/P8249
CONTROL REGISTER
TACON— Timer A Control Register
EDH
Set 1, Bank 0
Bit Identifier
.7
0
.6
0
.5
0
.4
0
.3
0
.2
0
.1
0
.0
0
nRESET Value
Read/Write
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
Addressing Mode
Register addressing mode only
.7–.6
Timer A Input Clock Selection Bits
0
0
1
1
0
1
0
1
fxx/1024
fxx/256
fxx/64
External clock (TACLK)
.5–.4
Timer A Operating Mode Selection Bits
0
0
1
1
0
1
0
1
Internal mode (TAOUT mode)
Capture mode (capture on rising edge, counter running, OVF can occur)
Capture mode (capture on falling edge, counter running, OVF can occur)
PWM mode (OVF interrupt can occur)
.3
.2
.1
.0
Timer A Counter Clear Bit
0
1
No effect
Clear the timer A counter (when write)
Timer A Overflow Interrupt Enable Bit
0
1
Disable overflow interrupt
Enable overflow interrupt
Timer A Match/Capture Interrupt Enable Bit
0
1
Disable interrupt
Enable interrupt
Timer A Match/Capture Interrupt Pending Bit
0
0
1
No interrupt pending
Clear pending bit (write)
Interrupt is pending
4-41
CONTROL REGISTERS
S3C8245/P8245/C8249/P8249
TBCON— Timer B Control Register
ECH
Set 1, Bank 0
Bit Identifier
.7
0
.6
0
.5
0
.4
0
.3
0
.2
0
.1
0
.0
0
nRESET Value
Read/Write
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
Addressing Mode
Register addressing mode only
.7–.6
Timer B Input Clock Selection Bits
0
0
1
1
0
1
0
1
fxx
fxx/2
fxx/4
fxx/8
.5–.4
Timer B Interrupt Time Selection Bits
0
0
1
1
0
1
0
1
Elapsed time for low data value
Elapsed time for high data value
Elapsed time for low and high data values
Invalid setting
.3
.2
.1
.0
Timer B Interrupt Enable Bit
0
1
Disable Interrupt
Enable Interrupt
Timer B Start/Stop Bit
0
1
Stop timer B
Start timer B
Timer B Mode Selection Bit
0
1
One-shot mode
Repeating mode
Timer B Output flip-flop Control Bit
0
1
T-FF is low
T-FF is high
NOTE: fxx is selected clock for system.
4-42
S3C8245/P8245/C8249/P8249
CONTROL REGISTER
VLDCON— Voltage Level Detector Control Register
F6H
Set 1, Bank 1
Bit Identifier
.7
0
.6
0
.5
0
.4
0
.3
0
.2
0
.1
0
.0
0
nRESET Value
Read/Write
–
–
–
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
Addressing Mode
Register addressing mode only
Not used for the S3C8245/C8249
.7–.5
.4
V
Source Bit
IN
0
Internal source
External source
1
.3
VLD Output Bit
0
1
V
V
> V
< V
(when VLD is enabled)
(when VLD is enabled)
IN
IN
REF
REF
.2
VLD Enable/disable Bit
0
1
Disable the VLD
Enable the VLD
.1–.0
Detection Level Bits
0
0
1
1
0
1
0
1
V
V
V
V
= 2.2 V
= 2.4 V
= 3.0 V
= 4.0 V
VLD
VLD
VLD
VLD
4-43
CONTROL REGISTERS
S3C8245/P8245/C8249/P8249
WTCON— Watch Timer Control Register
FAH
Set 1, Bank 1
Bit Identifier
.7
0
.6
0
.5
0
.4
0
.3
0
.2
0
.1
0
.0
0
nRESET Value
Read/Write
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
Addressing Mode
Register addressing mode only
.7
Watch Timer Clock Selection Bit
7
0
1
Main system clock divided by 2 (fxx/128)
Sub system clock (fxt)
.6
Watch Timer Interrupt Enable Bit
0
1
Disable watch timer interrupt
Enable watch timer interrupt
.5–.4
Buzzer Signal Selection Bits
0
0
1
1
0
1
0
1
0.5 kHz buzzer (BUZ) signal output
1 kHz buzzer (BUZ) signal output
2 kHz buzzer (BUZ) signal output
4 kHz buzzer (BUZ) signal output
.3–.2
Watch Timer Speed Selection Bits
0
0
1
1
0
1
0
1
0.5 s Interval
0.25 s Interval
0.125 s Interval
1.955 ms Interval
.1
.0
Watch Timer Enable Bit
0
1
Disable watch timer; Clear frequency dividing circuits
Enable watch timer
Watch Timer Interrupt Pending Bit
0
1
Interrupt is not pending, clear pending bit when write
Interrupt is pending
NOTE: Watch timer clock frequency(fw) is assumed to be 32.768 kHz.
4-44
S3C8245/P8245/C8249/P8249
INTERRUPT STRUCTURE
5
INTERRUPT STRUCTURE
OVERVIEW
The S3C8-series interrupt structure has three basic components: levels, vectors, and sources. The SAM8 CPU
recognizes up to eight interrupt levels and supports up to 128 interrupt vectors. When a specific interrupt level has
more than one vector address, the vector priorities are established in hardware. A vector address can be
assigned to one or more sources.
Levels
Interrupt levels are the main unit for interrupt priority assignment and recognition. All peripherals and I/O blocks
can issue interrupt requests. In other words, peripheral and I/O operations are interrupt-driven. There are eight
possible interrupt levels: IRQ0–IRQ7, also called level 0–level 7. Each interrupt level directly corresponds to an
interrupt request number (IRQn). The total number of interrupt levels used in the interrupt structure varies from
device to device. The S3C8245/C8249 interrupt structure recognizes eight interrupt levels.
The interrupt level numbers 0 through 7 do not necessarily indicate the relative priority of the levels. They are just
identifiers for the interrupt levels that are recognized by the CPU. The relative priority of different interrupt levels is
determined by settings in the interrupt priority register, IPR. Interrupt group and subgroup logic controlled by IPR
settings lets you define more complex priority relationships between different levels.
Vectors
Each interrupt level can have one or more interrupt vectors, or it may have no vector address assigned at all. The
maximum number of vectors that can be supported for a given level is 128 (The actual number of vectors used for
S3C8-series devices is always much smaller). If an interrupt level has more than one vector address, the vector
priorities are set in hardware. S3C8245/C8249 uses sixteen vectors.
Sources
A source is any peripheral that generates an interrupt. A source can be an external pin or a counter overflow.
Each vector can have several interrupt sources. In the S3C8245/C8249 interrupt structure, there are sixteen
possible interrupt sources.
When a service routine starts, the respective pending bit should be either cleared automatically by hardware or
cleared "manually" by program software. The characteristics of the source's pending mechanism determine which
method would be used to clear its respective pending bit.
5-1
INTERRUPT STRUCTURE
INTERRUPT TYPES
S3C8245/P8245/C8249/P8249
The three components of the S3C8 interrupt structure described before — levels, vectors, and sources — are
combined to determine the interrupt structure of an individual device and to make full use of its available interrupt
logic. There are three possible combinations of interrupt structure components, called interrupt types 1, 2, and 3.
The types differ in the number of vectors and interrupt sources assigned to each level (see Figure 5-1):
Type 1:
Type 2:
Type 3:
One level (IRQn) + one vector (V1) + one source (S1)
One level (IRQn) + one vector (V1) + multiple sources (S1 – Sn)
One level (IRQn) + multiple vectors (V1 – Vn) + multiple sources (S1 – Sn , Sn+1 – Sn+m
)
In the S3C8245/C8249 microcontroller, two interrupt types are implemented.
Levels
Vectors
Sources
Type 1:
Type 2:
IRQn
V
1
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
1
1
IRQn
IRQn
V
1
2
3
n
V
V
V
V
1
2
3
n
1
Type 3:
NOTES:
2
3
n
n +
n +
n +
1
2
1. The number of Sn and Vn value is expandable.
2. In the S3C8245/C8249 implementation,
interrupt types 1 and 3 are used.
m
Figure 5-1. S3C8-Series Interrupt Types
5-2
S3C8245/P8245/C8249/P8249
INTERRUPT STRUCTURE
S3C8245/C8249 INTERRUPT STRUCTURE
The S3C8245/C8249 microcontroller supports sixteen interrupt sources. All sixteen of the interrupt sources have a
corresponding interrupt vector address. Eight interrupt levels are recognized by the CPU in this device-specific
interrupt structure, as shown in Figure 5-2.
When multiple interrupt levels are active, the interrupt priority register (IPR) determines the order in which
contending interrupts are to be serviced. If multiple interrupts occur within the same interrupt level, the interrupt
with the lowest vector address is usually processed first (The relative priorities of multiple interrupts within a single
level are fixed in hardware).
When the CPU grants an interrupt request, interrupt processing starts. All other interrupts are disabled and the
program counter value and status flags are pushed to stack. The starting address of the service routine is fetched
from the appropriate vector address (plus the next 8-bit value to concatenate the full 16-bit address) and the
service routine is executed.
Levels
Vectors
Sources
Reset/Clear
H/W,S/W
H/W,S/W
H/W
E0H
E2H
E4H
E6H
Timer A match/capture
Timer A overflow
Timer B match
IRQ0
IRQ1
IRQ2
H/W,S/W
Timer 0 match
H/W,S/W
H/W,S/W
S/W
E8H
EAH
ECH
EEH
Timer 1 match/capture
Timer 1 overflow
IRQ3
IRQ4
IRQ5
SIO interrupt
S/W
Watch timer overflow
P0.0 external interrupt
P0.1 external interrupt
P0.2 external interrupt
P0.3 external interrupt
P0.4 external interrupt
P0.5 external interrupt
P0.6 external interrupt
P0.7 external interrupt
S/W
F0H
F2H
F4H
F6H
F8H
FAH
FCH
FEH
S/W
IRQ6
S/W
S/W
S/W
S/W
IRQ7
S/W
S/W
NOTES:
1. Within a given interrupt level, the low vector address has high priority.
For example, E0H has higher priority than E2H within the level IRQ.0 the priorities within each
level are set at the factory.
2. External interrupts are triggered by a rising or falling edge, depending on the corresponding control
register setting.
Figure 5-2. S3C8245/C8249 Interrupt Structure
5-3
INTERRUPT STRUCTURE
S3C8245/P8245/C8249/P8249
INTERRUPT VECTOR ADDRESSES
All interrupt vector addresses for the S3C8245/C8249 interrupt structure are stored in the vector address area of
the internal 32-Kbyte ROM, 0H–7FFFH, or 8, 16, 24-Kbyte (see Figure 5-3).
You can allocate unused locations in the vector address area as normal program memory. If you do so, please be
careful not to overwrite any of the stored vector addresses (Table 5-1 lists all vector addresses).
The program reset address in the ROM is 0100H.
(Decimal)
32,767
(HEX)
7FFFH
32-Kbyte
3FFFH
16,383
16-Kbyte
Internal
Program Memory
(ROM) Area
100H
FFH
Reset
Address
255
0
Interrupt
Vector Address
Area
00H
Figure 5-3. ROM Vector Address Area
5-4
S3C8245/P8245/C8249/P8249
Vector Address
INTERRUPT STRUCTURE
Reset/Clear
Table 5-1. Interrupt Vectors
Interrupt Source
Request
Decimal
Value
Hex
Value
Interrupt
Priority in H/W
Level
S/W
Level
Reset
IRQ0
256
226
224
228
230
234
232
236
238
246
244
242
240
254
252
250
248
100H
E2H
E0H
E4H
E6H
EAH
E8H
ECH
EEH
F6H
F4H
F2H
F0H
FEH
FCH
FAH
F8H
Basic timer overflow
–
0
1
–
–
0
1
–
–
3
2
1
0
3
2
1
0
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
Timer A overflow
√
√
Timer A match/capture
Timer B match
IRQ1
IRQ2
IRQ3
Timer 0 match
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
Timer 1 overflow
Timer 1 match/capture
SIO interrupt
IRQ4
IRQ5
IRQ6
Watch timer overflow
P0.3 external interrupt
P0.2 external interrupt
P0.1 external interrupt
P0.0 external interrupt
P0.7 external interrupt
P0.6 external interrupt
P0.5 external interrupt
P0.4 external interrupt
IRQ7
NOTES:
1. Interrupt priorities are identified in inverse order: "0" is the highest priority, "1" is the next highest, and so on.
2. If two or more interrupts within the same level contend, the interrupt with the lowest vector address usually has priority
over one with a higher vector address. The priorities within a given level are fixed in hardware.
3. Timer A or Timer 1 can not service two interrupt sources simultaneously, then only one interrupt source have to be used.
5-5
INTERRUPT STRUCTURE
S3C8245/P8245/C8249/P8249
ENABLE/DISABLE INTERRUPT INSTRUCTIONS (EI, DI)
Executing the Enable Interrupts (EI) instruction globally enables the interrupt structure. All interrupts are then
serviced as they occur according to the established priorities.
NOTE
The system initialization routine executed after a reset must always contain an EI instruction to globally
enable the interrupt structure.
During the normal operation, you can execute the DI (Disable Interrupt) instruction at any time to globally disable
interrupt processing. The EI and DI instructions change the value of bit 0 in the SYM register.
SYSTEM-LEVEL INTERRUPT CONTROL REGISTERS
In addition to the control registers for specific interrupt sources, four system-level registers control interrupt
processing:
— The interrupt mask register, IMR, enables (un-masks) or disables (masks) interrupt levels.
— The interrupt priority register, IPR, controls the relative priorities of interrupt levels.
— The interrupt request register, IRQ, contains interrupt pending flags for each interrupt level (as opposed to
each interrupt source).
— The system mode register, SYM, enables or disables global interrupt processing (SYM settings also enable
fast interrupts and control the activity of external interface, if implemented).
Table 5-2. Interrupt Control Register Overview
Control Register
ID
R/W
Function Description
Interrupt mask register
IMR
R/W
Bit settings in the IMR register enable or disable interrupt
processing for each of the eight interrupt levels: IRQ0–IRQ7.
Interrupt priority register
IPR
R/W
Controls the relative processing priorities of the interrupt levels.
The seven levels of S3C8245/C8249 are organized into three
groups: A, B, and C. Group A is IRQ0 and IRQ1, group B is
IRQ2, IRQ3 and IRQ4, and group C is IRQ5, IRQ6, and IRQ7.
Interrupt request register
System mode register
IRQ
R
This register contains a request pending bit for each interrupt
level.
SYM
R/W
This register enables/disables fast interrupt processing,
dynamic global interrupt processing, and external interface
control (An external memory interface is implemented in the
S3C8245/C8249 microcontroller).
5-6
S3C8245/P8245/C8249/P8249
INTERRUPT STRUCTURE
INTERRUPT PROCESSING CONTROL POINTS
Interrupt processing can therefore be controlled in two ways: globally or by specific interrupt level and source. The
system-level control points in the interrupt structure are:
— Global interrupt enable and disable (by EI and DI instructions or by direct manipulation of SYM.0 )
— Interrupt level enable/disable settings (IMR register)
— Interrupt level priority settings (IPR register)
— Interrupt source enable/disable settings in the corresponding peripheral control registers
NOTE
When writing an application program that handles interrupt processing, be sure to include the necessary
register file address (register pointer) information.
EI
S
R
Q
Interrupt Request Register
(Read-only)
Polling
Cycle
nRESET
IRQ0-IRQ7,
Interrupts
Interrupt Priority
Register
Vector
Interrupt
Cycle
Interrupt Mask
Register
Global Interrupt Control (EI,
DI or SYM.0 manipulation)
Figure 5-4. Interrupt Function Diagram
5-7
INTERRUPT STRUCTURE
S3C8245/P8245/C8249/P8249
PERIPHERAL INTERRUPT CONTROL REGISTERS
For each interrupt source there is one or more corresponding peripheral control registers that let you control the
interrupt generated by the related peripheral (see Table 5-3).
Table 5-3. Interrupt Source Control and Data Registers
Interrupt Source
Timer A overflow
Timer A match/capture
Interrupt Level
Register(s)
TACON
TACINT
TADATA
Location(s) in Set 1
IRQ0
EDH, bank 0
EEH, bank 0
EFH, bank 0
Timer B match
IRQ1
IRQ2
TBCON
TBDATAH, TBDATAL
ECH, bank 0
EAH, EBH, bank 0
Timer 0 match
T0CON, T0CNTH
T0CNTL, T0DATAH
T0DATAL
F1H, F2H, bank 1
F3H, F4H, bank 1
F5H, bank 1
Timer 1 overflow
Timer 1 match/capture
IRQ3
IRQ4
T1CON
FBH, bank 1
FCH, bank 1
FDH, bank 1
FEH, bank 1
FFH, bank 1
T1CNTH
T1CNTL
T1DATAH
T1DATAL
SIO interrupt
SIOCON
SIODATA
SIOPS
F0H, bank 0
F1H, bank 0
F2H, bank 0
Watch timer overflow
IRQ5
IRQ6
WTCON
FAH, bank 1
P0.3 external interrupt
P0.2 external interrupt
P0.1 external interrupt
P0.0 external interrupt
P0CONL
P0INT
P0PND
E1H, bank 0
E2H, bank 0
E3H, bank 0
P0.7 external interrupt
P0.6 external interrupt
P0.5 external interrupt
P0.4 external interrupt
IRQ7
P0CONH
P0INT
P0PND
E0H, bank 0
E2H, bank 0
E3H, bank 0
NOTES:
1. Because the timer 0 overflow interrupt is cleared by hardware, the T0CON register controls only the enable/disable
functions. The T0CON register contains enable/disable and pending bits for the timer 0 match/capture interrupt.
2. If a interrupt is un-mask(Enable interrupt level) in the IMR register, the pending bit and enable bit of the interrupt
should be written after a DI instruction is executed.
5-8
S3C8245/P8245/C8249/P8249
INTERRUPT STRUCTURE
SYSTEM MODE REGISTER (SYM)
The system mode register, SYM (set 1, DEH), is used to globally enable and disable interrupt processing and to
control fast interrupt processing (see Figure 5-5).
A reset clears SYM.1, and SYM.0 to "0". The 3-bit value for fast interrupt level selection, SYM.4–SYM.2, is
undetermined.
The instructions EI and DI enable and disable global interrupt processing, respectively, by modifying the bit 0
value of the SYM register. In order to enable interrupt processing an Enable Interrupt (EI) instruction must be
included in the initialization routine, which follows a reset operation. Although you can manipulate SYM.0 directly
to enable and disable interrupts during the normal operation, it is recommended to use the EI and DI instructions
for this purpose.
System Mode Register (SYM)
DEH, Set 1, R/W
MSB
.7
.6
.5
.4
.3
.2
.1
.0
LSB
Global interrupt enable bit:
0 = Disable all interrupts processing
1 = Enable all interrupts processing
Not used for the S3C8245/C8249
Fast interrupt level
selection bits:
Fast interrupt enable bit:
0 = Disable fast interrupts processing
1 = Enable fast interrupts processing
0 0 0 = IRQ0
0 0 1 = IRQ1
0 1 0 = IRQ2
0 1 1 = IRQ3
1 0 0 = IRQ4
1 0 1 = IRQ5
1 1 0 = IRQ6
1 1 1 = IRQ7
Figure 5-5. System Mode Register (SYM)
5-9
INTERRUPT STRUCTURE
S3C8245/P8245/C8249/P8249
INTERRUPT MASK REGISTER (IMR)
The interrupt mask register, IMR (set 1, DDH) is used to enable or disable interrupt processing for individual
interrupt levels. After a reset, all IMR bit values are undetermined and must therefore be written to their required
settings by the initialization routine.
Each IMR bit corresponds to a specific interrupt level: bit 1 to IRQ1, bit 2 to IRQ2, and so on. When the IMR bit of
an interrupt level is cleared to "0", interrupt processing for that level is disabled (masked). When you set a level's
IMR bit to "1", interrupt processing for the level is enabled (not masked).
The IMR register is mapped to register location DDH in set 1. Bit values can be read and written by instructions
using the Register addressing mode.
Interrupt Mask Register (IMR)
DDH, Set 1, R/W
MSB
.7
.6
.5
.4
.3
.2
.1
.0
LSB
IRQ0
IRQ1
IRQ2
IRQ3
IRQ4
IRQ5
IRQ6
IRQ7
Interrupt level enable bits (7-4, 2-0):
0 = Disable (mask) interrupt level
1 = Enable (un-mask) interrupt level
NOTE:
Before IMR register is changed to any value, all interrupts must be disable.
Using DI instruction is recommended.
Figure 5-6. Interrupt Mask Register (IMR)
5-10
S3C8245/P8245/C8249/P8249
INTERRUPT STRUCTURE
INTERRUPT PRIORITY REGISTER (IPR)
The interrupt priority register, IPR (set 1, bank 0, FFH), is used to set the relative priorities of the interrupt levels in
the microcontroller’s interrupt structure. After a reset, all IPR bit values are undetermined and must therefore be
written to their required settings by the initialization routine.
When more than one interrupt sources are active, the source with the highest priority level is serviced first. If two
sources belong to the same interrupt level, the source with the lower vector address usually has the priority (This
priority is fixed in hardware).
To support programming of the relative interrupt level priorities, they are organized into groups and subgroups by
the interrupt logic. Please note that these groups (and subgroups) are used only by IPR logic for the IPR register
priority definitions (see Figure 5-7):
Group A
Group B
Group C
IRQ0, IRQ1
IRQ2, IRQ3, IRQ3
IRQ5, IRQ6, IRQ7
IPR
IPR
IPR
Group A
Group B
Group C
A1
A2
B1
B2
C1
C2
B21
B22
C21
C22
IRQ0
IRQ1
IRQ2 IRQ3
IRQ4
IRQ5 IRQ6
IRQ7
Figure 5-7. Interrupt Request Priority Groups
As you can see in Figure 5-8, IPR.7, IPR.4, and IPR.1 control the relative priority of interrupt groups A, B, and C.
For example, the setting "001B" for these bits would select the group relationship B > C > A. The setting "101B"
would select the relationship C > B > A.
The functions of the other IPR bit settings are as follows:
— IPR.5 controls the relative priorities of group C interrupts.
— Interrupt group C includes a subgroup that has an additional priority relationship among the interrupt levels 5,
6, and 7. IPR.6 defines the subgroup C relationship. IPR.5 controls the interrupt group C.
— IPR.0 controls the relative priority setting of IRQ0 and IRQ1 interrupts.
5-11
INTERRUPT STRUCTURE
S3C8245/P8245/C8249/P8249
Interrupt Priority Register (IPR)
FFH, Set 1, Bank 0, R/W
MSB
.7
.6
.5
.4
.3
.2
.1
.0
LSB
Group priority:
D7 D4 D1
Group A:
0 = IRQ0 > IRQ1
1 = IRQ1 > IRQ0
Group B:
0 = IRQ2 > (IRQ3, IRQ4)
1 = (IRQ3, IRQ4) > IRQ2
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
0
0
1
1
0
0
1
1
0 = Undefined
1 = B > C > A
0 = A > B > C
1 = B > A > C
0 = C > A > B
1 = C > B > A
0 = A > C > B
1 = Undefined
Subgroup B:
0 = IRQ3 > IRQ4
1 = IRQ4 > IRQ3
Group C:
0 = IRQ5 > (IRQ6, IRQ7)
1 = (IRQ6, IRQ7) > IRQ5
Subgroup C:
0 = IRQ6 > IRQ7
1 = IRQ7 > IRQ6
Figure 5-8. Interrupt Priority Register (IPR)
5-12
S3C8245/P8245/C8249/P8249
INTERRUPT STRUCTURE
INTERRUPT REQUEST REGISTER (IRQ)
You can poll bit values in the interrupt request register, IRQ (set 1, DCH), to monitor interrupt request status for all
levels in the microcontroller’s interrupt structure. Each bit corresponds to the interrupt level of the same number:
bit 0 to IRQ0, bit 1 to IRQ1, and so on. A "0" indicates that no interrupt request is currently being issued for that
level. A "1" indicates that an interrupt request has been generated for that level.
IRQ bit values are read-only addressable using Register addressing mode. You can read (test) the contents of the
IRQ register at any time using bit or byte addressing to determine the current interrupt request status of specific
interrupt levels. After a reset, all IRQ status bits are cleared to “0”.
You can poll IRQ register values even if a DI instruction has been executed (that is, if global interrupt processing
is disabled). If an interrupt occurs while the interrupt structure is disabled, the CPU will not service it. You can,
however, still detect the interrupt request by polling the IRQ register. In this way, you can determine which events
occurred while the interrupt structure was globally disabled.
Interrupt Request Register (IRQ)
DCH, Set 1, Read-only
MSB
.7
.6
.5
.4
.3
.2
.1
.0
LSB
IRQ0
IRQ1
IRQ2
IRQ3
IRQ4
IRQ5
IRQ6
IRQ7
Interrupt level request pending bits:
0 = Interrupt level is not pending
1 = Interrupt level is pending
Figure 5-9. Interrupt Request Register (IRQ)
5-13
INTERRUPT STRUCTURE
S3C8245/P8245/C8249/P8249
INTERRUPT PENDING FUNCTION TYPES
Overview
There are two types of interrupt pending bits: one type that is automatically cleared by hardware after the interrupt
service routine is acknowledged and executed; the other that must be cleared in the interrupt service routine.
Pending Bits Cleared Automatically by Hardware
For interrupt pending bits that are cleared automatically by hardware, interrupt logic sets the corresponding
pending bit to "1" when a request occurs. It then issues an IRQ pulse to inform the CPU that an interrupt is waiting
to be serviced. The CPU acknowledges the interrupt source by sending an IACK, executes the service routine,
and clears the pending bit to "0". This type of pending bit is not mapped and cannot, therefore, be read or written
by application software.
In the S3C8245/C8249 interrupt structure, the timer 0 overflow interrupt (IRQ0) belongs to this category of
interrupts in which pending condition is cleared automatically by hardware.
Pending Bits Cleared by the Service Routine
The second type of pending bit is the one that should be cleared by program software. The service routine must
clear the appropriate pending bit before a return-from-interrupt subroutine (IRET) occurs. To do this, a "0" must be
written to the corresponding pending bit location in the source’s mode or control register.
5-14
S3C8245/P8245/C8249/P8249
INTERRUPT STRUCTURE
INTERRUPT SOURCE POLLING SEQUENCE
The interrupt request polling and servicing sequence is as follows:
1. A source generates an interrupt request by setting the interrupt request bit to "1".
2. The CPU polling procedure identifies a pending condition for that source.
3. The CPU checks the source's interrupt level.
4. The CPU generates an interrupt acknowledge signal.
5. Interrupt logic determines the interrupt's vector address.
6. The service routine starts and the source's pending bit is cleared to "0" (by hardware or by software).
7. The CPU continues polling for interrupt requests.
INTERRUPT SERVICE ROUTINES
Before an interrupt request is serviced, the following conditions must be met:
— Interrupt processing must be globally enabled (EI, SYM.0 = "1")
— The interrupt level must be enabled (IMR register)
— The interrupt level must have the highest priority if more than one levels are currently requesting service
— The interrupt must be enabled at the interrupt's source (peripheral control register)
When all the above conditions are met, the interrupt request is acknowledged at the end of the instruction cycle.
The CPU then initiates an interrupt machine cycle that completes the following processing sequence:
1. Reset (clear to "0") the interrupt enable bit in the SYM register (SYM.0) to disable all subsequent interrupts.
2. Save the program counter (PC) and status flags to the system stack.
3. Branch to the interrupt vector to fetch the address of the service routine.
4. Pass control to the interrupt service routine.
When the interrupt service routine is completed, the CPU issues an Interrupt Return (IRET). The IRET restores
the PC and status flags, setting SYM.0 to "1". It allows the CPU to process the next interrupt request.
5-15
INTERRUPT STRUCTURE
S3C8245/P8245/C8249/P8249
GENERATING INTERRUPT VECTOR ADDRESSES
The interrupt vector area in the ROM (00H–FFH) contains the addresses of interrupt service routines that
correspond to each level in the interrupt structure. Vectored interrupt processing follows this sequence:
1. Push the program counter's low-byte value to the stack.
2. Push the program counter's high-byte value to the stack.
3. Push the FLAG register values to the stack.
4. Fetch the service routine's high-byte address from the vector location.
5. Fetch the service routine's low-byte address from the vector location.
6. Branch to the service routine specified by the concatenated 16-bit vector address.
NOTE
A 16-bit vector address always begins at an even-numbered ROM address within the range of 00H–FFH.
NESTING OF VECTORED INTERRUPTS
It is possible to nest a higher-priority interrupt request while a lower-priority request is being serviced. To do this,
you must follow these steps:
1. Push the current 8-bit interrupt mask register (IMR) value to the stack (PUSH IMR).
2. Load the IMR register with a new mask value that enables only the higher priority interrupt.
3. Execute an EI instruction to enable interrupt processing (a higher priority interrupt will be processed if it
occurs).
4. When the lower-priority interrupt service routine ends, restore the IMR to its original value by returning the
previous mask value from the stack (POP IMR).
5. Execute an IRET.
Depending on the application, you may be able to simplify the procedure above to some extent.
INSTRUCTION POINTER (IP)
The instruction pointer (IP) is adopted by all the S3C8-series microcontrollers to control the optional high-speed
interrupt processing feature called fast interrupts. The IP consists of register pair DAH and DBH. The names of IP
registers are IPH (high byte, IP15–IP8) and IPL (low byte, IP7–IP0).
FAST INTERRUPT PROCESSING
The feature called fast interrupt processing allows an interrupt within a given level to be completed in
approximately 6 clock cycles rather than the usual 16 clock cycles. To select a specific interrupt level for fast
interrupt processing, you write the appropriate 3-bit value to SYM.4–SYM.2. Then, to enable fast interrupt
processing for the selected level, you set SYM.1 to “1”.
5-16
S3C8245/P8245/C8249/P8249
INTERRUPT STRUCTURE
FAST INTERRUPT PROCESSING (Continued)
Two other system registers support fast interrupt processing:
— The instruction pointer (IP) contains the starting address of the service routine (and is later used to swap the
program counter values), and
— When a fast interrupt occurs, the contents of the FLAGS register is stored in an unmapped, dedicated register
called FLAGS' (“FLAGS prime”).
NOTE
For the S3C8245/C8249 microcontroller, the service routine for any one of the eight interrupt levels:
IRQ0–IRQ7, can be selected for fast interrupt processing.
Procedure for Initiating Fast Interrupts
To initiate fast interrupt processing, follow these steps:
1. Load the start address of the service routine into the instruction pointer (IP).
2. Load the interrupt level number (IRQn) into the fast interrupt selection field (SYM.4–SYM.2)
3. Write a "1" to the fast interrupt enable bit in the SYM register.
Fast Interrupt Service Routine
When an interrupt occurs in the level selected for fast interrupt processing, the following events occur:
1. The contents of the instruction pointer and the PC are swapped.
2. The FLAG register values are written to the FLAGS' (“FLAGS prime”) register.
3. The fast interrupt status bit in the FLAGS register is set.
4. The interrupt is serviced.
5. Assuming that the fast interrupt status bit is set, when the fast interrupt service routine ends, the instruction
pointer and PC values are swapped back.
6. The content of FLAGS' (“FLAGS prime”) is copied automatically back to the FLAGS register.
7. The fast interrupt status bit in FLAGS is cleared automatically.
Relationship to Interrupt Pending Bit Types
As described previously, there are two types of interrupt pending bits: One type that is automatically cleared by
hardware after the interrupt service routine is acknowledged and executed; the other that must be cleared by the
application program's interrupt service routine. You can select fast interrupt processing for interrupts with either
type of pending condition clear function — by hardware or by software.
Programming Guidelines
Remember that the only way to enable/disable a fast interrupt is to set/clear the fast interrupt enable bit in the
SYM register, SYM.1. Executing an EI or DI instruction globally enables or disables all interrupt processing,
including fast interrupts. If you use fast interrupts, remember to load the IP with a new start address when the fast
interrupt service routine ends.
5-17
INTERRUPT STRUCTURE
S3C8245/P8245/C8249/P8249
NOTES
5-18
S3C8245/P8245/C8249/P8249
INSTRUCTION SET
6
INSTRUCTION SET
OVERVIEW
The SAM8 instruction set is specifically designed to support the large register files that are typical of most SAM8
microcontrollers. There are 78 instructions. The powerful data manipulation capabilities and features of the
instruction set include:
— A full complement of 8-bit arithmetic and logic operations, including multiply and divide
— No special I/O instructions (I/O control/data registers are mapped directly into the register file)
— Decimal adjustment included in binary-coded decimal (BCD) operations
— 16-bit (word) data can be incremented and decremented
— Flexible instructions for bit addressing, rotate, and shift operations
DATA TYPES
The SAM8 CPU performs operations on bits, bytes, BCD digits, and two-byte words. Bits in the register file can be
set, cleared, complemented, and tested. Bits within a byte are numbered from 7 to 0, where bit 0 is the least
significant (right-most) bit.
REGISTER ADDRESSING
To access an individual register, an 8-bit address in the range 0-255 or the 4-bit address of a working register is
specified. Paired registers can be used to construct 16-bit data or 16-bit program memory or data memory
addresses. For detailed information about register addressing, please refer to Section 2, "Address Spaces."
ADDRESSING MODES
There are seven explicit addressing modes: Register (R), Indirect Register (IR), Indexed (X), Direct (DA), Relative
(RA), Immediate (IM), and Indirect (IA). For detailed descriptions of these addressing modes, please refer to Section
3, "Addressing Modes."
6-1
INSTRUCTION SET
S3C8245/P8245/C8249/P8249
Table 6-1. Instruction Group Summary
Operands Instruction
Mnemonic
Load Instructions
CLR
dst
Clear
LD
dst,src
dst,src
dst,src
dst,src
dst,src
dst,src
dst,src
dst,src
dst,src
dst,src
dst,src
dst,src
dst,src
dst
Load
LDB
Load bit
LDE
Load external data memory
Load program memory
LDC
LDED
LDCD
LDEI
Load external data memory and decrement
Load program memory and decrement
Load external data memory and increment
Load program memory and increment
Load external data memory with pre-decrement
Load program memory with pre-decrement
Load external data memory with pre-increment
Load program memory with pre-increment
Load word
LDCI
LDEPD
LDCPD
LDEPI
LDCPI
LDW
POP
Pop from stack
POPUD
POPUI
PUSH
PUSHUD
PUSHUI
dst,src
dst,src
src
Pop user stack (decrementing)
Pop user stack (incrementing)
Push to stack
dst,src
dst,src
Push user stack (decrementing)
Push user stack (incrementing)
6-2
S3C8245/P8245/C8249/P8249
INSTRUCTION SET
Table 6-1. Instruction Group Summary (Continued)
Operands Instruction
Mnemonic
Arithmetic Instructions
ADC
ADD
CP
dst,src
dst,src
Add with carry
Add
dst,src
dst
Compare
DA
Decimal adjust
Decrement
Decrement word
Divide
DEC
DECW
DIV
dst
dst
dst,src
dst
INC
Increment
INCW
MULT
SBC
SUB
dst
Increment word
Multiply
dst,src
dst,src
dst,src
Subtract with carry
Subtract
Logic Instructions
AND
COM
OR
dst,src
dst
Logical AND
Complement
dst,src
dst,src
Logical OR
XOR
Logical exclusive OR
6-3
INSTRUCTION SET
S3C8245/P8245/C8249/P8249
Table 6-1. Instruction Group Summary (Continued)
Operands Instruction
Mnemonic
Program Control Instructions
BTJRF
BTJRT
CALL
CPIJE
CPIJNE
DJNZ
ENTER
EXIT
dst,src
Bit test and jump relative on false
Bit test and jump relative on true
Call procedure
dst,src
dst
dst,src
dst,src
r,dst
Compare, increment and jump on equal
Compare, increment and jump on non-equal
Decrement register and jump on non-zero
Enter
Exit
IRET
JP
Interrupt return
Jump on condition code
Jump unconditional
Jump relative on condition code
Next
cc,dst
dst
JP
JR
cc,dst
NEXT
RET
Return
WFI
Wait for interrupt
Bit Manipulation Instructions
BAND
BCP
BITC
BITR
BITS
BOR
BXOR
TCM
TM
dst,src
dst,src
dst
Bit AND
Bit compare
Bit complement
Bit reset
dst
dst
Bit set
dst,src
dst,src
dst,src
dst,src
Bit OR
Bit XOR
Test complement under mask
Test under mask
6-4
S3C8245/P8245/C8249/P8249
INSTRUCTION SET
Table 6-1. Instruction Group Summary (Concluded)
Operands Instruction
Mnemonic
Rotate and Shift Instructions
RL
dst
dst
dst
dst
dst
dst
Rotate left
RLC
RR
Rotate left through carry
Rotate right
RRC
SRA
SWAP
Rotate right through carry
Shift right arithmetic
Swap nibbles
CPU Control Instructions
CCF
DI
Complement carry flag
Disable interrupts
Enable interrupts
Enter Idle mode
No operation
EI
IDLE
NOP
RCF
SB0
SB1
SCF
Reset carry flag
Set bank 0
Set bank 1
Set carry flag
SRP
src
Set register pointers
Set register pointer 0
Set register pointer 1
Enter Stop mode
SRP0
SRP1
STOP
src
src
6-5
INSTRUCTION SET
S3C8245/P8245/C8249/P8249
FLAGS REGISTER (FLAGS)
The flags register FLAGS contains eight bits that describe the current status of CPU operations. Four of these bits,
FLAGS.7–FLAGS.4, can be tested and used with conditional jump instructions; two others FLAGS.3 and FLAGS.2
are used for BCD arithmetic.
The FLAGS register also contains a bit to indicate the status of fast interrupt processing (FLAGS.1) and a bank
address status bit (FLAGS.0) to indicate whether bank 0 or bank 1 is currently being addressed. FLAGS register
can be set or reset by instructions as long as its outcome does not affect the flags, such as, Load instruction.
Logical and Arithmetic instructions such as, AND, OR, XOR, ADD, and SUB can affect the Flags register. For
example, the AND instruction updates the Zero, Sign and Overflow flags based on the outcome of the AND
instruction. If the AND instruction uses the Flags register as the destination, then simultaneously, two write will
occur to the Flags register producing an unpredictable result.
System Flags Register (FLAGS)
D5H, Set 1, R/W
MSB
.7
.6
.5
.4
.3
.2
.1
.0
LSB
Bank address
status flag (BA)
Carry flag (C)
First interrupt
status flag (FIS)
Zero flag (Z)
Sign flag (S)
Overflow (V)
Half-carry flag (H)
Decimal adjust flag (D)
Figure 6-1. System Flags Register (FLAGS)
6-6
S3C8245/P8245/C8249/P8249
FLAG DESCRIPTIONS
INSTRUCTION SET
C
Carry Flag (FLAGS.7)
The C flag is set to "1" if the result from an arithmetic operation generates a carry-out from or a borrow to the
bit 7 position (MSB). After rotate and shift operations, it contains the last value shifted out of the specified
register. Program instructions can set, clear, or complement the carry flag.
Z
Zero Flag (FLAGS.6)
For arithmetic and logic operations, the Z flag is set to "1" if the result of the operation is zero. For
operations that test register bits, and for shift and rotate operations, the Z flag is set to "1" if the result is
logic zero.
S
V
D
Sign Flag (FLAGS.5)
Following arithmetic, logic, rotate, or shift operations, the sign bit identifies the state of the MSB of the
result. A logic zero indicates a positive number and a logic one indicates a negative number.
Overflow Flag (FLAGS.4)
The V flag is set to "1" when the result of a two's-complement operation is greater than + 127 or less than –
128. It is also cleared to "0" following logic operations.
Decimal Adjust Flag (FLAGS.3)
The DA bit is used to specify what type of instruction was executed last during BCD operations, so that a
subsequent decimal adjust operation can execute correctly. The DA bit is not usually accessed by
programmers, and cannot be used as a test condition.
H
Half-Carry Flag (FLAGS.2)
The H bit is set to "1" whenever an addition generates a carry-out of bit 3, or when a subtraction borrows out
of bit 4. It is used by the Decimal Adjust (DA) instruction to convert the binary result of a previous addition or
subtraction into the correct decimal (BCD) result. The H flag is seldom accessed directly by a program.
FIS Fast Interrupt Status Flag (FLAGS.1)
The FIS bit is set during a fast interrupt cycle and reset during the IRET following interrupt servicing. When
set, it inhibits all interrupts and causes the fast interrupt return to be executed when the IRET instruction is
executed.
BA Bank Address Flag (FLAGS.0)
The BA flag indicates which register bank in the set 1 area of the internal register file is currently selected,
bank 0 or bank 1. The BA flag is cleared to "0" (select bank 0) when you execute the SB0 instruction and is
set to "1" (select bank 1) when you execute the SB1 instruction.
6-7
INSTRUCTION SET
S3C8245/P8245/C8249/P8249
INSTRUCTION SET NOTATION
Table 6-2. Flag Notation Conventions
Flag
C
Z
Description
Carry flag
Zero flag
S
Sign flag
V
Overflow flag
D
H
0
Decimal-adjust flag
Half-carry flag
Cleared to logic zero
Set to logic one
1
*
Set or cleared according to operation
Value is unaffected
Value is undefined
–
x
Table 6-3. Instruction Set Symbols
Symbol
Description
Destination operand
dst
src
@
Source operand
Indirect register address prefix
Program counter
PC
IP
Instruction pointer
FLAGS
RP
#
Flags register (D5H)
Register pointer
Immediate operand or register address prefix
Hexadecimal number suffix
Decimal number suffix
Binary number suffix
Opcode
H
D
B
opc
6-8
S3C8245/P8245/C8249/P8249
INSTRUCTION SET
Table 6-4. Instruction Notation Conventions
Description Actual Operand Range
Notation
cc
r
Condition code
See list of condition codes in Table 6-6.
Rn (n = 0–15)
Working register only
rb
r0
rr
Bit (b) of working register
Rn.b (n = 0–15, b = 0–7)
Rn (n = 0–15)
Bit 0 (LSB) of working register
Working register pair
RRp (p = 0, 2, 4, ..., 14)
reg or Rn (reg = 0–255, n = 0–15)
reg.b (reg = 0–255, b = 0–7)
R
Register or working register
Bit 'b' of register or working register
Register pair or working register pair
Rb
RR
reg or RRp (reg = 0–254, even number only, where
p = 0, 2, ..., 14)
IA
Ir
Indirect addressing mode
addr (addr = 0–254, even number only)
@Rn (n = 0–15)
Indirect working register only
IR
Irr
Indirect register or indirect working register @Rn or @reg (reg = 0–255, n = 0–15)
Indirect working register pair only
@RRp (p = 0, 2, ..., 14)
IRR
Indirect register pair or indirect working
register pair
@RRp or @reg (reg = 0–254, even only, where
p = 0, 2, ..., 14)
X
Indexed addressing mode
#reg [Rn] (reg = 0–255, n = 0–15)
XS
Indexed (short offset) addressing mode
#addr [RRp] (addr = range –128 to +127, where
p = 0, 2, ..., 14)
xl
Indexed (long offset) addressing mode
#addr [RRp] (addr = range 0–65535, where
p = 0, 2, ..., 14)
da
ra
Direct addressing mode
Relative addressing mode
addr (addr = range 0–65535)
addr (addr = number in the range +127 to –128 that is
an offset relative to the address of the next instruction)
im
Immediate addressing mode
#data (data = 0–255)
iml
Immediate (long) addressing mode
#data (data = range 0–65535)
6-9
INSTRUCTION SET
S3C8245/P8245/C8249/P8249
Table 6-5. Opcode Quick Reference
OPCODE MAP
LOWER NIBBLE (HEX)
–
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
DEC
R1
DEC
IR1
ADD
r1,r2
ADD
r1,Ir2
ADD
R2,R1
ADD
IR2,R1
ADD
R1,IM
BOR
r0–Rb
U
P
P
E
R
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
A
B
C
D
E
F
RLC
R1
RLC
IR1
ADC
r1,r2
ADC
r1,Ir2
ADC
R2,R1
ADC
IR2,R1
ADC
R1,IM
BCP
r1.b, R2
INC
R1
INC
IR1
SUB
r1,r2
SUB
r1,Ir2
SUB
R2,R1
SUB
IR2,R1
SUB
R1,IM
BXOR
r0–Rb
JP
IRR1
SRP/0/1
IM
SBC
r1,r2
SBC
r1,Ir2
SBC
R2,R1
SBC
IR2,R1
SBC
R1,IM
BTJR
r2.b, RA
DA
R1
DA
IR1
OR
r1,r2
OR
r1,Ir2
OR
R2,R1
OR
IR2,R1
OR
R1,IM
LDB
r0–Rb
POP
R1
POP
IR1
AND
r1,r2
AND
r1,Ir2
AND
R2,R1
AND
IR2,R1
AND
R1,IM
BITC
r1.b
COM
R1
COM
IR1
TCM
r1,r2
TCM
r1,Ir2
TCM
R2,R1
TCM
IR2,R1
TCM
R1,IM
BAND
r0–Rb
N
I
PUSH
R2
PUSH
IR2
TM
r1,r2
TM
r1,Ir2
TM
R2,R1
TM
IR2,R1
TM
R1,IM
BIT
r1.b
DECW
RR1
DECW
IR1
PUSHUD
IR1,R2
PUSHUI
IR1,R2
MULT
R2,RR1
MULT
IR2,RR1
MULT
IM,RR1
LD
r1, x, r2
B
B
L
E
RL
R1
RL
IR1
POPUD
IR2,R1
POPUI
IR2,R1
DIV
R2,RR1
DIV
IR2,RR1
DIV
IM,RR1
LD
r2, x, r1
INCW
RR1
INCW
IR1
CP
r1,r2
CP
r1,Ir2
CP
R2,R1
CP
IR2,R1
CP
R1,IM
LDC
r1, Irr2, xL
CLR
R1
CLR
IR1
XOR
r1,r2
XOR
r1,Ir2
XOR
R2,R1
XOR
IR2,R1
XOR
R1,IM
LDC
r2, Irr2, xL
RRC
R1
RRC
IR1
CPIJE
Ir,r2,RA
LDC
r1,Irr2
LDW
RR2,RR1
LDW
IR2,RR1
LDW
RR1,IML
LD
r1, Ir2
SRA
R1
SRA
IR1
CPIJNE
Irr,r2,RA
LDC
r2,Irr1
CALL
IA1
LD
IR1,IM
LD
Ir1, r2
H
E
X
RR
R1
RR
IR1
LDCD
r1,Irr2
LDCI
r1,Irr2
LD
R2,R1
LD
R2,IR1
LD
R1,IM
LDC
r1, Irr2, xs
SWAP
R1
SWAP
IR1
LDCPD
r2,Irr1
LDCPI
r2,Irr1
CALL
IRR1
LD
IR2,R1
CALL
DA1
LDC
r2, Irr1, xs
6-10
S3C8245/P8245/C8249/P8249
INSTRUCTION SET
Table 6-5. Opcode Quick Reference (Continued)
OPCODE MAP
LOWER NIBBLE (HEX)
–
0
8
9
A
B
C
D
E
F
U
P
P
E
R
LD
r1,R2
LD
r2,R1
DJNZ
r1,RA
JR
cc,RA
LD
r1,IM
JP
cc,DA
INC
r1
NEXT
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
A
B
C
D
E
F
ENTER
EXIT
WFI
SB0
SB1
IDLE
STOP
DI
¯
¯
¯
¯
¯
¯
¯
¯
¯
¯
¯
¯
¯
¯
¯
¯
¯
¯
¯
¯
¯
N
I
B
B
L
E
EI
RET
IRET
RCF
SCF
CCF
NOP
H
E
X
LD
r1,R2
LD
r2,R1
DJNZ
r1,RA
JR
cc,RA
LD
r1,IM
JP
cc,DA
INC
r1
6-11
INSTRUCTION SET
S3C8245/P8245/C8249/P8249
CONDITION CODES
The opcode of a conditional jump always contains a 4-bit field called the condition code (cc). This specifies under
which conditions it is to execute the jump. For example, a conditional jump with the condition code for "equal" after
a compare operation only jumps if the two operands are equal. Condition codes are listed in Table 6-6.
The carry (C), zero (Z), sign (S), and overflow (V) flags are used to control the operation of conditional jump
instructions.
Table 6-6. Condition Codes
Binary
Mnemonic
Description
Flags Set
0000
1000
F
T
C
Always false
Always true
Carry
–
–
(note)
(note)
(note)
(note)
C = 1
0111
1111
0110
NC
Z
No carry
Zero
C = 0
Z = 1
Z = 0
NZ
Not zero
1110
1101
0101
0100
1100
PL
MI
Plus
S = 0
S = 1
V = 1
V = 0
Z = 1
Minus
OV
Overflow
No overflow
Equal
NOV
EQ
(note)
(note)
0110
NE
Not equal
Z = 0
1110
1001
0001
1010
0010
GE
LT
Greater than or equal
Less than
(S XOR V) = 0
(S XOR V) = 1
(Z OR (S XOR V)) = 0
(Z OR (S XOR V)) = 1
C = 0
GT
LE
Greater than
Less than or equal
Unsigned greater than or equal
(note)
(note)
UGE
1111
ULT
Unsigned less than
C = 1
0111
1011
0011
UGT
ULE
Unsigned greater than
(C = 0 AND Z = 0) = 1
(C OR Z) = 1
Unsigned less than or equal
NOTES:
1. It indicates condition codes that are related to two different mnemonics but which test the same flag. For
example, Z and EQ are both true if the zero flag (Z) is set, but after an ADD instruction, Z would probably be used;
after a CP instruction, however, EQ would probably be used.
2. For operations involving unsigned numbers, the special condition codes UGE, ULT, UGT, and ULE must be used.
6-12
S3C8245/P8245/C8249/P8249
INSTRUCTION SET
INSTRUCTION DESCRIPTIONS
This section contains detailed information and programming examples for each instruction in the SAM8 instruction
set. Information is arranged in a consistent format for improved readability and for fast referencing. The following
information is included in each instruction description:
— Instruction name (mnemonic)
— Full instruction name
— Source/destination format of the instruction operand
— Shorthand notation of the instruction's operation
— Textual description of the instruction's effect
— Specific flag settings affected by the instruction
— Detailed description of the instruction's format, execution time, and addressing mode(s)
— Programming example(s) explaining how to use the instruction
6-13
INSTRUCTION SET
S3C8245/P8245/C8249/P8249
ADC— Add with carry
ADC
dst,src
Operation:
dst ¬ dst + src + c
The source operand, along with the setting of the carry flag, is added to the destination operand and
the sum is stored in the destination. The contents of the source are unaffected. Two's-complement
addition is performed. In multiple precision arithmetic, this instruction permits the carry from the
addition of low-order operands to be carried into the addition of high-order operands.
Flags:
C: Set if there is a carry from the most significant bit of the result; cleared otherwise.
Z: Set if the result is "0"; cleared otherwise.
S: Set if the result is negative; cleared otherwise.
V: Set if arithmetic overflow occurs, that is, if both operands are of the same sign and the result is
of the opposite sign; cleared otherwise.
D: Always cleared to "0".
H: Set if there is a carry from the most significant bit of the low-order four bits of the result; cleared
otherwise.
Format:
Bytes
Cycles
Opcode
(Hex)
Addr Mode
dst
src
opc
opc
opc
dst | src
src
2
4
6
12
13
r
r
r
lr
dst
src
3
3
6
6
14
15
R
R
R
IR
dst
6
16
R
IM
Examples:
Given: R1 = 10H, R2 = 03H, C flag = "1", register 01H = 20H, register 02H = 03H, and
register 03H = 0AH:
ADC
ADC
ADC
ADC
ADC
R1,R2
®
®
®
®
®
R1 = 14H, R2 = 03H
R1,@R2
01H,02H
01H,@02H
01H,#11H
R1 = 1BH, R2 = 03H
Register 01H = 24H, register 02H = 03H
Register 01H = 2BH, register 02H = 03H
Register 01H = 32H
In the first example, destination register R1 contains the value 10H, the carry flag is set to "1", and
the source working register R2 contains the value 03H. The statement "ADC R1,R2" adds 03H and
the carry flag value ("1") to the destination value 10H, leaving 14H in register R1.
6-14
S3C8245/P8245/C8249/P8249
INSTRUCTION SET
ADD — Add
ADD
dst,src
Operation:
dst ¬ dst + src
The source operand is added to the destination operand and the sum is stored in the destination.
The contents of the source are unaffected. Two's-complement addition is performed.
Flags:
C: Set if there is a carry from the most significant bit of the result; cleared otherwise.
Z: Set if the result is "0"; cleared otherwise.
S: Set if the result is negative; cleared otherwise.
V: Set if arithmetic overflow occurred, that is, if both operands are of the same sign and the result
is of the opposite sign; cleared otherwise.
D: Always cleared to "0".
H: Set if a carry from the low-order nibble occurred.
Format:
Bytes
Cycles
Opcode
(Hex)
Addr Mode
dst
src
opc
opc
opc
dst | src
src
2
4
6
02
03
r
r
r
lr
dst
src
3
3
6
6
04
05
R
R
R
IR
dst
6
06
R
IM
Examples:
Given: R1 = 12H, R2 = 03H, register 01H = 21H, register 02H = 03H, register 03H = 0AH:
ADD
ADD
ADD
ADD
ADD
R1,R2
®
®
®
®
®
R1 = 15H, R2 = 03H
R1,@R2
01H,02H
01H,@02H
01H,#25H
R1 = 1CH, R2 = 03H
Register 01H = 24H, register 02H = 03H
Register 01H = 2BH, register 02H = 03H
Register 01H = 46H
In the first example, destination working register R1 contains 12H and the source working register
R2 contains 03H. The statement "ADD R1,R2" adds 03H to 12H, leaving the value 15H in register
R1.
6-15
INSTRUCTION SET
S3C8245/P8245/C8249/P8249
AND — Logical AND
AND
dst,src
Operation:
dst ¬ dst AND src
The source operand is logically ANDed with the destination operand. The result is stored in the
destination. The AND operation results in a "1" bit being stored whenever the corresponding bits in
the two operands are both logic ones; otherwise a "0" bit value is stored. The contents of the source
are unaffected.
Flags:
C: Unaffected.
Z: Set if the result is "0"; cleared otherwise.
S: Set if the result bit 7 is set; cleared otherwise.
V: Always cleared to "0".
D: Unaffected.
H: Unaffected.
Format:
Bytes
Cycles
Opcode
(Hex)
Addr Mode
dst
src
opc
opc
opc
dst | src
src
2
4
6
52
53
r
r
r
lr
dst
src
3
3
6
6
54
55
R
R
R
IR
dst
6
56
R
IM
Examples:
Given: R1 = 12H, R2 = 03H, register 01H = 21H, register 02H = 03H, register 03H = 0AH:
AND
AND
AND
AND
AND
R1,R2
®
®
®
®
®
R1 = 02H, R2 = 03H
R1,@R2
01H,02H
01H,@02H
01H,#25H
R1 = 02H, R2 = 03H
Register 01H = 01H, register 02H = 03H
Register 01H = 00H, register 02H = 03H
Register 01H = 21H
In the first example, destination working register R1 contains the value 12H and the source working
register R2 contains 03H. The statement "AND R1,R2" logically ANDs the source operand 03H with
the destination operand value 12H, leaving the value 02H in register R1.
6-16
S3C8245/P8245/C8249/P8249
INSTRUCTION SET
BAND — Bit AND
BAND
dst,src.b
BAND
dst.b,src
Operation:
dst(0) ¬ dst(0) AND src(b)
or
dst(b) ¬ dst(b) AND src(0)
The specified bit of the source (or the destination) is logically ANDed with the zero bit (LSB) of the
destination (or source). The resultant bit is stored in the specified bit of the destination. No other
bits of the destination are affected. The source is unaffected.
Flags:
C: Unaffected.
Z: Set if the result is "0"; cleared otherwise.
S: Cleared to "0".
V: Undefined.
D: Unaffected.
H: Unaffected.
Format:
Bytes
Cycles
Opcode
(Hex)
Addr Mode
dst
src
opc
opc
dst | b | 0
src | b | 1
src
dst
3
6
67
r0
Rb
3
6
67
Rb
r0
NOTE: In the second byte of the 3-byte instruction formats, the destination (or source) address is four
bits, the bit address 'b' is three bits, and the LSB address value is one bit in length.
Examples:
Given: R1 = 07H and register 01H = 05H:
BAND R1,01H.1
BAND 01H.1,R1
®
®
R1 = 06H, register 01H = 05H
Register 01H = 05H, R1 = 07H
In the first example, source register 01H contains the value 05H (00000101B) and destination
working register R1 contains 07H (00000111B). The statement "BAND R1,01H.1" ANDs the bit 1
value of the source register ("0") with the bit 0 value of register R1 (destination), leaving the value
06H (00000110B) in register R1.
6-17
INSTRUCTION SET
S3C8245/P8245/C8249/P8249
BCP — Bit Compare
BCP
dst,src.b
Operation:
dst(0) – src(b)
The specified bit of the source is compared to (subtracted from) bit zero (LSB) of the destination.
The zero flag is set if the bits are the same; otherwise it is cleared. The contents of both operands
are unaffected by the comparison.
Flags:
C: Unaffected.
Z: Set if the two bits are the same; cleared otherwise.
S: Cleared to "0".
V: Undefined.
D: Unaffected.
H: Unaffected.
Format:
Bytes
Cycles
Opcode
(Hex)
Addr Mode
dst
src
opc
dst | b | 0
src
3
6
17
r0
Rb
NOTE: In the second byte of the instruction format, the destination address is four bits, the bit address 'b'
is three bits, and the LSB address value is one bit in length.
Example:
Given: R1 = 07H and register 01H = 01H:
BCP
R1,01H.1
®
R1 = 07H, register 01H = 01H
If destination working register R1 contains the value 07H (00000111B) and the source register 01H
contains the value 01H (00000001B), the statement "BCP R1,01H.1" compares bit one of the
source register (01H) and bit zero of the destination register (R1). Because the bit values are not
identical, the zero flag bit (Z) is cleared in the FLAGS register (0D5H).
6-18
S3C8245/P8245/C8249/P8249
INSTRUCTION SET
BITC — Bit Complement
BITC
dst.b
Operation:
dst(b) ¬ NOT dst(b)
This instruction complements the specified bit within the destination without affecting any other bits
in the destination.
Flags:
C: Unaffected.
Z: Set if the result is "0"; cleared otherwise.
S: Cleared to "0".
V: Undefined.
D: Unaffected.
H: Unaffected.
Format:
Bytes
Cycles
Opcode
(Hex)
Addr Mode
dst
opc
dst | b | 0
2
4
57
rb
NOTE: In the second byte of the instruction format, the destination address is four bits, the bit address 'b'
is three bits, and the LSB address value is one bit in length.
Example:
Given: R1 = 07H
BITC
R1.1
®
R1 = 05H
If working register R1 contains the value 07H (00000111B), the statement "BITC R1.1"
complements bit one of the destination and leaves the value 05H (00000101B) in register R1.
Because the result of the complement is not "0", the zero flag (Z) in the FLAGS register (0D5H) is
cleared.
6-19
INSTRUCTION SET
S3C8245/P8245/C8249/P8249
BITR— Bit Reset
BITR
dst.b
Operation:
dst(b) ¬
0
The BITR instruction clears the specified bit within the destination without affecting any other bits in
the destination.
Flags:
No flags are affected.
Format:
Bytes
Cycles
Opcode
(Hex)
Addr Mode
dst
opc
dst | b | 0
2
4
77
rb
NOTE: In the second byte of the instruction format, the destination address is four bits, the bit address 'b'
is three bits, and the LSB address value is one bit in length.
Example:
Given: R1 = 07H:
BITR
R1.1
®
R1 = 05H
If the value of working register R1 is 07H (00000111B), the statement "BITR R1.1" clears bit one of
the destination register R1, leaving the value 05H (00000101B).
6-20
S3C8245/P8245/C8249/P8249
INSTRUCTION SET
BITS — Bit Set
BITS
dst.b
Operation:
dst(b) ¬
1
The BITS instruction sets the specified bit within the destination without affecting any other bits in
the destination.
Flags:
No flags are affected.
Format:
Bytes
Cycles
Opcode
(Hex)
Addr Mode
dst
opc
dst | b | 1
2
4
77
rb
NOTE: In the second byte of the instruction format, the destination address is four bits, the bit address 'b'
is three bits, and the LSB address value is one bit in length.
Example:
Given: R1 = 07H:
BITS
R1.3
®
R1 = 0FH
If working register R1 contains the value 07H (00000111B), the statement "BITS R1.3" sets bit
three of the destination register R1 to "1", leaving the value 0FH (00001111B).
6-21
INSTRUCTION SET
S3C8245/P8245/C8249/P8249
BOR— Bit OR
BOR
BOR
dst,src.b
dst.b,src
Operation:
dst(0) ¬ dst(0) OR src(b)
or
dst(b) ¬ dst(b) OR src(0)
The specified bit of the source (or the destination) is logically ORed with bit zero (LSB) of the
destination (or the source). The resulting bit value is stored in the specified bit of the destination. No
other bits of the destination are affected. The source is unaffected.
Flags:
C: Unaffected.
Z: Set if the result is "0"; cleared otherwise.
S: Cleared to "0".
V: Undefined.
D: Unaffected.
H: Unaffected.
Format:
Bytes
Cycles
Opcode
(Hex)
Addr Mode
dst
src
opc
opc
dst | b | 0
src | b | 1
src
dst
3
6
07
r0
Rb
3
6
07
Rb
r0
NOTE: In the second byte of the 3-byte instruction formats, the destination (or source) address is four
bits, the bit address 'b' is three bits, and the LSB address value is one bit.
Examples:
Given: R1 = 07H and register 01H = 03H:
BOR
BOR
R1, 01H.1
01H.2, R1
®
®
R1 = 07H, register 01H = 03H
Register 01H = 07H, R1 = 07H
In the first example, destination working register R1 contains the value 07H (00000111B) and source
register 01H the value 03H (00000011B). The statement "BOR R1,01H.1" logically ORs bit one of
register 01H (source) with bit zero of R1 (destination). This leaves the same value (07H) in working
register R1.
In the second example, destination register 01H contains the value 03H (00000011B) and the
source working register R1 the value 07H (00000111B). The statement "BOR 01H.2,R1" logically
ORs bit two of register 01H (destination) with bit zero of R1 (source). This leaves the value 07H in
register 01H.
6-22
S3C8245/P8245/C8249/P8249
INSTRUCTION SET
BTJRF — Bit Test, Jump Relative on False
BTJRF
dst,src.b
Operation:
If src(b) is a "0", then PC ¬ PC + dst
The specified bit within the source operand is tested. If it is a "0", the relative address is added to
the program counter and control passes to the statement whose address is now in the PC;
otherwise, the instruction following the BTJRF instruction is executed.
Flags:
No flags are affected.
Format:
Bytes
Cycles
Opcode
(Hex)
Addr Mode
(Note 1)
src | b | 0
dst
src
opc
dst
3
10
37
RA
rb
NOTE: In the second byte of the instruction format, the source address is four bits, the bit address 'b' is
three bits, and the LSB address value is one bit in length.
Example:
Given: R1 = 07H:
BTJRF SKIP,R1.3
®
PC jumps to SKIP location
If working register R1 contains the value 07H (00000111B), the statement "BTJRF SKIP,R1.3" tests
bit 3. Because it is "0", the relative address is added to the PC and the PC jumps to the memory
location pointed to by the SKIP. (Remember that the memory location must be within the allowed
range of + 127 to – 128.)
6-23
INSTRUCTION SET
S3C8245/P8245/C8249/P8249
BTJRT — Bit Test, Jump Relative on True
BTJRT
dst,src.b
Operation:
If src(b) is a "1", then PC ¬ PC + dst
The specified bit within the source operand is tested. If it is a "1", the relative address is added to
the program counter and control passes to the statement whose address is now in the PC;
otherwise, the instruction following the BTJRT instruction is executed.
Flags:
No flags are affected.
Format:
Bytes
Cycles
Opcode
(Hex)
Addr Mode
(Note 1)
src | b | 1
dst
src
opc
dst
3
10
37
RA
rb
NOTE: In the second byte of the instruction format, the source address is four bits, the bit address 'b' is
three bits, and the LSB address value is one bit in length.
Example:
Given: R1 = 07H:
BTJRT
SKIP,R1.1
If working register R1 contains the value 07H (00000111B), the statement "BTJRT SKIP,R1.1" tests
bit one in the source register (R1). Because it is a "1", the relative address is added to the PC and
the PC jumps to the memory location pointed to by the SKIP. (Remember that the memory location
must be within the allowed range of + 127 to – 128.)
6-24
S3C8245/P8245/C8249/P8249
INSTRUCTION SET
BXOR— Bit XOR
BXOR
dst,src.b
BXOR
dst.b,src
Operation:
dst(0) ¬ dst(0) XOR src(b)
or
dst(b) ¬ dst(b) XOR src(0)
The specified bit of the source (or the destination) is logically exclusive-ORed with bit zero (LSB) of
the destination (or source). The result bit is stored in the specified bit of the destination. No other
bits of the destination are affected. The source is unaffected.
Flags:
C: Unaffected.
Z: Set if the result is "0"; cleared otherwise.
S: Cleared to "0".
V: Undefined.
D: Unaffected.
H: Unaffected.
Format:
Bytes
Cycles
Opcode
(Hex)
Addr Mode
dst
src
opc
opc
dst | b | 0
src | b | 1
src
dst
3
6
27
r0
Rb
3
6
27
Rb
r0
NOTE: In the second byte of the 3-byte instruction formats, the destination (or source) address is four
bits, the bit address 'b' is three bits, and the LSB address value is one bit in length.
Examples:
Given: R1 = 07H (00000111B) and register 01H = 03H (00000011B):
BXOR R1,01H.1
BXOR 01H.2,R1
®
®
R1 = 06H, register 01H = 03H
Register 01H = 07H, R1 = 07H
In the first example, destination working register R1 has the value 07H (00000111B) and source
register 01H has the value 03H (00000011B). The statement "BXOR R1,01H.1" exclusive-ORs bit
one of register 01H (source) with bit zero of R1 (destination). The result bit value is stored in bit zero
of R1, changing its value from 07H to 06H. The value of source register 01H is unaffected.
6-25
INSTRUCTION SET
S3C8245/P8245/C8249/P8249
CALL — Call Procedure
CALL
dst
Operation:
SP
@SP
SP
@SP
PC
¬
¬
¬
¬
¬
SP – 1
PCL
SP –1
PCH
dst
The current contents of the program counter are pushed onto the top of the stack. The program
counter value used is the address of the first instruction following the CALL instruction. The
specified destination address is then loaded into the program counter and points to the first
instruction of a procedure. At the end of the procedure the return instruction (RET) can be used to
return to the original program flow. RET pops the top of the stack back into the program counter.
Flags:
No flags are affected.
Format:
Bytes
Cycles
Opcode
(Hex)
Addr Mode
dst
opc
opc
opc
dst
3
14
F6
F4
D4
DA
IRR
IA
dst
dst
2
2
12
14
Examples:
Given: R0 = 35H, R1 = 21H, PC = 1A47H, and SP = 0002H:
CALL 3521H ®
SP = 0000H
(Memory locations 0000H = 1AH, 0001H = 4AH, where
4AH is the address that follows the instruction.)
SP = 0000H (0000H = 1AH, 0001H = 49H)
SP = 0000H (0000H = 1AH, 0001H = 49H)
CALL @RR0 ®
CALL #40H
®
In the first example, if the program counter value is 1A47H and the stack pointer contains the value
0002H, the statement "CALL 3521H" pushes the current PC value onto the top of the stack. The
stack pointer now points to memory location 0000H. The PC is then loaded with the value 3521H,
the address of the first instruction in the program sequence to be executed.
If the contents of the program counter and stack pointer are the same as in the first example, the
statement "CALL @RR0" produces the same result except that the 49H is stored in stack location
0001H (because the two-byte instruction format was used). The PC is then loaded with the value
3521H, the address of the first instruction in the program sequence to be executed. Assuming that
the contents of the program counter and stack pointer are the same as in the first example, if
program address 0040H contains 35H and program address 0041H contains 21H, the statement
"CALL #40H" produces the same result as in the second example.
6-26
S3C8245/P8245/C8249/P8249
INSTRUCTION SET
CCF — Complement Carry Flag
CCF
Operation:
C ¬ NOT C
The carry flag (C) is complemented. If C = "1", the value of the carry flag is changed to logic zero;
if C = "0", the value of the carry flag is changed to logic one.
Flags:
C: Complemented.
No other flags are affected.
Format:
Bytes
Cycles
Opcode
(Hex)
opc
1
4
EF
Example:
Given: The carry flag = "0":
CCF
If the carry flag = "0", the CCF instruction complements it in the FLAGS register (0D5H), changing
its value from logic zero to logic one.
6-27
INSTRUCTION SET
S3C8245/P8245/C8249/P8249
CLR— Clear
CLR
dst
Operation:
dst ¬ "0"
The destination location is cleared to "0".
Flags:
No flags are affected.
Format:
Bytes
Cycles
Opcode
(Hex)
Addr Mode
dst
opc
dst
2
4
4
B0
B1
R
IR
Examples:
Given: Register 00H = 4FH, register 01H = 02H, and register 02H = 5EH:
CLR
CLR
00H
®
®
Register 00H = 00H
@01H
Register 01H = 02H, register 02H = 00H
In Register (R) addressing mode, the statement "CLR 00H" clears the destination register 00H
value to 00H. In the second example, the statement "CLR @01H" uses Indirect Register (IR)
addressing mode to clear the 02H register value to 00H.
6-28
S3C8245/P8245/C8249/P8249
INSTRUCTION SET
COM — Complement
COM
dst
Operation:
dst ¬ NOT dst
The contents of the destination location are complemented (one's complement); all "1s" are
changed to "0s", and vice-versa.
Flags:
C: Unaffected.
Z: Set if the result is "0"; cleared otherwise.
S: Set if the result bit 7 is set; cleared otherwise.
V: Always reset to "0".
D: Unaffected.
H: Unaffected.
Format:
Bytes
Cycles
Opcode
(Hex)
Addr Mode
dst
opc
dst
2
4
4
60
61
R
IR
Examples:
Given: R1 = 07H and register 07H = 0F1H:
COM R1
®
®
R1 = 0F8H
R1 = 07H, register 07H = 0EH
COM @R1
In the first example, destination working register R1 contains the value 07H (00000111B). The
statement "COM R1" complements all the bits in R1: all logic ones are changed to logic zeros, and
vice-versa, leaving the value 0F8H (11111000B).
In the second example, Indirect Register (IR) addressing mode is used to complement the value of
destination register 07H (11110001B), leaving the new value 0EH (00001110B).
6-29
INSTRUCTION SET
S3C8245/P8245/C8249/P8249
CP— Compare
CP
dst,src
Operation:
dst – src
The source operand is compared to (subtracted from) the destination operand, and the appropriate
flags are set accordingly. The contents of both operands are unaffected by the comparison.
Flags:
C: Set if a "borrow" occurred (src > dst); cleared otherwise.
Z: Set if the result is "0"; cleared otherwise.
S: Set if the result is negative; cleared otherwise.
V: Set if arithmetic overflow occurred; cleared otherwise.
D: Unaffected.
H: Unaffected.
Format:
Bytes
Cycles
Opcode
(Hex)
Addr Mode
dst
src
opc
dst |
src
2
4
6
A2
r
r
A3
r
lr
opc
opc
src
dst
dst
src
3
3
6
6
A4
A5
R
R
R
IR
6
A6
R
IM
Examples:
1. Given: R1 = 02H and R2 = 03H:
CP R1,R2 Set the C and S flags
®
Destination working register R1 contains the value 02H and source register R2 contains the value
03H. The statement "CP R1,R2" subtracts the R2 value (source/subtrahend) from the R1 value
(destination/minuend). Because a "borrow" occurs and the difference is negative, C and S are "1".
2. Given: R1 = 05H and R2 = 0AH:
CP
JP
INC
R1,R2
UGE,SKIP
R1
SKIP LD
R3,R1
In this example, destination working register R1 contains the value 05H which is less than the
contents of the source working register R2 (0AH). The statement "CP R1,R2" generates C = "1"
and the JP instruction does not jump to the SKIP location. After the statement "LD R3,R1"
executes, the value 06H remains in working register R3.
6-30
S3C8245/P8245/C8249/P8249
INSTRUCTION SET
CPIJE— Compare, Increment, and Jump on Equal
CPIJE
dst,src,RA
Operation:
If dst – src = "0", PC ¬ PC + RA
Ir ¬ Ir + 1
The source operand is compared to (subtracted from) the destination operand. If the result is "0",
the relative address is added to the program counter and control passes to the statement whose
address is now in the program counter. Otherwise, the instruction immediately following the CPIJE
instruction is executed. In either case, the source pointer is incremented by one before the next
instruction is executed.
Flags:
No flags are affected.
Format:
Bytes
Cycles
Opcode
(Hex)
Addr Mode
dst
src
opc
src dst
RA
3
12
C2
r
Ir
NOTE: Execution time is 18 cycles if the jump is taken or 16 cycles if it is not taken.
Example:
Given: R1 = 02H, R2 = 03H, and register 03H = 02H:
CPIJE R1,@R2,SKIP
®
R2 = 04H, PC jumps to SKIP location
In this example, working register R1 contains the value 02H, working register R2 the value 03H, and
register 03 contains 02H. The statement "CPIJE R1,@R2,SKIP" compares the @R2 value 02H
(00000010B) to 02H (00000010B). Because the result of the comparison is equal, the relative
address is added to the PC and the PC then jumps to the memory location pointed to by SKIP. The
source register (R2) is incremented by one, leaving a value of 04H. (Remember that the memory
location must be within the allowed range of + 127 to – 128.)
6-31
INSTRUCTION SET
S3C8245/P8245/C8249/P8249
CPIJNE— Compare, Increment, and Jump on Non-Equal
CPIJNE
dst,src,RA
Operation:
If dst – src "0", PC ¬ PC + RA
Ir ¬ Ir + 1
The source operand is compared to (subtracted from) the destination operand. If the result is not
"0", the relative address is added to the program counter and control passes to the statement
whose address is now in the program counter; otherwise the instruction following the CPIJNE
instruction is executed. In either case the source pointer is incremented by one before the next
instruction.
Flags:
No flags are affected.
Format:
Bytes
Cycles
Opcode
(Hex)
Addr Mode
dst
src
opc
src dst
RA
3
12
D2
r
Ir
NOTE: Execution time is 18 cycles if the jump is taken or 16 cycles if it is not taken.
Example:
Given: R1 = 02H, R2 = 03H, and register 03H = 04H:
CPIJNE R1,@R2,SKIP
®
R2 = 04H, PC jumps to SKIP location
Working register R1 contains the value 02H, working register R2 (the source pointer) the value 03H,
and general register 03 the value 04H. The statement "CPIJNE R1,@R2,SKIP" subtracts 04H
(00000100B) from 02H (00000010B). Because the result of the comparison is non-equal, the relative
address is added to the PC and the PC then jumps to the memory location pointed to by SKIP. The
source pointer register (R2) is also incremented by one, leaving a value of 04H. (Remember that the
memory location must be within the allowed range of + 127 to – 128.)
6-32
S3C8245/P8245/C8249/P8249
INSTRUCTION SET
DA— Decimal Adjust
DA
dst
Operation:
dst ¬ DA dst
The destination operand is adjusted to form two 4-bit BCD digits following an addition or subtraction
operation. For addition (ADD, ADC) or subtraction (SUB, SBC), the following table indicates the
operation performed. (The operation is undefined if the destination operand was not the result of a
valid addition or subtraction of BCD digits):
Instruction
Carry
Before DA
Bits 4–7
Value (Hex)
H Flag
Before DA
Bits 0–3
Value (Hex)
Number Added
to Byte
Carry
After DA
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
0
0
1
1
0–9
0–8
0–9
A–F
9–F
A–F
0–2
0–2
0–3
0–9
0–8
7–F
6–F
0
0
1
0
0
1
0
0
1
0
1
0
1
0–9
A–F
0–3
0–9
A–F
0–3
0–9
A–F
0–3
0–9
6–F
0–9
6–F
00
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
1
1
0
0
1
1
06
06
ADD
ADC
60
66
66
60
66
66
00 = – 00
FA = – 06
A0 = – 60
9A = – 66
SUB
SBC
Flags:
C: Set if there was a carry from the most significant bit; cleared otherwise (see table).
Z: Set if result is "0"; cleared otherwise.
S: Set if result bit 7 is set; cleared otherwise.
V: Undefined.
D: Unaffected.
H: Unaffected.
Format:
Bytes
Cycles
Opcode
(Hex)
Addr Mode
dst
opc
dst
2
4
4
40
41
R
IR
6-33
INSTRUCTION SET
S3C8245/P8245/C8249/P8249
DA— Decimal Adjust
DA
(Continued)
Example:
Given: Working register R0 contains the value 15 (BCD), working register R1 contains
27 (BCD), and address 27H contains 46 (BCD):
ADD
DA
R1,R0
R1
;
;
C ¬ "0", H ¬ "0", Bits 4–7 = 3, bits 0–3 = C, R1 ¬ 3CH
R1 ¬ 3CH + 06
If addition is performed using the BCD values 15 and 27, the result should be 42. The sum is
incorrect, however, when the binary representations are added in the destination location using
standard binary arithmetic:
0 0 0 1 0 1 0 1
15
27
+ 0 0 1 0 0 1 1 1
0 0 1 1 1 1 0 0
=
3CH
The DA instruction adjusts this result so that the correct BCD representation is obtained:
0 0 1 1 1 1 0 0
+ 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 0
0 1 0 0 0 0 1 0
=
42
Assuming the same values given above, the statements
SUB
DA
27H,R0 ;
@R1
C ¬ "0", H ¬ "0", Bits 4–7 = 3, bits 0–3 = 1
@R1 ¬ 31–0
;
leave the value 31 (BCD) in address 27H (@R1).
6-34
S3C8245/P8245/C8249/P8249
INSTRUCTION SET
DEC— Decrement
DEC
dst
Operation:
dst ¬ dst – 1
The contents of the destination operand are decremented by one.
Flags:
C: Unaffected.
Z: Set if the result is "0"; cleared otherwise.
S: Set if result is negative; cleared otherwise.
V: Set if arithmetic overflow occurred; cleared otherwise.
D: Unaffected.
H: Unaffected.
Format:
Bytes
Cycles
Opcode
(Hex)
Addr Mode
dst
opc
dst
2
4
4
00
01
R
IR
Examples:
Given: R1 = 03H and register 03H = 10H:
DEC
DEC
R1
®
®
R1 = 02H
@R1
Register 03H = 0FH
In the first example, if working register R1 contains the value 03H, the statement "DEC R1"
decrements the hexadecimal value by one, leaving the value 02H. In the second example, the
statement "DEC @R1" decrements the value 10H contained in the destination register 03H by one,
leaving the value 0FH.
6-35
INSTRUCTION SET
S3C8245/P8245/C8249/P8249
DECW — Decrement Word
DECW
dst
Operation:
dst ¬ dst – 1
The contents of the destination location (which must be an even address) and the operand following
that location are treated as a single 16-bit value that is decremented by one.
Flags:
C: Unaffected.
Z: Set if the result is "0"; cleared otherwise.
S: Set if the result is negative; cleared otherwise.
V: Set if arithmetic overflow occurred; cleared otherwise.
D: Unaffected.
H: Unaffected.
Format:
Bytes
Cycles
Opcode
(Hex)
Addr Mode
dst
opc
dst
2
8
8
80
81
RR
IR
Examples:
Given: R0 = 12H, R1 = 34H, R2 = 30H, register 30H = 0FH, and register 31H = 21H:
DECW RR0
DECW @R2
®
®
R0 = 12H, R1 = 33H
Register 30H = 0FH, register 31H = 20H
In the first example, destination register R0 contains the value 12H and register R1 the value 34H.
The statement "DECW RR0" addresses R0 and the following operand R1 as a 16-bit word and
decrements the value of R1 by one, leaving the value 33H.
NOTE:
A system malfunction may occur if you use a Zero flag (FLAGS.6) result together with a DECW
instruction. To avoid this problem, we recommend that you use DECW as shown in the following
example:
LOOP: DECW RR0
LD
OR
JR
R2,R1
R2,R0
NZ,LOOP
6-36
S3C8245/P8245/C8249/P8249
INSTRUCTION SET
DI — Disable Interrupts
DI
Operation:
SYM (0) ¬
0
Bit zero of the system mode control register, SYM.0, is cleared to "0", globally disabling all
interrupt processing. Interrupt requests will continue to set their respective interrupt pending bits,
but the CPU will not service them while interrupt processing is disabled.
Flags:
No flags are affected.
Format:
Bytes
Cycles
Opcode
(Hex)
opc
1
4
8F
Example:
Given: SYM = 01H:
DI
If the value of the SYM register is 01H, the statement "DI" leaves the new value 00H in the register
and clears SYM.0 to "0", disabling interrupt processing.
Before changing IMR, interrupt pending and interrupt source control register, be sure DI state.
6-37
INSTRUCTION SET
S3C8245/P8245/C8249/P8249
DIV— Divide (Unsigned)
DIV
dst,src
Operation:
dst ÷ src
dst (UPPER) ¬ REMAINDER
dst (LOWER) ¬ QUOTIENT
The destination operand (16 bits) is divided by the source operand (8 bits). The quotient (8 bits) is
stored in the lower half of the destination. The remainder (8 bits) is stored in the upper half of the
8
destination. When the quotient is ³ 2 , the numbers stored in the upper and lower halves of the
destination for quotient and remainder are incorrect. Both operands are treated as unsigned
integers.
8
9
Flags:
C: Set if the V flag is set and quotient is between 2 and 2 –1; cleared otherwise.
Z: Set if divisor or quotient = "0"; cleared otherwise.
S: Set if MSB of quotient = "1"; cleared otherwise.
8
V: Set if quotient is ³ 2 or if divisor = "0"; cleared otherwise.
D: Unaffected.
H: Unaffected.
Format:
Bytes
Cycles
Opcode
(Hex)
Addr Mode
dst
RR
RR
RR
src
opc
src
dst
3
26/10
26/10
26/10
94
95
96
R
IR
IM
NOTE: Execution takes 10 cycles if the divide-by-zero is attempted; otherwise it takes 26 cycles.
Examples:
Given: R0 = 10H, R1 = 03H, R2 = 40H, register 40H = 80H:
DIV
DIV
DIV
RR0,R2
®
®
®
R0 = 03H, R1 = 40H
R0 = 03H, R1 = 20H
R0 = 03H, R1 = 80H
RR0,@R2
RR0,#20H
In the first example, destination working register pair RR0 contains the values 10H (R0) and 03H
(R1), and register R2 contains the value 40H. The statement "DIV RR0,R2" divides the 16-bit RR0
value by the 8-bit value of the R2 (source) register. After the DIV instruction, R0 contains the value
03H and R1 contains 40H. The 8-bit remainder is stored in the upper half of the destination register
RR0 (R0) and the quotient in the lower half (R1).
6-38
S3C8245/P8245/C8249/P8249
INSTRUCTION SET
DJNZ— Decrement and Jump if Non-Zero
DJNZ
r,dst
Operation:
r ¬ r – 1
If r ¹ 0, PC ¬ PC + dst
The working register being used as a counter is decremented. If the contents of the register are not
logic zero after decrementing, the relative address is added to the program counter and control
passes to the statement whose address is now in the PC. The range of the relative address is
+127 to –128, and the original value of the PC is taken to be the address of the instruction byte
following the DJNZ statement.
NOTE: In case of using DJNZ instruction, the working register being used as a counter should be set at
the one of location 0C0H to 0CFH with SRP, SRP0, or SRP1 instruction.
Flags:
No flags are affected.
Format:
Bytes
Cycles
Opcode
(Hex)
Addr Mode
dst
r | opc
dst
2
8 (jump taken)
8 (no jump)
rA
RA
r = 0 to F
Example:
Given: R1 = 02H and LOOP is the label of a relative address:
SRP #0C0H
DJNZ R1,LOOP
DJNZ is typically used to control a "loop" of instructions. In many cases, a label is used as the
destination operand instead of a numeric relative address value. In the example, working register R1
contains the value 02H, and LOOP is the label for a relative address.
The statement "DJNZ R1, LOOP" decrements register R1 by one, leaving the value 01H. Because
the contents of R1 after the decrement are non-zero, the jump is taken to the relative address
specified by the LOOP label.
6-39
INSTRUCTION SET
S3C8245/P8245/C8249/P8249
EI — Enable Interrupts
EI
Operation:
SYM (0) ¬
1
An EI instruction sets bit zero of the system mode register, SYM.0 to "1". This allows interrupts to
be serviced as they occur (assuming they have highest priority). If an interrupt's pending bit was set
while interrupt processing was disabled (by executing a DI instruction), it will be serviced when you
execute the EI instruction.
Flags:
No flags are affected.
Format:
Bytes
Cycles
Opcode
(Hex)
opc
1
4
9F
Example:
Given: SYM = 00H:
EI
If the SYM register contains the value 00H, that is, if interrupts are currently disabled, the statement
"EI" sets the SYM register to 01H, enabling all interrupts. (SYM.0 is the enable bit for global
interrupt processing.)
6-40
S3C8245/P8245/C8249/P8249
INSTRUCTION SET
ENTER— Enter
ENTER
Operation:
SP
@SP
IP
¬
¬
¬
¬
¬
SP – 2
IP
PC
PC
IP
@IP
IP + 2
This instruction is useful when implementing threaded-code languages. The contents of the
instruction pointer are pushed to the stack. The program counter (PC) value is then written to the
instruction pointer. The program memory word that is pointed to by the instruction pointer is loaded
into the PC, and the instruction pointer is incremented by two.
Flags:
No flags are affected.
Format:
Bytes
Cycles
Opcode
(Hex)
opc
1
14
1F
Example:
The diagram below shows one example of how to use an ENTER statement.
Before
After
Data
Address
IP
Data
Address
IP
0050
0040
0022
0043
0110
0020
Address
Data
1F
Address
40 Enter
Data
1F
PC
SP
40 Enter
PC
SP
41 Address H 01
42 Address L 10
43 Address H
41 Address H 01
42 Address L 10
43 Address H
20
21
22
IPH
IPL
Data
00
50
110 Routine
Memory
Memory
22
Data
Stack
Stack
6-41
INSTRUCTION SET
S3C8245/P8245/C8249/P8249
EXIT — Exit
EXIT
Operation:
IP
¬
¬
¬
¬
@SP
SP
PC
IP
SP + 2
@IP
IP + 2
This instruction is useful when implementing threaded-code languages. The stack value is popped
and loaded into the instruction pointer. The program memory word that is pointed to by the
instruction pointer is then loaded into the program counter, and the instruction pointer is
incremented by two.
Flags:
No flags are affected.
Format:
Bytes
Cycles
Opcode (Hex)
opc
1
14 (internal stack)
16 (internal stack)
2F
Example:
The diagram below shows one example of how to use an EXIT statement.
Before
After
Data
Address
IP
Data
Address
IP
0050
0040
0022
0052
0060
0022
Address
Data
Address
Data
PC
SP
PC
SP
50 PCL old
51 PCH
60
00
60 Main
140 Exit
2F
20
21
22
IPH
IPL
Data
00
50
Memory
Memory
Data
22
Stack
Stack
6-42
S3C8245/P8245/C8249/P8249
INSTRUCTION SET
IDLE — Idle Operation
IDLE
Operation:
The IDLE instruction stops the CPU clock while allowing system clock oscillation to continue. Idle
mode can be released by an interrupt request (IRQ) or an external reset operation.
Flags:
No flags are affected.
Format:
Bytes
Cycles
Opcode
(Hex)
Addr Mode
dst
src
opc
1
4
6F
–
–
Example:
The instruction
IDLE
stops the CPU clock but not the system clock.
6-43
INSTRUCTION SET
S3C8245/P8245/C8249/P8249
INC— Increment
INC
dst
Operation:
dst ¬ dst + 1
The contents of the destination operand are incremented by one.
Flags:
C: Unaffected.
Z: Set if the result is "0"; cleared otherwise.
S: Set if the result is negative; cleared otherwise.
V: Set if arithmetic overflow occurred; cleared otherwise.
D: Unaffected.
H: Unaffected.
Format:
Bytes
Cycles
Opcode
(Hex)
Addr Mode
dst
dst | opc
1
4
rE
r
r = 0 to F
opc
dst
2
4
4
20
21
R
IR
Examples:
Given: R0 = 1BH, register 00H = 0CH, and register 1BH = 0FH:
INC
INC
INC
R0
®
®
®
R0 = 1CH
00H
@R0
Register 00H = 0DH
R0 = 1BH, register 01H = 10H
In the first example, if destination working register R0 contains the value 1BH, the statement "INC
R0" leaves the value 1CH in that same register.
The next example shows the effect an INC instruction has on register 00H, assuming that it
contains the value 0CH.
In the third example, INC is used in Indirect Register (IR) addressing mode to increment the value of
register 1BH from 0FH to 10H.
6-44
S3C8245/P8245/C8249/P8249
INSTRUCTION SET
INCW — Increment Word
INCW
dst
Operation:
dst ¬ dst + 1
The contents of the destination (which must be an even address) and the byte following that location
are treated as a single 16-bit value that is incremented by one.
Flags:
C: Unaffected.
Z: Set if the result is "0"; cleared otherwise.
S: Set if the result is negative; cleared otherwise.
V: Set if arithmetic overflow occurred; cleared otherwise.
D: Unaffected.
H: Unaffected.
Format:
Bytes
Cycles
Opcode
(Hex)
Addr Mode
dst
opc
dst
2
8
8
A0
A1
RR
IR
Examples:
Given: R0 = 1AH, R1 = 02H, register 02H = 0FH, and register 03H = 0FFH:
INCW RR0
INCW @R1
®
®
R0 = 1AH, R1 = 03H
Register 02H = 10H, register 03H = 00H
In the first example, the working register pair RR0 contains the value 1AH in register R0 and 02H in
register R1. The statement "INCW RR0" increments the 16-bit destination by one, leaving the value
03H in register R1. In the second example, the statement "INCW @R1" uses Indirect Register (IR)
addressing mode to increment the contents of general register 03H from 0FFH to 00H and register
02H from 0FH to 10H.
NOTE:
A system malfunction may occur if you use a Zero (Z) flag (FLAGS.6) result together with an INCW
instruction. To avoid this problem, we recommend that you use INCW as shown in the following
example:
LOOP:
INCW
LD
OR
JR
RR0
R2,R1
R2,R0
NZ,LOOP
6-45
INSTRUCTION SET
S3C8245/P8245/C8249/P8249
IRET — Interrupt Return
IRET
IRET (Normal)
IRET (Fast)
Operation:
FLAGS ¬ @SP
SP ¬ SP + 1
PC ¬ @SP
PC « IP
FLAGS ¬ FLAGS'
FIS ¬
0
SP ¬ SP + 2
SYM(0) ¬
1
This instruction is used at the end of an interrupt service routine. It restores the flag register and the
program counter. It also re-enables global interrupts. A "normal IRET" is executed only if the fast
interrupt status bit (FIS, bit one of the FLAGS register, 0D5H) is cleared (= "0"). If a fast interrupt
occurred, IRET clears the FIS bit that was set at the beginning of the service routine.
Flags:
All flags are restored to their original settings (that is, the settings before the interrupt occurred).
Format:
IRET
Bytes
Cycles
Opcode (Hex)
(Normal)
opc
1
10 (internal stack)
12 (internal stack)
BF
IRET
Bytes
Cycles
Opcode (Hex)
(Fast)
opc
1
6
BF
Example:
In the figure below, the instruction pointer is initially loaded with 100H in the main program before
interrupts are enabled. When an interrupt occurs, the program counter and instruction pointer are
swapped. This causes the PC to jump to address 100H and the IP to keep the return address. The
last instruction in the service routine normally is a jump to IRET at address FFH. This causes the
instruction pointer to be loaded with 100H "again" and the program counter to jump back to the
main program. Now, the next interrupt can occur and the IP is still correct at 100H.
0H
FFH
IRET
100H
Interrupt
Service
Routine
JP to FFH
FFFFH
NOTE:
In the fast interrupt example above, if the last instruction is not a jump to IRET, you must pay
attention to the order of the last two instructions. The IRET cannot be immediately proceeded by a
clearing of the interrupt status (as with a reset of the IPR register).
6-46
S3C8245/P8245/C8249/P8249
INSTRUCTION SET
JP— Jump
JP
cc,dst
(Conditional)
JP
dst
(Unconditional)
Operation:
If cc is true, PC ¬ dst
The conditional JUMP instruction transfers program control to the destination address if the
condition specified by the condition code (cc) is true; otherwise, the instruction following the JP
instruction is executed. The unconditional JP simply replaces the contents of the PC with the
contents of the specified register pair. Control then passes to the statement addressed by the PC.
Flags:
No flags are affected.
(1)
Format:
Bytes
Cycles
Opcode
(Hex)
Addr Mode
dst
(2)
cc | opc
dst
3
8
ccD
DA
cc = 0 to F
opc
dst
2
8
30
IRR
NOTES:
1. The 3-byte format is used for a conditional jump and the 2-byte format for an unconditional jump.
2. In the first byte of the three-byte instruction format (conditional jump), the condition code and the
opcode are both four bits.
Examples:
Given: The carry flag (C) = "1", register 00 = 01H, and register 01 = 20H:
JP
JP
C,LABEL_W
@00H
®
®
LABEL_W = 1000H, PC = 1000H
PC = 0120H
The first example shows a conditional JP. Assuming that the carry flag is set to "1", the statement
"JP C,LABEL_W" replaces the contents of the PC with the value 1000H and transfers control to
that location. Had the carry flag not been set, control would then have passed to the statement
immediately following the JP instruction.
The second example shows an unconditional JP. The statement "JP @00" replaces the contents of
the PC with the contents of the register pair 00H and 01H, leaving the value 0120H.
6-47
INSTRUCTION SET
S3C8245/P8245/C8249/P8249
JR— Jump Relative
JR
cc,dst
Operation:
If cc is true, PC ¬ PC + dst
If the condition specified by the condition code (cc) is true, the relative address is added to the
program counter and control passes to the statement whose address is now in the program
counter; otherwise, the instruction following the JR instruction is executed. (See list of condition
codes).
The range of the relative address is +127, –128, and the original value of the program counter is
taken to be the address of the first instruction byte following the JR statement.
Flags:
No flags are affected.
Format:
Bytes
Cycles
Opcode
(Hex)
Addr Mode
dst
(1)
cc | opc
dst
2
6
ccB
RA
cc = 0 to F
NOTE: In the first byte of the two-byte instruction format, the condition code and the opcode are each
four bits.
Example:
Given: The carry flag = "1" and LABEL_X = 1FF7H:
JR
C,LABEL_X
®
PC = 1FF7H
If the carry flag is set (that is, if the condition code is true), the statement "JR C,LABEL_X" will
pass control to the statement whose address is now in the PC. Otherwise, the program instruction
following the JR would be executed.
6-48
S3C8245/P8245/C8249/P8249
INSTRUCTION SET
LD— Load
LD
dst,src
Operation:
dst ¬ src
The contents of the source are loaded into the destination. The source's contents are unaffected.
No flags are affected.
Flags:
Format:
Bytes
Cycles
Opcode
(Hex)
Addr Mode
dst
src
IM
R
dst | opc
src | opc
opc
src
dst
2
4
4
rC
r8
r
r
2
2
3
3
4
r9
R
r
r = 0 to F
dst | src
4
4
C7
D7
r
lr
r
Ir
opc
src
dst
src
6
6
E4
E5
R
R
R
IR
opc
dst
6
6
E6
D6
R
IM
IM
IR
opc
opc
opc
src
dst
x
3
3
3
6
6
6
F5
87
97
IR
r
R
x [r]
r
dst | src
src | dst
x
x [r]
6-49
INSTRUCTION SET
S3C8245/P8245/C8249/P8249
LD— Load
LD
(Continued)
Examples:
Given: R0 = 01H, R1 = 0AH, register 00H = 01H, register 01H = 20H,
register 02H = 02H, LOOP = 30H, and register 3AH = 0FFH:
LD
LD
LD
LD
LD
LD
LD
LD
LD
LD
LD
LD
R0,#10H
R0,01H
®
®
®
®
®
®
®
®
®
®
R0 = 10H
R0 = 20H, register 01H = 20H
01H,R0
Register 01H = 01H, R0 = 01H
R1 = 20H, R0 = 01H
R1,@R0
@R0,R1
R0 = 01H, R1 = 0AH, register 01H = 0AH
Register 00H = 20H, register 01H = 20H
Register 02H = 20H, register 00H = 01H
Register 00H = 0AH
00H,01H
02H,@00H
00H,#0AH
@00H,#10H
@00H,02H
Register 00H = 01H, register 01H = 10H
Register 00H = 01H, register 01H = 02, register 02H = 02H
R0 = 0FFH, R1 = 0AH
R0,#LOOP[R1] ®
#LOOP[R0],R1 ®
Register 31H = 0AH, R0 = 01H, R1 = 0AH
6-50
S3C8245/P8245/C8249/P8249
INSTRUCTION SET
LDB— Load Bit
LDB
dst,src.b
LDB
dst.b,src
Operation:
dst(0) ¬ src(b)
or
dst(b) ¬ src(0)
The specified bit of the source is loaded into bit zero (LSB) of the destination, or bit zero of the
source is loaded into the specified bit of the destination. No other bits of the destination are
affected. The source is unaffected.
Flags:
No flags are affected.
Format:
Bytes
Cycles
Opcode
(Hex)
Addr Mode
dst
src
opc
opc
dst | b | 0
src | b | 1
src
dst
3
6
47
r0
Rb
3
6
47
Rb
r0
NOTE: In the second byte of the instruction formats, the destination (or source) address is four bits, the
bit address 'b' is three bits, and the LSB address value is one bit in length.
Examples:
Given: R0 = 06H and general register 00H = 05H:
LDB
LDB
R0,00H.2
00H.0,R0
®
®
R0 = 07H, register 00H = 05H
R0 = 06H, register 00H = 04H
In the first example, destination working register R0 contains the value 06H and the source general
register 00H the value 05H. The statement "LD R0,00H.2" loads the bit two value of the 00H
register into bit zero of the R0 register, leaving the value 07H in register R0.
In the second example, 00H is the destination register. The statement "LD 00H.0,R0" loads bit
zero of register R0 to the specified bit (bit zero) of the destination register, leaving 04H in general
register 00H.
6-51
INSTRUCTION SET
S3C8245/P8245/C8249/P8249
LDC/LDE — Load Memory
LDC/LDE
dst,src
Operation:
dst ¬ src
This instruction loads a byte from program or data memory into a working register or vice-versa. The
source values are unaffected. LDC refers to program memory and LDE to data memory. The
assembler makes 'Irr' or 'rr' values an even number for program memory and odd an odd number for
data memory.
Flags:
No flags are affected.
Format:
Bytes
Cycles
Opcode
(Hex)
Addr Mode
dst
src
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
opc
opc
opc
opc
opc
dst | src
src | dst
dst | src
src | dst
dst | src
2
10
C3
D3
E7
F7
A7
r
Irr
2
3
3
4
10
12
12
14
Irr
r
XS
XS
XL
r
XS [rr]
r
XS [rr]
r
XL
XL [rr]
L
H
6.
7.
opc
opc
opc
opc
src | dst
dst | 0000
src | 0000
dst | 0001
src | 0001
XL
XL
4
4
4
4
4
14
14
14
14
14
B7
A7
B7
A7
B7
XL [rr]
r
DA
r
L
H
DA
DA
DA
DA
DA
DA
DA
DA
r
L
L
L
L
H
H
H
H
8.
DA
r
9.
DA
r
10.
opc
DA
NOTES:
1. The source (src) or working register pair [rr] for formats 5 and 6 cannot use register pair 0–1.
2. For formats 3 and 4, the destination address 'XS [rr]' and the source address 'XS [rr]' are each one
byte.
3. For formats 5 and 6, the destination address 'XL [rr] and the source address 'XL [rr]' are each two
bytes.
4. The DA and r source values for formats 7 and 8 are used to address program memory; the second
set of values, used in formats 9 and 10, are used to address data memory.
6-52
INSTRUCTION SET
S3C8245/P8245/C8249/P8249
LDC/LDE — Load Memory
LDC/LDE
(Continued)
Examples:
Given: R0 = 11H, R1 = 34H, R2 = 01H, R3 = 04H; Program memory locations
0103H = 4FH, 0104H = 1A, 0105H = 6DH, and 1104H = 88H. External data memory locations
0103H = 5FH, 0104H = 2AH, 0105H = 7DH, and 1104H = 98H:
LDC
R0,@RR2
;
;
R0 ¬ contents of program memory location 0104H
R0 = 1AH, R2 = 01H, R3 = 04H
LDE
R0,@RR2
;
;
R0 ¬ contents of external data memory location 0104H
R0 = 2AH, R2 = 01H, R3 = 04H
(note)
LDC
LDE
LDC
LDE
@RR2,R0
;
;
;
11H (contents of R0) is loaded into program memory
location 0104H (RR2),
working registers R0, R2, R3 ® no change
@RR2,R0
;
;
;
11H (contents of R0) is loaded into external data memory
location 0104H (RR2),
working registers R0, R2, R3 ® no change
R0,#01H[RR2]
R0,#01H[RR2]
;
;
;
R0
¬
contents of program memory location 0105H
(01H + RR2),
R0 = 6DH, R2 = 01H, R3 = 04H
;
;
R0 ¬ contents of external data memory location 0105H
(01H + RR2), R0 = 7DH, R2 = 01H, R3 = 04H
(note)
LDC
LDE
LDC
LDE
#01H[RR2],R0
#01H[RR2],R0
R0,#1000H[RR2]
R0,#1000H[RR2]
;
;
11H (contents of R0) is loaded into program memory location
0105H (01H + 0104H)
;
;
11H (contents of R0) is loaded into external data memory
location 0105H (01H + 0104H)
;
;
R0 ¬ contents of program memory location 1104H
(1000H + 0104H), R0 = 88H, R2 = 01H, R3 = 04H
;
;
R0 ¬ contents of external data memory location 1104H
(1000H + 0104H), R0 = 98H, R2 = 01H, R3 = 04H
LDC
LDE
R0,1104H
R0,1104H
;
R0 ¬ contents of program memory location 1104H, R0 = 88H
;
;
R0 ¬ contents of external data memory location 1104H,
R0 = 98H
(note)
LDC
LDE
1105H,R0
1105H,R0
;
;
11H (contents of R0) is loaded into program memory location
1105H, (1105H) ¬ 11H
;
;
11H (contents of R0) is loaded into external data memory
location 1105H, (1105H) ¬ 11H
NOTE: These instructions are not supported by masked ROM type devices.
6-54
S3C8245/P8245/C8249/P8249
INSTRUCTION SET
LDCD/LDED— Load Memory and Decrement
LDCD/LDED
dst,src
Operation:
dst ¬ src
rr ¬ rr – 1
These instructions are used for user stacks or block transfers of data from program or data memory
to the register file. The address of the memory location is specified by a working register pair. The
contents of the source location are loaded into the destination location. The memory address is
then decremented. The contents of the source are unaffected.
LDCD references program memory and LDED references external data memory. The assembler
makes 'Irr' an even number for program memory and an odd number for data memory.
Flags:
No flags are affected.
Format:
Bytes
Cycles
Opcode
(Hex)
Addr Mode
dst
src
opc
dst | src
2
10
E2
r
Irr
Examples:
Given: R6 = 10H, R7 = 33H, R8 = 12H, program memory location 1033H = 0CDH, and
external data memory location 1033H = 0DDH:
LDCD
R8,@RR6
;
;
;
0CDH (contents of program memory location 1033H) is loaded
into R8 and RR6 is decremented by one
R8 = 0CDH, R6 = 10H, R7 = 32H (RR6 ¬ RR6 – 1)
LDED
R8,@RR6
;
;
;
0DDH (contents of data memory location 1033H) is loaded
into R8 and RR6 is decremented by one (RR6 ¬ RR6 – 1)
R8 = 0DDH, R6 = 10H, R7 = 32H
6-55
INSTRUCTION SET
S3C8245/P8245/C8249/P8249
LDCI/LDEI — Load Memory and Increment
LDCI/LDEI
dst,src
Operation:
dst ¬ src
rr ¬ rr + 1
These instructions are used for user stacks or block transfers of data from program or data memory
to the register file. The address of the memory location is specified by a working register pair. The
contents of the source location are loaded into the destination location. The memory address is
then incremented automatically. The contents of the source are unaffected.
LDCI refers to program memory and LDEI refers to external data memory. The assembler makes 'Irr'
even for program memory and odd for data memory.
Flags:
No flags are affected.
Format:
Bytes
Cycles
Opcode
(Hex)
Addr Mode
dst
src
opc
dst | src
2
10
E3
r
Irr
Examples:
Given: R6 = 10H, R7 = 33H, R8 = 12H, program memory locations 1033H = 0CDH and
1034H = 0C5H; external data memory locations 1033H = 0DDH and 1034H = 0D5H:
LDCI
R8,@RR6
;
;
;
0CDH (contents of program memory location 1033H) is loaded
into R8 and RR6 is incremented by one (RR6 ¬ RR6 + 1)
R8 = 0CDH, R6 = 10H, R7 = 34H
LDEI
R8,@RR6
;
;
;
0DDH (contents of data memory location 1033H) is loaded
into R8 and RR6 is incremented by one (RR6 ¬ RR6 + 1)
R8 = 0DDH, R6 = 10H, R7 = 34H
6-56
S3C8245/P8245/C8249/P8249
INSTRUCTION SET
LDCPD/LDEPD— Load Memory with Pre-Decrement
LDCPD/
LDEPD
dst,src
Operation:
rr ¬ rr – 1
dst ¬ src
These instructions are used for block transfers of data from program or data memory from the
register file. The address of the memory location is specified by a working register pair and is first
decremented. The contents of the source location are then loaded into the destination location. The
contents of the source are unaffected.
LDCPD refers to program memory and LDEPD refers to external data memory. The assembler
makes 'Irr' an even number for program memory and an odd number for external data memory.
Flags:
No flags are affected.
Format:
Bytes
Cycles
Opcode
(Hex)
Addr Mode
dst
src
opc
src | dst
2
14
F2
Irr
r
Examples:
Given: R0 = 77H, R6 = 30H, and R7 = 00H:
LDCPD
@RR6,R0
;
;
;
;
(RR6 ¬ RR6 – 1)
77H (contents of R0) is loaded into program memory location
2FFFH (3000H – 1H)
R0 = 77H, R6 = 2FH, R7 = 0FFH
LDEPD
@RR6,R0
;
;
;
(RR6 ¬ RR6 – 1)
77H (contents of R0) is loaded into external data memory
location 2FFFH (3000H – 1H)
R0 = 77H, R6 = 2FH, R7 = 0FFH
;
6-57
INSTRUCTION SET
S3C8245/P8245/C8249/P8249
LDCPI/LDEPI — Load Memory with Pre-Increment
LDCPI/
LDEPI
dst,src
Operation:
rr ¬ rr + 1
dst ¬ src
These instructions are used for block transfers of data from program or data memory from the
register file. The address of the memory location is specified by a working register pair and is first
incremented. The contents of the source location are loaded into the destination location. The
contents of the source are unaffected.
LDCPI refers to program memory and LDEPI refers to external data memory. The assembler makes
'Irr' an even number for program memory and an odd number for data memory.
Flags:
No flags are affected.
Format:
Bytes
Cycles
Opcode
(Hex)
Addr Mode
dst
src
opc
src | dst
2
14
F3
Irr
r
Examples:
Given: R0 = 7FH, R6 = 21H, and R7 = 0FFH:
LDCPI
@RR6,R0
;
;
;
;
(RR6 ¬ RR6 + 1)
7FH (contents of R0) is loaded into program memory
location 2200H (21FFH + 1H)
R0 = 7FH, R6 = 22H, R7 = 00H
LDEPI
@RR6,R0
;
;
;
;
(RR6 ¬ RR6 + 1)
7FH (contents of R0) is loaded into external data memory
location 2200H (21FFH + 1H)
R0 = 7FH, R6 = 22H, R7 = 00H
6-58
S3C8245/P8245/C8249/P8249
INSTRUCTION SET
LDW — Load Word
LDW
dst,src
Operation:
dst ¬ src
The contents of the source (a word) are loaded into the destination. The contents of the source are
unaffected.
Flags:
No flags are affected.
Format:
Bytes
Cycles
Opcode
(Hex)
Addr Mode
dst
RR
RR
src
RR
IR
opc
opc
src
dst
dst
3
8
8
C4
C5
src
4
8
C6
RR
IML
Examples:
Given: R4 = 06H, R5 = 1CH, R6 = 05H, R7 = 02H, register 00H = 1AH,
register 01H = 02H, register 02H = 03H, and register 03H = 0FH:
LDW
LDW
RR6,RR4
00H,02H
®
®
R6 = 06H, R7 = 1CH, R4 = 06H, R5 = 1CH
Register 00H = 03H, register 01H = 0FH,
register 02H = 03H, register 03H = 0FH
LDW
LDW
LDW
LDW
RR2,@R7
®
®
®
®
R2 = 03H, R3 = 0FH,
04H,@01H
RR6,#1234H
02H,#0FEDH
Register 04H = 03H, register 05H = 0FH
R6 = 12H, R7 = 34H
Register 02H = 0FH, register 03H = 0EDH
In the second example, please note that the statement "LDW 00H,02H" loads the contents of the
source word 02H, 03H into the destination word 00H, 01H. This leaves the value 03H in general
register 00H and the value 0FH in register 01H.
The other examples show how to use the LDW instruction with various addressing modes and
formats.
6-59
INSTRUCTION SET
S3C8245/P8245/C8249/P8249
MULT — Multiply (Unsigned)
MULT
dst,src
Operation:
dst ¬ dst ´ src
The 8-bit destination operand (even register of the register pair) is multiplied by the source operand
(8 bits) and the product (16 bits) is stored in the register pair specified by the destination address.
Both operands are treated as unsigned integers.
Flags:
C: Set if result is > 255; cleared otherwise.
Z: Set if the result is "0"; cleared otherwise.
S: Set if MSB of the result is a "1"; cleared otherwise.
V: Cleared.
D: Unaffected.
H: Unaffected.
Format:
Bytes
Cycles
Opcode
(Hex)
Addr Mode
dst
RR
RR
RR
src
opc
src
dst
3
22
22
22
84
85
86
R
IR
IM
Examples:
Given: Register 00H = 20H, register 01H = 03H, register 02H = 09H, register 03H = 06H:
MULT
MULT
MULT
00H, 02H
®
®
®
Register 00H = 01H, register 01H = 20H, register 02H = 09H
Register 00H = 00H, register 01H = 0C0H
00H, @01H
00H, #30H
Register 00H = 06H, register 01H = 00H
In the first example, the statement "MULT 00H,02H" multiplies the 8-bit destination operand (in the
register 00H of the register pair 00H, 01H) by the source register 02H operand (09H). The 16-bit
product, 0120H, is stored in the register pair 00H, 01H.
6-60
S3C8245/P8245/C8249/P8249
INSTRUCTION SET
NEXT — Next
NEXT
Operation:
PC ¬ @ IP
IP ¬ IP + 2
The NEXT instruction is useful when implementing threaded-code languages. The program memory
word that is pointed to by the instruction pointer is loaded into the program counter. The instruction
pointer is then incremented by two.
Flags:
No flags are affected.
Format:
Bytes
Cycles
Opcode
(Hex)
opc
1
10
0F
Example:
The following diagram shows one example of how to use the NEXT instruction.
Before
After
Data
Address
IP
Data
Address
IP
0043
0120
0045
0130
Address
Data
Address
43 Address H
Data
PC
43 Address H 01
PC
44 Address L 10
45 Address H
44 Address L
45 Address H
120 Next
Memory
130 Routine
Memory
6-61
INSTRUCTION SET
S3C8245/P8245/C8249/P8249
NOP — No Operation
NOP
Operation:
No action is performed when the CPU executes this instruction. Typically, one or more NOPs are
executed in sequence in order to effect a timing delay of variable duration.
Flags:
No flags are affected.
Format:
Bytes
Cycles
Opcode
(Hex)
opc
1
4
FF
Example:
When the instruction
NOP
is encountered in a program, no operation occurs. Instead, there is a delay in instruction execution
time.
6-62
S3C8245/P8245/C8249/P8249
INSTRUCTION SET
OR— Logical OR
OR
dst,src
Operation:
dst ¬ dst OR src
The source operand is logically ORed with the destination operand and the result is stored in the
destination. The contents of the source are unaffected. The OR operation results in a "1" being
stored whenever either of the corresponding bits in the two operands is a "1"; otherwise a "0" is
stored.
Flags:
C: Unaffected.
Z: Set if the result is "0"; cleared otherwise.
S: Set if the result bit 7 is set; cleared otherwise.
V: Always cleared to "0".
D: Unaffected.
H: Unaffected.
Format:
Bytes
Cycles
Opcode
(Hex)
Addr Mode
dst
src
opc
opc
opc
dst | src
src
2
4
6
42
43
r
r
r
lr
dst
src
3
3
6
6
44
45
R
R
R
IR
dst
6
46
R
IM
Examples:
Given: R0 = 15H, R1 = 2AH, R2 = 01H, register 00H = 08H, register 01H = 37H, and
register 08H = 8AH:
OR
OR
OR
OR
OR
R0,R1
®
®
®
®
®
R0 = 3FH, R1 = 2AH
R0,@R2
00H,01H
01H,@00H
00H,#02H
R0 = 37H, R2 = 01H, register 01H = 37H
Register 00H = 3FH, register 01H = 37H
Register 00H = 08H, register 01H = 0BFH
Register 00H = 0AH
In the first example, if working register R0 contains the value 15H and register R1 the value 2AH, the
statement "OR R0,R1" logical-ORs the R0 and R1 register contents and stores the result (3FH) in
destination register R0.
The other examples show the use of the logical OR instruction with the various addressing modes
and formats.
6-63
INSTRUCTION SET
S3C8245/P8245/C8249/P8249
POP — Pop From Stack
POP
dst
Operation:
dst ¬ @SP
SP ¬ SP + 1
The contents of the location addressed by the stack pointer are loaded into the destination. The
stack pointer is then incremented by one.
Flags:
No flags affected.
Format:
Bytes
Cycles
Opcode
(Hex)
Addr Mode
dst
opc
dst
2
8
8
50
51
R
IR
Examples:
Given: Register 00H = 01H, register 01H = 1BH, SPH (0D8H) = 00H, SPL (0D9H) = 0FBH,
and stack register 0FBH = 55H:
POP
POP
00H
®
®
Register 00H = 55H, SP = 00FCH
@00H
Register 00H = 01H, register 01H = 55H, SP = 00FCH
In the first example, general register 00H contains the value 01H. The statement "POP 00H" loads
the contents of location 00FBH (55H) into destination register 00H and then increments the stack
pointer by one. Register 00H then contains the value 55H and the SP points to location 00FCH.
6-64
S3C8245/P8245/C8249/P8249
INSTRUCTION SET
POPUD— Pop User Stack (Decrementing)
POPUD
dst,src
Operation:
dst ¬ src
IR ¬ IR – 1
This instruction is used for user-defined stacks in the register file. The contents of the register file
location addressed by the user stack pointer are loaded into the destination. The user stack pointer
is then decremented.
Flags:
No flags are affected.
Format:
Bytes
Cycles
Opcode
(Hex)
Addr Mode
dst
src
opc
src
dst
3
8
92
R
IR
Example:
Given: Register 00H = 42H (user stack pointer register), register 42H = 6FH, and
register 02H = 70H:
POPUD 02H,@00H
®
Register 00H = 41H, register 02H = 6FH, register 42H = 6FH
If general register 00H contains the value 42H and register 42H the value 6FH, the statement
"POPUD 02H,@00H" loads the contents of register 42H into the destination register 02H. The user
stack pointer is then decremented by one, leaving the value 41H.
6-65
INSTRUCTION SET
S3C8245/P8245/C8249/P8249
POPUI — Pop User Stack (Incrementing)
POPUI
dst,src
Operation:
dst ¬ src
IR ¬ IR + 1
The POPUI instruction is used for user-defined stacks in the register file. The contents of the
register file location addressed by the user stack pointer are loaded into the destination. The user
stack pointer is then incremented.
Flags:
No flags are affected.
Format:
Bytes
Cycles
Opcode
(Hex)
Addr Mode
dst
src
opc
src
dst
3
8
93
R
IR
Example:
Given: Register 00H = 01H and register 01H = 70H:
POPUI 02H,@00H Register 00H = 02H, register 01H = 70H, register 02H = 70H
®
If general register 00H contains the value 01H and register 01H the value 70H, the statement
"POPUI 02H,@00H" loads the value 70H into the destination general register 02H. The user stack
pointer (register 00H) is then incremented by one, changing its value from 01H to 02H.
6-66
S3C8245/P8245/C8249/P8249
INSTRUCTION SET
PUSH— Push To Stack
PUSH
src
Operation:
SP ¬ SP – 1
@SP ¬ src
A PUSH instruction decrements the stack pointer value and loads the contents of the source (src)
into the location addressed by the decremented stack pointer. The operation then adds the new
value to the top of the stack.
Flags:
No flags are affected.
Format:
Bytes
Cycles
Opcode
(Hex)
Addr Mode
dst
opc
src
2
8 (internal clock)
8 (external clock)
70
R
8 (internal clock)
8 (external clock)
71
IR
Examples:
Given: Register 40H = 4FH, register 4FH = 0AAH, SPH = 00H, and SPL = 00H:
PUSH
40H
®
Register 40H = 4FH, stack register 0FFH = 4FH,
SPH = 0FFH, SPL = 0FFH
PUSH
@40H
®
Register 40H = 4FH, register 4FH = 0AAH, stack register
0FFH = 0AAH, SPH = 0FFH, SPL = 0FFH
In the first example, if the stack pointer contains the value 0000H, and general register 40H the
value 4FH, the statement "PUSH 40H" decrements the stack pointer from 0000 to 0FFFFH. It then
loads the contents of register 40H into location 0FFFFH and adds this new value to the top of the
stack.
6-67
INSTRUCTION SET
S3C8245/P8245/C8249/P8249
PUSHUD— Push User Stack (Decrementing)
PUSHUD
dst,src
Operation:
IR ¬ IR – 1
dst ¬ src
This instruction is used to address user-defined stacks in the register file. PUSHUD decrements the
user stack pointer and loads the contents of the source into the register addressed by the
decremented stack pointer.
Flags:
No flags are affected.
Format:
Bytes
Cycles
Opcode
(Hex)
Addr Mode
dst
src
opc
dst
src
3
8
82
IR
R
Example:
Given: Register 00H = 03H, register 01H = 05H, and register 02H = 1AH:
PUSHUD @00H,01H Register 00H = 02H, register 01H = 05H, register 02H = 05H
®
If the user stack pointer (register 00H, for example) contains the value 03H, the statement
"PUSHUD @00H,01H" decrements the user stack pointer by one, leaving the value 02H. The 01H
register value, 05H, is then loaded into the register addressed by the decremented user stack
pointer.
6-68
S3C8245/P8245/C8249/P8249
INSTRUCTION SET
PUSHUI — Push User Stack (Incrementing)
PUSHUI
dst,src
Operation:
IR ¬ IR + 1
dst ¬ src
This instruction is used for user-defined stacks in the register file. PUSHUI increments the user
stack pointer and then loads the contents of the source into the register location addressed by the
incremented user stack pointer.
Flags:
No flags are affected.
Format:
Bytes
Cycles
Opcode
(Hex)
Addr Mode
dst
src
opc
dst
src
3
8
83
IR
R
Example:
Given: Register 00H = 03H, register 01H = 05H, and register 04H = 2AH:
PUSHUI @00H,01H Register 00H = 04H, register 01H = 05H, register 04H = 05H
®
If the user stack pointer (register 00H, for example) contains the value 03H, the statement
"PUSHUI @00H,01H" increments the user stack pointer by one, leaving the value 04H. The 01H
register value, 05H, is then loaded into the location addressed by the incremented user stack
pointer.
6-69
INSTRUCTION SET
S3C8245/P8245/C8249/P8249
RCF — Reset Carry Flag
RCF
RCF
Operation:
C ¬
0
The carry flag is cleared to logic zero, regardless of its previous value.
C: Cleared to "0".
Flags:
No other flags are affected.
Format:
Bytes
Cycles
Opcode
(Hex)
opc
1
4
CF
Example:
Given: C = "1" or "0":
The instruction RCF clears the carry flag (C) to logic zero.
6-70
S3C8245/P8245/C8249/P8249
INSTRUCTION SET
RET — Return
RET
Operation:
PC ¬ @SP
SP ¬ SP + 2
The RET instruction is normally used to return to the previously executing procedure at the end of a
procedure entered by a CALL instruction. The contents of the location addressed by the stack
pointer are popped into the program counter. The next statement that is executed is the one that is
addressed by the new program counter value.
Flags:
No flags are affected.
Format:
Bytes
Cycles
Opcode (Hex)
opc
1
8 (internal stack)
10 (internal stack)
AF
Example:
Given: SP = 00FCH, (SP) = 101AH, and PC = 1234:
RET PC = 101AH, SP = 00FEH
®
The statement "RET" pops the contents of stack pointer location 00FCH (10H) into the high byte of
the program counter. The stack pointer then pops the value in location 00FEH (1AH) into the PC's
low byte and the instruction at location 101AH is executed. The stack pointer now points to
memory location 00FEH.
6-71
INSTRUCTION SET
S3C8245/P8245/C8249/P8249
RL — Rotate Left
RL
dst
Operation:
C ¬ dst (7)
dst (0) ¬ dst (7)
dst (n + 1) ¬ dst (n), n = 0–6
The contents of the destination operand are rotated left one bit position. The initial value of bit 7 is
moved to the bit zero (LSB) position and also replaces the carry flag.
7
0
C
Flags:
C: Set if the bit rotated from the most significant bit position (bit 7) was "1".
Z: Set if the result is "0"; cleared otherwise.
S: Set if the result bit 7 is set; cleared otherwise.
V: Set if arithmetic overflow occurred; cleared otherwise.
D: Unaffected.
H: Unaffected.
Format:
Bytes
Cycles
Opcode
(Hex)
Addr Mode
dst
opc
dst
2
4
4
90
91
R
IR
Examples:
Given: Register 00H = 0AAH, register 01H = 02H and register 02H = 17H:
RL
RL
00H
®
®
Register 00H = 55H, C = "1"
@01H
Register 01H = 02H, register 02H = 2EH, C = "0"
In the first example, if general register 00H contains the value 0AAH (10101010B), the statement
"RL 00H" rotates the 0AAH value left one bit position, leaving the new value 55H (01010101B) and
setting the carry and overflow flags.
6-72
S3C8245/P8245/C8249/P8249
INSTRUCTION SET
RLC— Rotate Left Through Carry
RLC
dst
Operation:
dst (0) ¬
C
C ¬ dst (7)
dst (n + 1) ¬ dst (n), n = 0–6
The contents of the destination operand with the carry flag are rotated left one bit position. The initial
value of bit 7 replaces the carry flag (C); the initial value of the carry flag replaces bit zero.
7
0
C
Flags:
C: Set if the bit rotated from the most significant bit position (bit 7) was "1".
Z: Set if the result is "0"; cleared otherwise.
S: Set if the result bit 7 is set; cleared otherwise.
V: Set if arithmetic overflow occurred, that is, if the sign of the destination changed during rotation;
cleared otherwise.
D: Unaffected.
H: Unaffected.
Format:
Bytes
Cycles
Opcode
(Hex)
Addr Mode
dst
opc
dst
2
4
4
10
11
R
IR
Examples:
Given: Register 00H = 0AAH, register 01H = 02H, and register 02H = 17H, C = "0":
RLC
RLC
00H
®
®
Register 00H = 54H, C = "1"
@01H
Register 01H = 02H, register 02H = 2EH, C = "0"
In the first example, if general register 00H has the value 0AAH (10101010B), the statement "RLC
00H" rotates 0AAH one bit position to the left. The initial value of bit 7 sets the carry flag and the
initial value of the C flag replaces bit zero of register 00H, leaving the value 55H (01010101B). The
MSB of register 00H resets the carry flag to "1" and sets the overflow flag.
6-73
INSTRUCTION SET
S3C8245/P8245/C8249/P8249
RR— Rotate Right
RR
dst
Operation:
C ¬ dst (0)
dst (7) ¬ dst (0)
dst (n) ¬ dst (n + 1), n = 0–6
The contents of the destination operand are rotated right one bit position. The initial value of bit zero
(LSB) is moved to bit 7 (MSB) and also replaces the carry flag (C).
7
0
C
Flags:
C: Set if the bit rotated from the least significant bit position (bit zero) was "1".
Z: Set if the result is "0"; cleared otherwise.
S: Set if the result bit 7 is set; cleared otherwise.
V: Set if arithmetic overflow occurred, that is, if the sign of the destination changed during rotation;
cleared otherwise.
D: Unaffected.
H: Unaffected.
Format:
Bytes
Cycles
Opcode
(Hex)
Addr Mode
dst
opc
dst
2
4
4
E0
E1
R
IR
Examples:
Given: Register 00H = 31H, register 01H = 02H, and register 02H = 17H:
RR
RR
00H
®
®
Register 00H = 98H, C = "1"
@01H
Register 01H = 02H, register 02H = 8BH, C = "1"
In the first example, if general register 00H contains the value 31H (00110001B), the statement "RR
00H" rotates this value one bit position to the right. The initial value of bit zero is moved to bit 7,
leaving the new value 98H (10011000B) in the destination register. The initial bit zero also resets the
C flag to "1" and the sign flag and overflow flag are also set to "1".
6-74
S3C8245/P8245/C8249/P8249
INSTRUCTION SET
RRC— Rotate Right Through Carry
RRC
dst
Operation:
dst (7) ¬
C
C ¬ dst (0)
dst (n) ¬ dst (n + 1), n = 0–6
The contents of the destination operand and the carry flag are rotated right one bit position. The
initial value of bit zero (LSB) replaces the carry flag; the initial value of the carry flag replaces bit 7
(MSB).
7
0
C
Flags:
C: Set if the bit rotated from the least significant bit position (bit zero) was "1".
Z: Set if the result is "0" cleared otherwise.
S: Set if the result bit 7 is set; cleared otherwise.
V: Set if arithmetic overflow occurred, that is, if the sign of the destination changed during rotation;
cleared otherwise.
D: Unaffected.
H: Unaffected.
Format:
Bytes
Cycles
Opcode
(Hex)
Addr Mode
dst
opc
dst
2
4
4
C0
C1
R
IR
Examples:
Given: Register 00H = 55H, register 01H = 02H, register 02H = 17H, and C = "0":
RRC
RRC
00H
®
®
Register 00H = 2AH, C = "1"
@01H
Register 01H = 02H, register 02H = 0BH, C = "1"
In the first example, if general register 00H contains the value 55H (01010101B), the statement
"RRC 00H" rotates this value one bit position to the right. The initial value of bit zero ("1") replaces
the carry flag and the initial value of the C flag ("1") replaces bit 7. This leaves the new value 2AH
(00101010B) in destination register 00H. The sign flag and overflow flag are both cleared to "0".
6-75
INSTRUCTION SET
S3C8245/P8245/C8249/P8249
SB0— Select Bank 0
SB0
Operation:
BANK ¬
0
The SB0 instruction clears the bank address flag in the FLAGS register (FLAGS.0) to logic zero,
selecting bank 0 register addressing in the set 1 area of the register file.
Flags:
No flags are affected.
Format:
Bytes
Cycles
Opcode
(Hex)
opc
1
4
4F
Example:
The statement
SB0
clears FLAGS.0 to "0", selecting bank 0 register addressing.
6-76
S3C8245/P8245/C8249/P8249
INSTRUCTION SET
SB1— Select Bank 1
SB1
Operation:
BANK ¬ 1
The SB1 instruction sets the bank address flag in the FLAGS register (FLAGS.0) to logic one,
selecting bank 1 register addressing in the set 1 area of the register file. (Bank 1 is not
implemented in some S3C8-series microcontrollers.)
Flags:
No flags are affected.
Format:
Bytes
Cycles
Opcode
(Hex)
opc
1
4
5F
Example:
The statement
SB1
sets FLAGS.0 to "1", selecting bank 1 register addressing, if implemented.
6-77
INSTRUCTION SET
S3C8245/P8245/C8249/P8249
SBC— Subtract with Carry
SBC
dst,src
Operation:
dst ¬ dst – src – c
The source operand, along with the current value of the carry flag, is subtracted from the destination
operand and the result is stored in the destination. The contents of the source are unaffected.
Subtraction is performed by adding the two's-complement of the source operand to the destination
operand. In multiple precision arithmetic, this instruction permits the carry ("borrow") from the
subtraction of the low-order operands to be subtracted from the subtraction of high-order operands.
Flags:
C: Set if a borrow occurred (src > dst); cleared otherwise.
Z: Set if the result is "0"; cleared otherwise.
S: Set if the result is negative; cleared otherwise.
V: Set if arithmetic overflow occurred, that is, if the operands were of opposite sign and the sign of
the result is the same as the sign of the source; cleared otherwise.
D: Always set to "1".
H: Cleared if there is a carry from the most significant bit of the low-order four bits of the result; set
otherwise, indicating a "borrow".
Format:
Bytes
Cycles
Opcode
(Hex)
Addr Mode
dst
src
opc
opc
opc
dst | src
src
2
4
6
32
33
r
r
r
lr
dst
src
3
3
6
6
34
35
R
R
R
IR
dst
6
36
R
IM
Examples:
Given: R1 = 10H, R2 = 03H, C = "1", register 01H = 20H, register 02H = 03H, and register
03H = 0AH:
SBC
SBC
SBC
SBC
SBC
R1,R2
®
®
®
®
®
R1 = 0CH, R2 = 03H
R1,@R2
01H,02H
01H,@02H
01H,#8AH
R1 = 05H, R2 = 03H, register 03H = 0AH
Register 01H = 1CH, register 02H = 03H
Register 01H = 15H,register 02H = 03H, register 03H = 0AH
Register 01H = 95H; C, S, and V = "1"
In the first example, if working register R1 contains the value 10H and register R2 the value 03H, the
statement "SBC R1,R2" subtracts the source value (03H) and the C flag value ("1") from the
destination (10H) and then stores the result (0CH) in register R1.
6-78
S3C8245/P8245/C8249/P8249
INSTRUCTION SET
SCF — Set Carry Flag
SCF
Operation:
Flags:
C ¬
1
The carry flag (C) is set to logic one, regardless of its previous value.
C: Set to "1".
No other flags are affected.
Format:
Bytes
Cycles
Opcode
(Hex)
opc
1
4
DF
Example:
The statement
SCF
sets the carry flag to logic one.
6-79
INSTRUCTION SET
S3C8245/P8245/C8249/P8249
SRA— Shift Right Arithmetic
SRA
dst
Operation:
dst (7) ¬ dst (7)
C ¬ dst (0)
dst (n) ¬ dst (n + 1), n = 0–6
An arithmetic shift-right of one bit position is performed on the destination operand. Bit zero (the
LSB) replaces the carry flag. The value of bit 7 (the sign bit) is unchanged and is shifted into bit
position 6.
7
6
0
C
Flags:
C: Set if the bit shifted from the LSB position (bit zero) was "1".
Z: Set if the result is "0"; cleared otherwise.
S: Set if the result is negative; cleared otherwise.
V: Always cleared to "0".
D: Unaffected.
H: Unaffected.
Format:
Bytes
Cycles
Opcode
(Hex)
Addr Mode
dst
opc
dst
2
4
4
D0
D1
R
IR
Examples:
Given: Register 00H = 9AH, register 02H = 03H, register 03H = 0BCH, and C = "1":
SRA
SRA
00H
®
®
Register 00H = 0CD, C = "0"
@02H
Register 02H = 03H, register 03H = 0DEH, C = "0"
In the first example, if general register 00H contains the value 9AH (10011010B), the statement
"SRA 00H" shifts the bit values in register 00H right one bit position. Bit zero ("0") clears the C flag
and bit 7 ("1") is then shifted into the bit 6 position (bit 7 remains unchanged). This leaves the value
0CDH (11001101B) in destination register 00H.
6-80
S3C8245/P8245/C8249/P8249
INSTRUCTION SET
SRP/SRP0/SRP1— Set Register Pointer
SRP
src
src
src
SRP0
SRP1
Operation:
If src (1) = 1 and src (0) = 0 then: RP0 (3–7)
¬
¬
¬
¬
¬
¬
src (3–7)
src (3–7)
src (4–7),
0
If src (1) = 0 and src (0) = 1 then: RP1 (3–7)
If src (1) = 0 and src (0) = 0 then: RP0 (4–7)
RP0 (3)
RP1 (4–7)
RP1 (3)
src (4–7),
1
The source data bits one and zero (LSB) determine whether to write one or both of the register
pointers, RP0 and RP1. Bits 3–7 of the selected register pointer are written unless both register
pointers are selected. RP0.3 is then cleared to logic zero and RP1.3 is set to logic one.
Flags:
No flags are affected.
Format:
Bytes
Cycles
Opcode
(Hex)
Addr Mode
src
opc
src
2
4
31
IM
Examples:
The statement
SRP #40H
sets register pointer 0 (RP0) at location 0D6H to 40H and register pointer 1 (RP1) at location 0D7H
to 48H.
The statement "SRP0 #50H" sets RP0 to 50H, and the statement "SRP1 #68H" sets RP1 to 68H.
6-81
INSTRUCTION SET
S3C8245/P8245/C8249/P8249
STOP — Stop Operation
STOP
Operation:
The STOP instruction stops the both the CPU clock and system clock and causes the
microcontroller to enter Stop mode. During Stop mode, the contents of on-chip CPU registers,
peripheral registers, and I/O port control and data registers are retained. Stop mode can be released
by an external reset operation or by external interrupts. For the reset operation, the RESET pin
must be held to Low level until the required oscillation stabilization interval has elapsed.
Flags:
No flags are affected.
Format:
Bytes
Cycles
Opcode
(Hex)
Addr Mode
dst
src
opc
1
4
7F
–
–
Example:
The statement
STOP
halts all microcontroller operations.
6-82
S3C8245/P8245/C8249/P8249
INSTRUCTION SET
SUB— Subtract
SUB
dst,src
Operation:
dst ¬ dst – src
The source operand is subtracted from the destination operand and the result is stored in the
destination. The contents of the source are unaffected. Subtraction is performed by adding the two's
complement of the source operand to the destination operand.
Flags:
C: Set if a "borrow" occurred; cleared otherwise.
Z: Set if the result is "0"; cleared otherwise.
S: Set if the result is negative; cleared otherwise.
V: Set if arithmetic overflow occurred, that is, if the operands were of opposite signs and the sign
of the result is of the same as the sign of the source operand; cleared otherwise.
D: Always set to "1".
H: Cleared if there is a carry from the most significant bit of the low-order four bits of the result; set
otherwise indicating a "borrow".
Format:
Bytes
Cycles
Opcode
(Hex)
Addr Mode
dst
src
opc
dst |
src
2
4
6
22
r
r
23
r
lr
opc
opc
src
dst
dst
src
3
3
6
6
24
25
R
R
R
IR
6
26
R
IM
Examples:
Given: R1 = 12H, R2 = 03H, register 01H = 21H, register 02H = 03H, register 03H = 0AH:
SUB
SUB
SUB
SUB
SUB
SUB
R1,R2
®
®
®
®
®
®
R1 = 0FH, R2 = 03H
R1,@R2
01H,02H
01H,@02H
01H,#90H
01H,#65H
R1 = 08H, R2 = 03H
Register 01H = 1EH, register 02H = 03H
Register 01H = 17H, register 02H = 03H
Register 01H = 91H; C, S, and V = "1"
Register 01H = 0BCH; C and S = "1", V = "0"
In the first example, if working register R1 contains the value 12H and if register R2 contains the
value 03H, the statement "SUB R1,R2" subtracts the source value (03H) from the destination value
(12H) and stores the result (0FH) in destination register R1.
6-83
INSTRUCTION SET
S3C8245/P8245/C8249/P8249
SWAP— Swap Nibbles
SWAP
dst
Operation:
dst (0 – 3) « dst (4 – 7)
The contents of the lower four bits and upper four bits of the destination operand are swapped.
7
4 3
0
Flags:
C: Undefined.
Z: Set if the result is "0"; cleared otherwise.
S: Set if the result bit 7 is set; cleared otherwise.
V: Undefined.
D: Unaffected.
H: Unaffected.
Format:
Bytes
Cycles
Opcode
(Hex)
Addr Mode
dst
opc
dst
2
4
4
F0
F1
R
IR
Examples:
Given: Register 00H = 3EH, register 02H = 03H, and register 03H = 0A4H:
SWAP
SWAP
00H
®
®
Register 00H = 0E3H
@02H
Register 02H = 03H, register 03H = 4AH
In the first example, if general register 00H contains the value 3EH (00111110B), the statement
"SWAP 00H" swaps the lower and upper four bits (nibbles) in the 00H register, leaving the value
0E3H (11100011B).
6-84
S3C8245/P8245/C8249/P8249
INSTRUCTION SET
TCM — Test Complement Under Mask
TCM
dst,src
Operation:
(NOT dst) AND src
This instruction tests selected bits in the destination operand for a logic one value. The bits to be
tested are specified by setting a "1" bit in the corresponding position of the source operand (mask).
The TCM statement complements the destination operand, which is then ANDed with the source
mask. The zero (Z) flag can then be checked to determine the result. The destination and source
operands are unaffected.
Flags:
C: Unaffected.
Z: Set if the result is "0"; cleared otherwise.
S: Set if the result bit 7 is set; cleared otherwise.
V: Always cleared to "0".
D: Unaffected.
H: Unaffected.
Format:
Bytes
Cycles
Opcode
(Hex)
Addr Mode
dst
src
opc
opc
opc
dst | src
src
2
4
6
62
63
r
r
r
lr
dst
src
3
3
6
6
64
65
R
R
R
IR
dst
6
66
R
IM
Examples:
Given: R0 = 0C7H, R1 = 02H, R2 = 12H, register 00H = 2BH, register 01H = 02H, and
register 02H = 23H:
TCM
TCM
TCM
TCM
R0,R1
®
®
®
®
R0 = 0C7H, R1 = 02H, Z = "1"
R0,@R1
00H,01H
00H,@01H
R0 = 0C7H, R1 = 02H, register 02H = 23H, Z = "0"
Register 00H = 2BH, register 01H = 02H, Z = "1"
Register 00H = 2BH, register 01H = 02H,
register 02H = 23H, Z = "1"
TCM
00H,#34
®
Register 00H = 2BH, Z = "0"
In the first example, if working register R0 contains the value 0C7H (11000111B) and register R1 the
value 02H (00000010B), the statement "TCM R0,R1" tests bit one in the destination register for a
"1" value. Because the mask value corresponds to the test bit, the Z flag is set to logic one and can
be tested to determine the result of the TCM operation.
6-85
INSTRUCTION SET
S3C8245/P8245/C8249/P8249
TM — Test Under Mask
TM
dst,src
Operation:
dst AND src
This instruction tests selected bits in the destination operand for a logic zero value. The bits to be
tested are specified by setting a "1" bit in the corresponding position of the source operand (mask),
which is ANDed with the destination operand. The zero (Z) flag can then be checked to determine
the result. The destination and source operands are unaffected.
Flags:
C: Unaffected.
Z: Set if the result is "0"; cleared otherwise.
S: Set if the result bit 7 is set; cleared otherwise.
V: Always reset to "0".
D: Unaffected.
H: Unaffected.
Format:
Bytes
Cycles
Opcode
(Hex)
Addr Mode
dst
src
opc
opc
opc
dst | src
src
2
4
6
72
73
r
r
r
lr
dst
src
3
3
6
6
74
75
R
R
R
IR
dst
6
76
R
IM
Examples:
Given: R0 = 0C7H, R1 = 02H, R2 = 18H, register 00H = 2BH, register 01H = 02H, and
register 02H = 23H:
TM
TM
TM
TM
R0,R1
®
®
®
®
R0 = 0C7H, R1 = 02H, Z = "0"
R0,@R1
00H,01H
00H,@01H
R0 = 0C7H, R1 = 02H, register 02H = 23H, Z = "0"
Register 00H = 2BH, register 01H = 02H, Z = "0"
Register 00H = 2BH, register 01H = 02H,
register 02H = 23H, Z = "0"
TM
00H,#54H
®
Register 00H = 2BH, Z = "1"
In the first example, if working register R0 contains the value 0C7H (11000111B) and register R1 the
value 02H (00000010B), the statement "TM R0,R1" tests bit one in the destination register for a "0"
value. Because the mask value does not match the test bit, the Z flag is cleared to logic zero and
can be tested to determine the result of the TM operation.
6-86
S3C8245/P8245/C8249/P8249
INSTRUCTION SET
WFI — Wait for Interrupt
WFI
Operation:
The CPU is effectively halted until an interrupt occurs, except that DMA transfers can still take
place during this wait state. The WFI status can be released by an internal interrupt, including a fast
interrupt .
Flags:
No flags are affected.
Format:
Bytes
Cycles
Opcode
(Hex)
opc
1
4n
3F
( n = 1, 2, 3, … )
Example:
The following sample program structure shows the sequence of operations that follow a "WFI"
statement:
Main program
.
.
.
EI
WFI
(Enable global interrupt)
(Wait for interrupt)
(Next instruction)
.
.
.
Interrupt occurs
Interrupt service routine
.
.
.
Clear interrupt flag
IRET
Service routine completed
6-87
INSTRUCTION SET
S3C8245/P8245/C8249/P8249
XOR— Logical Exclusive OR
XOR
dst,src
Operation:
dst ¬ dst XOR src
The source operand is logically exclusive-ORed with the destination operand and the result is stored
in the destination. The exclusive-OR operation results in a "1" bit being stored whenever the
corresponding bits in the operands are different; otherwise, a "0" bit is stored.
Flags:
C: Unaffected.
Z: Set if the result is "0"; cleared otherwise.
S: Set if the result bit 7 is set; cleared otherwise.
V: Always reset to "0".
D: Unaffected.
H: Unaffected.
Format:
Bytes
Cycles
Opcode
(Hex)
Addr Mode
dst
src
opc
opc
opc
dst | src
src
2
4
6
B2
B3
r
r
r
lr
dst
src
3
3
6
6
B4
B5
R
R
R
IR
dst
6
B6
R
IM
Examples:
Given: R0 = 0C7H, R1 = 02H, R2 = 18H, register 00H = 2BH, register 01H = 02H, and
register 02H = 23H:
XOR
XOR
XOR
XOR
XOR
R0,R1
®
®
®
®
®
R0 = 0C5H, R1 = 02H
R0,@R1
00H,01H
00H,@01H
00H,#54H
R0 = 0E4H, R1 = 02H, register 02H = 23H
Register 00H = 29H, register 01H = 02H
Register 00H = 08H, register 01H = 02H, register 02H = 23H
Register 00H = 7FH
In the first example, if working register R0 contains the value 0C7H and if register R1 contains the
value 02H, the statement "XOR R0,R1" logically exclusive-ORs the R1 value with the R0 value and
stores the result (0C5H) in the destination register R0.
6-88
S3C8245/P8245/C8249/P8249
CLOCK CIRCUIT
7
CLOCK CIRCUIT
OVERVIEW
The clock frequency generated for the S3C8245/C8249 by an external crystal can range from 1 MHz to 10 MHz. The
maximum CPU clock frequency is 10 MHz. The X and X pins connect the external oscillator or clock source to
IN
OUT
the on-chip clock circuit.
SYSTEM CLOCK CIRCUIT
The system clock circuit has the following components:
— External crystal or ceramic resonator oscillation source (or an external clock source)
— Oscillator stop and wake-up functions
— Programmable frequency divider for the CPU clock (fxx divided by 1, 2, 8, or 16)
— System clock control register, CLKCON
— Oscillator control register, OSCCON and STOP control register, STPCON
C1
C2
XIN
X
IN
S3C8245/C8249
S3C8245/C8249
XOUT
X
OUT
Figure 7-2. Main Oscillator Circuit
(RC Oscillator)
Figure 7-1. Main Oscillator Circuit
(Crystal or Ceramic Oscillator)
7-1
CLOCK CIRCUIT
S3C8245/P8245/C8249/P8249
CLOCK STATUS DURING POWER-DOWN MODES
The two power-down modes, Stop mode and Idle mode, affect the system clock as follows:
— In Stop mode, the main oscillator is halted. Stop mode is released, and the oscillator is started, by a reset
operation or an external interrupt (with RC delay noise filter), and can be released by internal interrupt too when
the sub-system oscillator is running and watch timer is operating with sub-system clock.
— In Idle mode, the internal clock signal is gated to the CPU, but not to interrupt structure, timers and timer/
counters. Idle mode is released by a reset or by an external or internal interrupt.
Stop Release
INT
Driving Ability
OSCCON.4
Main-System
Oscillator
Circuit
Sub-system
Oscillator
Circuit
fx
fxt
Watch Timer
Selector 1
fxx
Stop
OSCCON.3
OSCCON.0
Stop
OSCCON.2
Basic Timer
Timer/Counter
1/8-1/4096
STOP OSC
inst.
Watch Timer (fxx/128)
LCD Controller
SIO
Frequency
Dividing
Circuit
STPCON
1/1 1/2 1/8 1/16
A/D Converter
System Clock
CLKCON.4-.3
Selector 2
CPU Clock
IDLE Instruction
Figure 7-3. System Clock Circuit Diagram
7-2
S3C8245/P8245/C8249/P8249
CLOCK CIRCUIT
SYSTEM CLOCK CONTROL REGISTER (CLKCON)
The system clock control register, CLKCON, is located in the bank 0 of set 1, address D4H. It is read/write
addressable and has the following functions:
— Oscillator frequency divide-by value
After the main oscillator is activated, and the fxx/16 (the slowest clock speed) is selected as the CPU clock. If
necessary, you can then increase the CPU clock speed fxx/8, fxx/2, or fxx/1.
System Clock Control Register (CLKCON)
D4H, Set 1, R/W
MSB
.7
.6
.5
.4
.3
.2
.1
.0
LSB
Not used (must keep always 0)
Not used (must keep always 0)
Divide-by selection bits for
CPU clock frequency:
00 = fXX/16
01 = fXX/8
10 = fXX/2
11 = fXX/1 (non-divided)
NOTE:
The fxx can be generated by both main-system and
sub-system oscillator therefore while main-system
stops peripherals can be operated by sub-system.
Figure 7-4. System Clock Control Register (CLKCON)
7-3
CLOCK CIRCUIT
S3C8245/P8245/C8249/P8249
Oscillator Control Register (OSCCON)
F3H, Set 1, bank 0, R/W
MSB
.7
.6
.5
.4
.3
.2
.1
.0
LSB
Not used
Not used
System clock selection bit:
0 = Main oscillator select
1 = Subsystem oscillator select
Subsystem oscillator driving
ability control bit:
0 = Strong driving ability
Subsystem oscillator control bit:
0 = Subsystem oscillator RUN
1 = Subsystem oscillator STOP
1 = Normal driving ability
Mainsystem oscillator control bit:
0 = Mainsystem oscillator RUN
1 = Mainsystem oscillator STOP
NOTE:
In strong mode the warm-up time is less than 100 ms.
When the CPU is operated with fxt (sub-oscillation clock), it is possible to use the stop
instruction but in this case before using stop instruction, you must select fxx/128 for basic
timer counter clock input.
Then the oscillation stabilization time is 62.5 ((1/32768) x 128 x 16) ms + 100 ms
Here the warm-up time is from the time that the stop release signal activates to the time
that basic timer starts counting.
Figure 7-5. Oscillator Control Register (OSCCON)
STOP Control Register (STPCON)
F4H, Set 1,bank 0, R/W
MSB
.7
.6
.5
.4
.3
.2
.1
.0
LSB
STOP Control bits:
Other values = Disable STOP instruction
10100101 = Enable STOP instruction
Figure 7-6. STOP Control Register (STPCON)
7-4
S3C8245/P8245/C8249/P8249
nRESET and POWER-DOWN
8
nRESET and POWER-DOWN
SYSTEM nRESET
OVERVIEW
During a power-on reset, the voltage at V goes to High level and the nRESET pin is forced to Low level. The
DD
nRESET signal is input through a schmitt trigger circuit where it is then synchronized with the CPU clock. This
procedure brings the S3C8245/C8249 into a known operating status.
To allow time for internal CPU clock oscillation to stabilize, the nRESET pin must be held to Low level for a minimum
time interval after the power supply comes within tolerance. The minimum required time of a reset operation for
oscillation stabilization is 1 millisecond.
Whenever a reset occurs during normal operation (that is, when both V and nRESET are High level), the nRESET
DD
pin is forced Low level and the reset operation starts. All system and peripheral control registers are then reset to
their default hardware values
In summary, the following sequence of events occurs during a reset operation:
— All interrupt is disabled.
— The watchdog function (basic timer) is enabled.
— Ports 0-3 and set to input mode.
— Peripheral control and data register settings are disabled and reset to their default hardware values.
— The program counter (PC) is loaded with the program reset address in the ROM, 0100H.
— When the programmed oscillation stabilization time interval has elapsed, the instruction stored in ROM location
0100H (and 0101H) is fetched and executed.
NORMAL MODE nRESET OPERATION
In normal (masked ROM) mode, the Test pin is tied to V . A reset enables access to the 16-Kbyte on-chip ROM.
SS
(The external interface is not automatically configured).
NOTE
To program the duration of the oscillation stabilization interval, you make the appropriate settings to the
basic timer control register, BTCON, before entering Stop mode. Also, if you do not want to use the basic
timer watchdog function (which causes a system reset if a basic timer counter overflow occurs), you can
disable it by writing "1010B" to the upper nibble of BTCON.
8-1
nRESET and POWER-DOWN
S3C8245/P8245/C8249/P8249
HARDWARE nRESET VALUES
Table 8-1, 8-2, 8-3 list the reset values for CPU and system registers, peripheral control registers, and peripheral
data registers following a reset operation. The following notation is used to represent reset values:
— A "1" or a "0" shows the reset bit value as logic one or logic zero, respectively.
— An "x" means that the bit value is undefined after a reset.
— A dash ("–") means that the bit is either not used or not mapped, but read 0 is the bit value.
Table 8-1. S3C8245/C8249 Set 1 Register and Values after nRESET
Register Name
Mnemonic
Address
Dec
Bit Values after nRESET
Hex
D0H
D1H
D2H
D3H
D4H
D5H
D6H
D7H
D8H
D9H
DAH
DBH
DCH
DDH
DEH
DFH
7
0
0
–
0
0
x
1
1
x
x
x
x
0
x
0
0
6
0
0
–
0
0
x
1
1
x
x
x
x
0
x
–
0
5
0
0
–
0
0
x
0
0
x
x
x
x
0
x
–
0
4
0
0
–
0
0
x
0
0
x
x
x
x
0
x
x
0
3
0
0
–
0
0
x
0
1
x
x
x
x
0
x
x
0
2
0
0
0
0
0
x
–
–
x
x
x
x
0
x
x
0
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
–
–
x
x
x
x
0
x
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
–
–
x
x
x
x
0
x
0
0
LCD Control Register
LCON
LMOD
INTPND
BTCON
CLKCON
FLAGS
RP0
208
209
210
211
212
213
214
215
216
217
218
219
220
221
222
223
LCD Mode Register
Interrupt Pending Register
Basic Timer Control Register
Clock Control Register
System Flags Register
Register Pointer (High Byte)
Register Pointer (Low Byte)
Stack Pointer (High Byte)
Stack Pointer (Low Byte)
Instruction Pointer (High Byte)
Instruction Pointer (Low Byte)
Interrupt Request Register
Interrupt Mask Register
System Mode Register
RP1
SPH
SPL
IPH
IPL
IRQ
IMR
SYM
Register Page Pointer
PP
8-2
S3C8245/P8245/C8249/P8249
nRESET and POWER-DOWN
Table 8-2. S3C8245/C8249 Set 1, Bank 0 Register Values after nRESET
Register Name
Mnemonic
Address
Dec
Bit Values after nRESET
Hex
E0H
E1H
E2H
E3H
E4H
E5H
E6H
E7H
E8H
E9H
EAH
EBH
ECH
EDH
EEH
EFH
F0H
F1H
F2H
F3H
F4H
F5H
F6H
F7H
F8H
F9H
FAH
FBH
7
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
1
0
0
0
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
–
0
0
6
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
1
0
0
0
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
–
0
0
5
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
1
0
0
0
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
–
0
0
4
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
1
0
0
0
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
3
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
1
0
0
0
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
2
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
1
0
0
0
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
1
0
0
0
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
1
0
0
0
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Port 0 Control High Register
Port 0 Control Low Register
Port 0 interrupt Control Register
Port 0 interrupt Pending Register
Port 1 Control High Register
Port 1 Control Low Register
Port 2 Control High Register
Port 2 Control Low Register
Port 3 Control High Register
Port 3 Control Low Register
Timer B Data Register (High Byte)
Timer B Data Register (Low Byte)
Timer B Control Register
Timer A Control Register
Timer A Counter Register
Timer A Data Register
P0CONH
P0CONL
P0INT
224
225
226
227
228
229
230
231
232
233
234
235
236
237
238
239
240
241
242
243
244
245
246
247
248
249
250
251
P0PND
P1CONH
P1CONL
P2CONH
P2CONL
P3CONH
P3CONL
TBDATAH
TBDATAL
TBCON
TACON
TACNT
TADATA
SIOCON
SIODATA
SIOPS
OSCCON
STPCON
P1PUP
P0
Serial I/O Control Register
Serial I/O Data Register
Serial I/O Pre-scale Register
Oscillator Control Register
STOP Control Register
Port 1 Pull-up Control Register
Port 0 Data Register
Port 1 Data Register
P1
Port 2 Data Register
P2
Port 3 Data Register
P3
Port 4 Data Register
P4
Port 5 Data Register
P5
Location FCH is factory use only.
Basic Timer Data Register
External Memory Timing Register
Interrupt Priority Register
BTCNT
EMT
253
254
255
FDH
FEH
FFH
0
0
x
0
–
x
0
–
x
0
–
x
0
–
x
0
–
x
0
–
x
0
–
x
IPR
8-3
nRESET and POWER-DOWN
S3C8245/P8245/C8249/P8249
Table 8-3. S3C8245/P8245 Set 1, Bank 1 Register Values after nRESET
Register Name
Mnemonic
Address
Bit Values after nRESET
Dec
Hex
ECH
EDH
EEH
EFH
7
0
0
0
0
6
0
0
0
0
5
0
0
0
0
4
0
0
0
0
3
0
0
0
0
2
0
0
0
0
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Port 4 control High register
Port 4 control Low register
Port 5 Control High Register
Port 5 Control Low Register
P4CONH
P4CONL
P5CONH
P5CONL
236
237
238
239
Locations F0H is factory use only.
Timer 0 Control Register
T0CON
T0CNTH
241
242
243
244
245
246
247
248
F1H
F2H
F3H
F4H
F5H
F6H
F7H
F8H
0
0
0
1
1
0
–
x
0
0
0
1
1
0
0
x
0
0
0
1
1
0
0
x
–
0
0
1
1
0
0
x
0
0
0
1
1
0
0
x
0
0
0
1
1
0
0
x
0
0
0
1
1
0
0
x
0
0
0
1
1
0
0
x
Timer 0 Counter Register (High Byte)
Timer 0 Counter Register (Low Byte)
Timer 0 Data Register (High Byte)
Timer 0 Data Register (Low Byte)
Voltage Level Detector Control Register
AD Converter Control Register
T0CNTL
T0DATAH
T0DATAL
VLDCON
ADCON
AD Converter Data Register
(High Byte)
ADDATAH
AD Converter Data Register
(Low Byte)
ADDATAL
249
F9H
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
Watch Timer Control Register
Timer 1 Control Register
WTCON
T1CON
250
251
252
253
254
255
FAH
FBH
FCH
FDH
FEH
FFH
0
0
0
0
1
1
0
0
0
0
1
1
0
0
0
0
1
1
0
0
0
0
1
1
0
0
0
0
1
1
0
0
0
0
1
1
0
0
0
0
1
1
0
0
0
0
1
1
Timer 1 Counter Register (High Byte)
Timer 1 Counter Register (Low Byte)
Timer 1 Data Register (High Byte)
Timer 1 Data Register (Low Byte)
T1CNTH
T1CNTL
T1DATAH
T1DATAL
8-4
S3C8245/P8245/C8249/P8249
nRESET and POWER-DOWN
POWER-DOWN MODES
STOP MODE
Stop mode is invoked by the instruction STOP (opcode 7FH). In Stop mode, the operation of the CPU and all
peripherals is halted. That is, the on-chip main oscillator stops and the supply current is reduced to less than
3 mA. All system functions stop when the clock “freezes”, but data stored in the internal register file is retained. Stop
mode can be released in one of two ways: by a reset or by interrupts, for more details see Figure 7-3.
NOTE
Do not use stop mode if you are using an external clock source because X input must be restricted
IN
internally to V to reduce current leakage.
SS
Using nRESET to Release Stop Mode
Stop mode is released when the nRESET signal is released and returns to high level: all system and peripheral
control registers are reset to their default hardware values and the contents of all data registers are retained. A reset
operation automatically selects a slow clock fxx/16 because CLKCON.3 and CLKCON.4 are cleared to
‘00B’. After the programmed oscillation stabilization interval has elapsed, the CPU starts the system initialization
routine by fetching the program instruction stored in ROM location 0100H (and 0101H)
Using an External Interrupt to Release Stop Mode
External interrupts with an RC-delay noise filter circuit can be used to release Stop mode. Which interrupt you can
use to release Stop mode in a given situation depends on the microcontroller’s current internal operating mode. The
external interrupts in the S3C8245/C8249 interrupt structure that can be used to release Stop mode are:
— External interrupts P0.0–P0.7 (INT0–INT7)
Please note the following conditions for Stop mode release:
— If you release Stop mode using an external interrupt, the current values in system and peripheral control
registers are unchanged except STPCON register.
— If you use an internal or external interrupt for stop mode release, you can also program the duration of the
oscillation stabilization interval. To do this, you must make the appropriate control and clock settings before
entering stop mode.
— When the Stop mode is released by external interrupt, the CLKCON.4 and CLKCON.3 bit-pair setting remains
unchanged and the currently selected clock value is used.
— The external interrupt is serviced when the Stop mode release occurs. Following the IRET from the service
routine, the instruction immediately following the one that initiated Stop mode is executed.
Using an Internal Interrupt to Release Stop Mode
Activate any enabled interrupt, causing stop mode to be released. Other things are same as using external interrupt.
How to Enter into Stop Mode
There are two ways to enter into Stop mode:
1. Handling OSCCON register.
2. Handling STPCON register then writing Stop instruction (keep the order).
8-5
nRESET and POWER-DOWN
IDLE MODE
S3C8245/P8245/C8249/P8249
Idle mode is invoked by the instruction IDLE (opcode 6FH). In idle mode, CPU operations are halted while some
peripherals remain active. During idle mode, the internal clock signal is gated away from the CPU, but all peripherals
timers remain active. Port pins retain the mode (input or output) they had at the time idle mode was entered.
There are two ways to release idle mode:
1. Execute a reset. All system and peripheral control registers are reset to their default values and the contents of
all data registers are retained. The reset automatically selects the slow clock fxx/16 because CLKCON.4 and
CLKCON.3 are cleared to ‘00B’. If interrupts are masked, a reset is the only way to release idle mode.
2. Activate any enabled interrupt, causing idle mode to be released. When you use an interrupt to release idle
mode, the CLKCON.4 and CLKCON.3 register values remain unchanged, and the currently selected clock value
is used. The interrupt is then serviced. When the return-from-interrupt (IRET) occurs, the instruction immediately
following the one that initiated idle mode is executed.
8-6
S3C8245/P8245/C8249/P8249
I/O PORTS
9
I/O PORTS
OVERVIEW
The S3C8245/C8249 microcontroller has two nibble-programmable and four bit-programmable I/O ports,
P0–P5. The port 3 is a 5-bit port and the others are 8-bit ports. This gives a total of 45 I/O pins. Each port can be
flexibly configured to meet application design requirements. The CPU accesses ports by directly writing or reading
port registers. No special I/O instructions are required.
Table 9-1 gives you a general overview of the S3C8245/C8249 I/O port functions.
Table 9-1. S3C8245/C8249 Port Configuration Overview
Port
Configuration Options
0
1-bit programmable I/O port.
Schmitt trigger input or output mode selected by software; software assignable pull-up.
P0.0–P0.7 can be used as inputs for external interrupts INT0–INT7
(with noise filter and interrupt control).
1
1-bit programmable I/O port.
Input or output mode selected by software; open-drain output mode can be selected by software;
software assignable pull-up.
Alternately P1.0–P1.7 can be used as SI, SO, SCK, BUZ, T1CAP, T1CLK, T1OUT, T1PWM.
2
3
4
5
1-bit programmable I/O port.
Normal input and AD input or output mode selected by software;
software assignable pull-up.
1-bit programmable I/O port.
Input or push-pull output with software assignable pull-up.
Alternately P3.0–P3.3 can be used as TACAP, TACLK, TAOUT, TAPWM, TBPWM.
1-bit programmable I/O port.
Push-pull or open drain output and input with software assignable pull-up.
P4.0–P4.7 can alternately be used as outputs for LCD SEG.
1-bit programmable I/O port.
Push-pull or open drain output and input with software assignable pull-up.
P5.0–P5.7 can alternately be used as outputs for LCD SEG.
9-1
I/O PORTS
S3C8245/P8245/C8249/P8249
PORT DATA REGISTERS
Table 9-2 gives you an overview of the register locations of all four S3C8245/C8249 I/O port data registers. Data
registers for ports 0, 1, 2, 3, 4, and 5 have the general format shown in Figure 9-1.
Table 9-2. Port Data Register Summary
Register Name
Port 0 data register
Port 1 data register
Port 2 data register
Port 3 data register
Port 4 data register
Port 5 data register
Mnemonic
Decimal
246
Hex
F6H
F7H
F8H
F9H
FAH
FBH
Location
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
P0
P1
P2
P3
P4
P5
Set 1, Bank 0
Set 1, Bank 0
Set 1, Bank 0
Set 1, Bank 0
Set 1, Bank 0
Set 1, Bank 0
247
248
249
250
251
9-2
S3C8245/P8245/C8249/P8249
I/O PORTS
PORT 0
Port 0 is an 8-bit I/O Port that you can use two ways:
— General-purpose I/O
— External interrupt inputs for INT0–INT7
Port 0 is accessed directly by writing or reading the port 0 data register, P0 at location F6H in set 1, bank 0.
Port 0 Control Register (P0CONH, P0CONL)
Port 0 pins are configured individually by bit-pair settings in two control registers located in set 1, bank 0:
P0CONL (low byte, E1H) and P0CONH (high byte, E0H).
When you select output mode, a push-pull circuit is automatically configured. In input mode, three different
selections are available:
— Schmitt trigger input with interrupt generation on falling signal edges.
— Schmitt trigger input with interrupt generation on rising signal edges.
— Schmitt trigger input with interrupt generation on falling/rising signal edges.
Port 0 Interrupt Enable and Pending Registers (P0INT, P0PND)
To process external interrupts at the port 0 pins, two additional control registers are provided: the port 0 interrupt
enable register P0INT (E2H, set 1, bank 0) and the port 0 interrupt pending register P0PND (E3H, set 1, bank 0).
The port 0 interrupt pending register P0PND lets you check for interrupt pending conditions and clear the pending
condition when the interrupt service routine has been initiated. The application program detects interrupt requests by
polling the P0PND register at regular intervals.
When the interrupt enable bit of any port 0 pin is “1”, a rising or falling signal edge at that pin will generate an
interrupt request. The corresponding P0PND bit is then automatically set to “1” and the IRQ level goes low to signal
the CPU that an interrupt request is waiting. When the CPU acknowledges the interrupt request, application software
must the clear the pending condition by writing a “0” to the corresponding P0PND bit.
9-3
I/O PORTS
S3C8245/P8245/C8249/P8249
Port 0 Control Register, High Byte (P0CONH)
E0H, Set 1, Bank 0, R/W
MSB
.7
.6
.5
.4
.3
.2
.1
.0
LSB
P0.7
(INT7)
P0.6
(INT6)
P0.5
(INT5)
P0.4
(INT4)
P0CONH bit-pair pin configuration:
00
01
10
11
Schmitt trigger input mode, pull-up, interrupt on falling edge
Schmitt trigger input mode, interrupt on rising edge
Schmitt trigger input mode, interrupt on rising or falling edge
Output mode, push-pull
Figure 9-1. Port 0 High-Byte Control Register (P0CONH)
Port 0 Control Register, Low Byte (P0CONL)
E1H, Set 1, Bank 0, R/W
MSB
.7
.6
.5
.4
.3
.2
.1
.0
LSB
P0.3
(INT3)
P0.2
(INT2)
P0.1
(INT1)
P0.0
(INT0)
P0CONL bit-pair pin configuration:
00
01
10
11
Schmitt trigger input mode, pull-up, interrupt on falling edge
Schmitt trigger input mode, interrupt on rising edge
Schmitt trigger input mode, interrupt on rising or falling edge
Output mode, push-pull
Figure 9-2. Port 0 Low-Byte Control Register (P0CONL)
9-4
S3C8245/P8245/C8249/P8249
I/O PORTS
Port 0 Interrupt Control Register (P0INT)
E2H, Set 1, Bank 0, R/W
MSB
.7
.6
.5
.4
.3
.2
.1
.0
LSB
INT7 INT6 INT5 INT4 INT3 INT2 INT1 INT0
P0INT bit configuration settings:
0
1
Interrupt Disable
Interrupt Enable
Figure 9-3. Port 0 Interrupt Control Register (P0INT)
Port 0 Interrupt Pending Register (P0PND)
E3H, Set 1, Bank 0, R/W
MSB
.7
.6
.5
.4
.3
.2
.1
.0
LSB
PND7 PND6 PND5 PND4 PND3 PND2 PND1 PND0
P0PND bit configuration settings:
0
1
Interrupt request is not pending,
pending bit clear when write 0
Interrupt request is pending
Figure 9-4. Port 0 Interrupt Pending Register (P0PND)
9-5
I/O PORTS
PORT 1
S3C8245/P8245/C8249/P8249
Port 1 is an 8-bit I/O port with individually configurable pins. Port 1 pins are accessed directly by writing or reading
the port 1 data register, P1 at location F7H in set 1, bank 0. P1.0–P1.7 can serve inputs, as outputs
(push pull or open-drain) or you can configure the following alternative functions:
— Low-byte pins (P1.0-P1.3): T1CAP, T1CLK, T1OUT, T1PWM
— High-byte pins (P1.4-P1.7): SCK, SI, SO and BUZ
Port 1 Control Register
Port 1 has two 8-bit control registers: P1CONH for P1.4–P1.7 and P1CONL for P1.0–P1.3. A reset clears the
P1CONH and P1CONL registers to “00H”, configuring all pins to input mode. You use control registers settings to
select input or output mode (push-pull or open drain) and enable the alternative functions.
When programming the port, please remember that any alternative peripheral I/O function you configure using the
port 1 control registers must also be enabled in the associated peripheral module.
Port 1 Pull-up Resistor Enable Register (P1PUP)
Using the port 1 pull-up resistor enable register, P1PUP (F5H, set 1, bank 0), you can configure pull-up resistors to
individual port 1 pins.
Port 1 Control Register, High Byte (P1CONH)
E4H, Set 1, Bank 0, R/W
MSB
.7
.6
.5
.4
.3
.2
.1
.0
LSB
P1.4/BUZ
P1.5/SO
P1.6/SCK
P1.7/SI
P1CONH bit-pair pin configuration settings:
00
01
10
11
Input mode (SI, SCK in)
Output mode, open-drain
Alternative function (SCK out, BUZ, SO, P1.7 is push-pull output)
Output mode, push-pull
NOTE: When use this port 1, user must be care of the pull-up resistance status.
Figure 9-5. Port 1 High-Byte Control Register (P1CONH)
9-6
S3C8245/P8245/C8249/P8249
I/O PORTS
Port 1 Control Register, Low Byte (P1CONL)
E5H, Set 1, Bank 0, R/W
MSB
.7
.6
.5
.4
.3
.2
.1
.0
LSB
P1.0/T1CAP
P1.1/T1CLK
P1.2/T1OUT
/T1PWM
P1.3
P1CONL bit-pair pin configuration settings:
00
01
10
Input mode (T1CAP, T1CLK)
Output mode, open-drain
Alternative function (T1OUT, T1PWM, other pins are push-pull
are push-pull output mode)
11
Output mode, push-pull
NOTE:
When use this port 1, user must be care of the pull-up resistance status.
Figure 9-6. Port 1 Low-Byte Control Register (P1CONL)
Port 1 Pull-up Control Register (P1PUR)
F5H, Set 1, Bank 0, R/W
MSB
.7
.6
.5
.4
.3
.2
.1
.0
LSB
P1.7 P1.6 P1.5 P1.4 P1.3 P1.2 P1.1 P1.0
P1PUP bit configuration settings:
0
1
Pull-up Disable
Pull-up Enable
Figure 9-7. Port 1 Pull-up Control Register (P1PUP)
9-7
I/O PORTS
PORT 2
S3C8245/P8245/C8249/P8249
Port 2 is an 8-bit I/O port that can be used for general-purpose I/O as A/D converter inputs, ADC0–ADC7. The pins
are accessed directly by writing or reading the port 2 data register, P2 at location F8H in set 1, bank 0.
To individually configure the port 2 pins P2.0–P2.7, you make bit-pair settings in two control registers located in set
1, bank 0: P2CONL (low byte, E7H) and P2CONH (high byte, E6H). In input mode, ADC or external reference voltage
input are also available.
Port 2 Control Registers
Two 8-bit control registers are used to configure port 2 pins: P2CONL (E7H, set 1, Bank 0) for pins P2.0–P2.3 and
P2CONH (E6H, set 1, Bank 0) for pins P2.4–P2.7. Each byte contains four bit-pairs and each bit-pair configures one
port 2 pin. The P2CONH and the P2CONL registers also control the alternative functions.
Port 2 Control Register, High Byte (P2CONH)
E6H, Set 1, Bank 0, R/W
MSB
.7
.6
.5
.4
.3
.2
.1
.0
LSB
P2.4 (ADC4)
P2.5 (ADC5)
P2.6 (ADC6)
P2.7
(VLDREF/ADC7)
P2CONH bit-pair pin configuration:
00
01
10
Input mode
Output mode, pull-up
Alternative function (ADC & VLD External input ENABLE,
ADCEN signal Gen.)
11
Output mode, push-pull
NOTE:
If a pin is enabled for ADC mode by ADCEN or ADC & VLD
ENABLE signal, normal I/O and pull-up resistance are disabled.
When pins are enabled for ADC mode, the pins can be selected for
ADC input by ADCON.6. 5. 4.
And the P2.7 can be used for VLD external input.
Figure 9-8. Port 2 High-Byte Control Register (P2CONH)
9-8
S3C8245/P8245/C8249/P8249
I/O PORTS
Port 2 Control Register,Low Byte (P2CONL)
E7H, Set 1, Bank 0, R/W
MSB
.7
.6
.5
.4
.3
.2
.1
.0
LSB
P2.0 (ADC0)
P2.1 (ADC1)
P2.2 (ADC2)
P2.3 (ADC3)
P2CONL bit-pair pin configuration:
00
01
10
11
Input mode
Input mode, pull-up
Alternative function (ADC mode)
Output mode, push-pull
NOTE:
If a pin is enabled for ADC mode by ADCEN, normal I/O and
pull-up resistance are disabled.
When pins are enabled for ADC mode by ADCEN, the pins can
be selected for ADC input by ADCON.6.5.4.
Figure 9-9. Port 2 Low-Byte Control Register (P2CONL)
9-9
I/O PORTS
PORT 3
S3C8245/P8245/C8249/P8249
Port 3 is an 5-bit I/O port with individually configurable pins. Port 3 pins are accessed directly by writing or reading
the port 3 data register, P3 at location F9H in set 1, bank 0. P3.0–P3.3 can serve as inputs (with or without pull-ups),
as push-pull outputs, or you can configure the following alternative functions:
— TACAP, TACLK, TAOUT, TAPWM and TBPWM
Port 3 Control Registers
Port 3 has two 8-bit control registers: P3CONH for P3.4 and P3CONL for P3.0–P3.3. A reset clears the P3CONH
and P3CONL registers to “00H”, configuring all pins to input mode. You use control registers settings to select input
or output mode, enable pull-up resistors, and enable the alternative functions.
When programming this port, please remember that any alternative peripheral I/O function you configure using the
port 3 control registers must also be enabled in the associated peripheral module.
Port 3 Control high Register, High Byte (P3CONH)
E8H, Set 1, Bank 0, R/W
MSB
.7
.6
.5
.4
.3
.2
.1
.0
LSB
Not used
P3.4
P3CONH bit-pair pin configuration settings:
00
01
1x
Input mode
Input mode, pull-up
Output mode, push-pull
Figure 9-10. Port 3 High-Byte Control Register (P3CONH)
9-10
S3C8245/P8245/C8249/P8249
I/O PORTS
Port 3 Control Register, Low Byte (P3CONL)
E9H, Set 1, Bank 0, R/W
MSB
.7
.6
.5
.4
.3
.2
.1
.0
LSB
P3.0/TBPWM
P3.1/TAOUT/
TAPWM
P3.2/TACLK
P3.3/TACAP
P3CONL bit-pair pin configuration settings:
00
Input mode (TACAP, TACLK)
Input mode, pull-up (TACAP)
01
10
Alternative function (TAOUT,TAPWM, TBPWM
P3.2, P3.3 is push-pull output mode)
11
Output mode, push-pull
Figure 9-11. Port 3 Low-Byte Control Register (P3CONL)
9-11
I/O PORTS
PORT 4
S3C8245/P8245/C8249/P8249
Port 4 is an 8-bit I/O port with individually configurable pins. Port 4 pins are accessed directly by writing or reading
the port 4 data register, P4 at location FAH in set 1, bank 0. P4.0–P4.7 can serve as inputs (with or without pull-
ups), as output (open drain or push-pull). And, they can serve as segment pins for LCD, also.
Port 4 Control Registers
Port 4 has two 8-bit control registers: P4CONH for P4.4–P4.7 and P4CONL for P4.0–P4.3. A reset clears the
P4CONH and P4CONL registers to “00H”, configuring all pins to input mode.
Port 4 Control Register, High Byte (P4CONH)
ECH, Set 1, Bank 1, R/W
MSB
.7
.6
.5
.4
.3
.2
.1
.0
LSB
P4.4/SEG20
P4.5/SEG21
P4.6/SEG22
P4.7/SEG23
P4CONH bit-pair pin configuration settings:
00
01
10
Input mode
Input mode, pull-up
Opendrain output mode
11
Output mode, push-pull
NOTE:
If LCD is enabled by LCON.5, SEG signal go out
otherwise port 4 I/0 can be selected.
Figure 9-12. Port 4 High-Byte Control Register (P4CONH)
9-12
S3C8245/P8245/C8249/P8249
I/O PORTS
Port 4 Control Register, Low Byte (P4CONL)
EDH, Set 1, Bank 1, R/W
MSB
.7
.6
.5
.4
.3
.2
.1
.0
LSB
P4.0/SEG16
P4.1/SEG17
P4.2/SEG18
P4.3/SEG19
P4CONL bit-pair pin configuration settings:
00
01
10
Input mode
Input mode, pull-up
Opendrain output mode
11
Output mode, push-pull
NOTE:
If LCD is enabled by LCON.4, SEG signal go out
otherwise port 4 I/0 can be selected.
Figure 9-13. Port 4 Low-Byte Control Register (P4CONL)
9-13
I/O PORTS
PORT 5
S3C8245/P8245/C8249/P8249
Port 5 is an 8-bit I/O port with individually configurable pins. Port 5 pins are accessed directly by writing or reading
the port 5 data register, P5 at location FBH in set 1, bank 0. P5.0–P5.7 can serve as inputs (with without pull-ups),
as output (open drain or push-pull). And, they can serve as segment pins for LCD also.
Port 5 Control Registers
Port 5 has two 8-bit control registers: P5CONH for P5.4–P5.7 and P5CONL for P5.0–P5.3. A reset clears the
P5CONH and P5CONL registers to “00H”, configuring all pins to input mode.
Port 5 Control Register, High Byte (P5CONH)
EEH, Set 1, Bank 1, R/W
MSB
.7
.6
.5
.4
.3
.2
.1
.0
LSB
P5.4/SEG28
P5.5/SEG29
P5.6/SEG30
P5.7/SEG31
P5CONH bit-pair pin configuration settings:
00
01
10
Input mode
Input mode, pull-up
Opendrain output mode
11
Output mode, push-pull
NOTE:
If LCD is enabled by LCON.7, SEG signal go out
otherwise port 5 I/0 can be selected.
Figure 9-14. Port 5 High-Byte Control Register (P5CONH)
9-14
S3C8245/P8245/C8249/P8249
I/O PORTS
Port 5 Control Register, Low Byte (P5CONL)
EFH, Set 1, Bank 1, R/W
MSB
.7
.6
.5
.4
.3
.2
.1
.0
LSB
P5.0/SEG24
P5.1/SEG25
P5.2/SEG26
P5.3/SEG27
P5CONL bit-pair pin configuration settings:
00
01
10
Input mode
Input mode, pull-up
Opendrain output mode
11
Output mode, push-pull
NOTE:
If LCD is enabled by LCON.6, SEG signal go out
otherwise port 5 I/0 can be selected.
Figure 9-15. Port 5 Low-Byte Control Register (P5CONL)
9-15
S3C8245/P8245/C8249/P8249
BASIC TIMER
10 BASIC TIMER
OVERVIEW
S3C8245/C8249 has an 8-bit basic timer .
BASIC TIMER (BT)
You can use the basic timer (BT) in two different ways:
— As a watchdog timer to provide an automatic reset mechanism in the event of a system malfunction, or
— To signal the end of the required oscillation stabilization interval after a reset or a Stop mode release.
The functional components of the basic timer block are:
— Clock frequency divider (fxx divided by 4096, 1024, 128, or 16) with multiplexer
— 8-bit basic timer counter, BTCNT (set 1, Bank 0, FDH, read-only)
— Basic timer control register, BTCON (set 1, D3H, read/write)
BASIC TIMER CONTROL REGISTER (BTCON)
The basic timer control register, BTCON, is used to select the input clock frequency, to clear the basic timer counter
and frequency dividers, and to enable or disable the watchdog timer function. It is located in set 1, address D3H, and
is read/write addressable using Register addressing mode.
A reset clears BTCON to "00H". This enables the watchdog function and selects a basic timer clock frequency of
fxx/4096. To disable the watchdog function, you must write the signature code "1010B" to the basic timer register
control bits BTCON.7–BTCON.4.
The 8-bit basic timer counter, BTCNT (set 1, bank 0, FDH), can be cleared at any time during the normal operation
by writing a "1" to BTCON.1. To clear the frequency dividers, write a "1" to BTCON.0.
10-1
BASIC TIMER
S3C8245/P8245/C8249/P8249
Basic TImer Control Register (BTCON)
D3H, Set 1, R/W
MSB
.7
.6
.5
.4
.3
.2
.1
.0
LSB
Divider clear bit:
0 = No effect
1= Clear dvider
Watchdog timer enable bits:
1010B = Disable watchdog function
Other value = Enable watchdog function
Basic timer counter clear bit:
0 = No effect
1= Clear BTCNT
Basic timer input clock selection bits:
00 = fXX/4096
01 = fXX/1024
10 = fXX/128
11 = fXX/16
Figure 10-1. Basic Timer Control Register (BTCON)
10-2
S3C8245/P8245/C8249/P8249
BASIC TIMER
BASIC TIMER FUNCTION DESCRIPTION
Watchdog Timer Function
You can program the basic timer overflow signal (BTOVF) to generate a reset by setting BTCON.7–BTCON.4 to any
value other than "1010B". (The "1010B" value disables the watchdog function.) A reset clears BTCON to "00H",
automatically enabling the watchdog timer function. A reset also selects the CPU clock (as determined by the
current CLKCON register setting), divided by 4096, as the BT clock.
The MCU is reseted whenever a basic timer counter overflow occurs, During normal operation, the application
program must prevent the overflow, and the accompanying reset operation, from occuring, To do this, the BTCNT
value must be cleared (by writing a “1” to BTCON.1) at regular intervals.
If a system malfunction occurs due to circuit noise or some other error condition, the BT counter clear operation will
not be executed and a basic timer overflow will occur, initiating a reset. In other words, during the normal operation,
the basic timer overflow loop (a bit 7 overflow of the 8-bit basic timer counter, BTCNT) is always broken by a BTCNT
clear instruction. If a malfunction does occur, a reset is triggered automatically.
Oscillation Stabilization Interval Timer Function
You can also use the basic timer to program a specific oscillation stabilization interval after a reset or when stop
mode has been released by an external interrupt.
In stop mode, whenever a reset or an external interrupt occurs, the oscillator starts.. The BTCNT value then starts
increasing at the rate of fxx/4096 (for reset), or at the rate of the preset clock source (for an external interrupt). When
BTCNT.4 overflows, a signal is generated to indicate that the stabilization interval has elapsed and to gate the clock
signal off to the CPU so that it can resume the normal operation.
In summary, the following events occur when stop mode is released:
1. During the stop mode, a power-on reset or an external interrupt occurs to trigger the Stop mode release and
oscillation starts.
2. If a power-on reset occurred, the basic timer counter will increase at the rate of fxx/4096. If an interrupt is used
to release stop mode, the BTCNT value increases at the rate of the preset clock source.
3. Clock oscillation stabilization interval begins and continues until bit 4 of the basic timer counter overflows.
4. When a BTCNT.4 overflow occurs, the normal CPU operation resumes.
10-3
BASIC TIMER
S3C8245/P8245/C8249/P8249
nRESET or STOP
Data Bus
Bit 1
Bits 3, 2
Basic Timer Control Register
(Write '1010xxxxB' to Disable)
f
XX/4096
XX/1024
XX/128
XX/16
Clear
f
8-Bit Up Counter
(BTCNT, Read-Only)
f
XX
DIV
MUX
OVF
f
nRESET
f
Start the CPU (NOTE)
R
Bit 0
NOTE:
During a power-on reset operation, the CPU is idle during the required oscillation
stabilization interval (until bit 4 of the basic timer counter overflows).
Figure 10-2. Basic Timer Block Diagram
10-4
S3C8245/P8245/C8249/P8249
8-BIT TIMER A/B
11 8-BIT TIMER A/B
8-BIT TIMER A
OVERVIEW
The 8-bit timer A is an 8-bit general-purpose timer/counter. Timer A has three operating modes, one of which you
select using the appropriate TACON setting:
— Interval timer mode (Toggle output at TAOUT pin)
— Capture input mode with a rising or falling edge trigger at the TACAP pin
— PWM mode (TAPWM)
Timer A has the following functional components:
— Clock frequency divider (fxx divided by 1024, 256, or 64 ) with multiplexer
— External clock input pin ( TACLK)
— 8-bit counter (TACNT), 8-bit comparator, and 8-bit reference data register (TADATA)
— I/O pins for capture input (TACAP) or PWM or match output (TAPWM, TAOUT)
— Timer A overflow interrupt (IRQ0, vector E2H) and match/capture interrupt (IRQ0, vector E0H) generation
— Timer A control register, TACON (set 1, EDH, read/write)
11-1
8-BIT TIMER A/B
S3C8245/P8245/C8249/P8249
FUNCTION DESCRIPTION
Timer A Interrupts (IRQ0, Vectors E0H and E2H)
The timer A module can generate two interrupts: the timer A overflow interrupt (TAOVF), and the timer A match/
capture interrupt (TAINT). TAOVF is interrupt level IRQ0, vector E2H. TAINT also belongs to interrupt level IRQ0, but
is assigned the separate vector address, E0H.
Pending condition of timer A interrupts (overflow & match/capture) can be cleared automatically by hardware where
the interrupts are enabled. Otherwise pending condition must be cleared manually by software.
Interval Timer Function
The timer A module can generate an interrupt: the timer A match interrupt (TAINT). TAINT belongs to interrupt level
IRQ0, and is assigned the separate vector address, E0H.
When timer A match interrupt occurs and is serviced by the CPU, the pending condition is cleared automatically by
hardware.
In interval timer mode, a match signal is generated and TAOUT is toggled when the counter value is identical to the
value written to the TA reference data register, TADATA. The match signal generates a timer A match interrupt
(TAINT, vector E0H) and clears the counter.
If, for example, you write the value 10H to TADATA and 0AH to TACON, the counter will increment until it reaches
10H. At this point, the TA interrupt request is generated, the counter value is reset, and counting resumes.
Pulse Width Modulation Mode
Pulse width modulation (PWM) mode lets you program the width (duration) of the pulse that is output at the TAPWM
pin. As in interval timer mode, a match signal is generated when the counter value is identical to the value written to
the timer A data register. In PWM mode, however, the match signal does not clear the counter. Instead, it runs
continuously, overflowing at FFH, and then continues incrementing from 00H.
Although timer A overflow interrupt is occurred, this interrupt is not typically used in PWM-type applications. Instead,
the pulse at the TAPWM pin is held to Low level as long as the reference data value is less than or equal to ( £ ) the
counter value and then the pulse is held to High level for as long as the data value is greater than ( > ) the counter
value. One pulse width is equal to t
• 256 .
CLK
Capture Mode
In capture mode, a signal edge that is detected at the TACAP pin opens a gate and loads the current counter value
into the TA data register. You can select rising or falling edges to trigger this operation.
Timer A also gives you capture input source: the signal edge at the TACAP pin. You select the capture input by
setting the value of the timer A capture input selection bit in the port 3 control register, P3CONL, (set 1, bank 0,
E9H). When P3CONL.7.6 is 00, the TACAP input or normal input is selected. When P3CONL.7.6 is set to 11,
normal output is selected.
Both kinds of timer A interrupts can be used in capture mode: the timer A overflow interrupt is generated whenever a
counter overflow occurs; the timer A match/capture interrupt is generated whenever the counter value is loaded into
the TA data register.
By reading the captured data value in TADATA, and assuming a specific value for the timer A clock frequency, you
can calculate the pulse width (duration) of the signal that is being input at the TACAP pin.
11-2
S3C8245/P8245/C8249/P8249
8-BIT TIMER A/B
TIMER A CONTROL REGISTER (TACON)
You use the timer A control register, TACON, to
— Select the timer A operating mode (interval timer, capture mode, or PWM mode)
— Select the timer A input clock frequency
— Clear the timer A counter, TACNT
— Enable the timer A overflow interrupt or timer A match/capture interrupt
— Clear timer A match/capture interrupt pending conditions
TACON is located in set 1, Bank 0 at address EDH, and is read/write addressable using Register addressing mode.
A reset clears TACON to '00H'. This sets timer A to normal interval timer mode, selects an input clock frequency of
fxx/1024, and disables all timer A interrupts. You can clear the timer A counter at any time during normal operation
by writing a "1" to TACON.3.
The timer A overflow interrupt (TAOVF) is interrupt level IRQ0 and has the vector address E2H. When a timer A
overflow interrupt occurs and is serviced by the CPU, the pending condition is cleared automatically by hardware.
Timer A Control Register (TACON)
EDH, Set 1, Bank 0, R/W
MSB
.7
.6
.5
.4
.3
.2
.1
.0
LSB
Timer A input clock selection bits:
00 = fXX/1024
Timer A match/capture interrupt
pending bit:
01 = fXX/256
10 = fXX/64
11 = External clock (TACLK)
0 = No interrupt pending
0 = Clear pending bit (write)
1 = Interrupt is pending
Timer A match/capture interrupt
enable bit:
0 = DIsable interrupt
1 = Enable interrupt
Timer A operating mode selection bits:
00 = Interval mode (TAOUT mode)
01 = Capture mode (capture on rising edge,
Counter running, OVF can occur)
10 = Capture mode (Capture on falling edge,
Counter running, OVF can occur)
11 = PWM mode (OVF interrupt can occur)
Timer A overflow interrupt enable:
0 = Disable overflow interrupt
1 = Enable overflow interrupt
Timer A counter clear bit:
0 = No affect
1 = Clear the timer A counter (when write)
Figure 11-1. Timer A Control Register (TACON)
11-3
8-BIT TIMER A/B
S3C8245/P8245/C8249/P8249
BLOCK DIAGRAM
TACON.2
TAOVF
Overflow
Clear
Pending
TACON.7-.6
Data Bus
8
TACON.3
f
XX /1024
M
U
X
f
XX /256
TACON.1
8-bit Up-Counter
(Read Only)
fXX /64
TACLK
TAINT
M
U
X
Match
8-bit Comparator
TACON.0
Pending
M
U
X
TACAP
Timer A Buffer Reg
TAOUT
TAPWM
TACON.5.4
TACON.5.4
Timer A Data Register
(Read/Write)
8
Data Bus
Pending
Pending bit is located at INTPND register.
NOTE:
Timer A input clock must be slower than CPU clock.
Figure 11-2. Timer A Functional Block Diagram
11-4
S3C8245/P8245/C8249/P8249
8-BIT TIMER A/B
8-BIT TIMER B
OVERVIEW
The S3C8245/C8249 micro-controller has an 8-bit counter called timer B. Timer B, which can be used to generate
the carrier frequency of a remote controller signal.
Pending condition of timer B is cleared automatically by hardware.
Timer B has two functions:
— As a normal interval timer, generating a timer B interrupt at programmed time intervals.
— To supply a clock source to the 16-bit timer/counter module, timer 0, for generating the timer 0 overflow interrupt.
TBCON.6-.7
TBCON.2
fXX /1
M
U
X
f
XX /2
CLK
8-bit
Down Counter
TBCON.0
(TBOF)
To Other Block
(P3.0/TBPWM)
fXX /4
fXX /8
TBCON.3
Repeat Control
Interrupt Control
MUX
IRQ1
(TBINT)
INT.GEN
Timer B Data
Low Byte Register
TBCON.4-.5
Timer B Data
High Byte Register
8
Data Bus
NOTES:
1. The value of the TBDATAL register is loaded into the 8-bit counter when the operation of the timer B starts.
If a borrow occurs in the counter, the value of the TBDATAH register is loaded into the 8-bit counter.
However, if the next borrow occurs, the value of the TBDATAL register is loaded into the 8-bit counter.
2. Timer B input clock must be slower than CPU clock.
Figure 11-3. Timer B Functional Block Diagram
11-5
8-BIT TIMER A/B
S3C8245/P8245/C8249/P8249
Timer B Control Register (TBCON)
ECH, Set 1, Bank 0, R/W
MSB
.7
.6
.5
.4
.3
.2
.1
.0
LSB
Timer B input clock selection bits:
00 = fxx
Timer B output flip-flop control bit:
0 = TBOF is low
01 = fxx/2
10 = fxx/4
11 = fxx/8
1 = TBOF is high
Timer B mode selection bit:
0 = One-shot mode
1 = Repeating mode
Timer B interrupt time selection bits:
00 = Elapsed time for low data value
01 = Elapsed time for high data value
10 = Elapsed time for low and high data values
11 = Invalid setting
Timer B start/stop bit:
0 = Stop timer B
1 = Start timer B
Timer B interrupt enable bit:
0 = Disable interrupt
1 = Enable interrupt
Figure 11-4. Timer B Control Register (TBCON)
Timer B Data Register, High Byte (TBDATAH)
FAH, Set 1, Bank 0, R/W
MSB
MSB
.7
.7
.6
.5
.4
.3
.2
.1
.0
LSB
LSB
Reset Value: FFh
Timer B Data Register, Low-Byte (TBDATAL)
EBH, Set 1, Bank 0, R/W
.6
.5
.4
.3
.2
.1
.0
Reset Value: FFh
Figure 11-5. Timer B Data Registers (TBDATAH/L)
11-6
S3C8245/P8245/C8249/P8249
8-BIT TIMER A/B
TIMER B PULSE WIDTH CALCULATIONS
t
HIGH
tLOW
t
LOW
To generate the above repeated waveform consisted of low period time, t
When TBOF = 0,
, and high period time, t
.
LOW
HIGH
t
t
= (TBDATAL + 2) x 1/fx, 0H < TBDATAL < 100H, where fx = The selected clock.
= (TBDATAH + 2) x 1/fx, 0H < TBDATAH < 100H, where fx = The selected clock.
LOW
HIGH
When TBOF = 1,
t
t
= (TBDATAH + 2) x 1/fx, 0H < TBDATAH < 100H, where fx = The selected clock.
LOW
HIGH
= (TBDATAL + 2) x 1/fx, 0H < TBDATAL < 100H, where fx = The selected clock.
To make t
= 24 us and t
= 15 us. f
= 4 MHz, fx = 4 MHz/4 = 1 MHz
LOW
HIGH
OSC
When TBOF = 0,
t
t
= 24 us = (TBDATAL + 2) /fx = (TBDATAL + 2) x 1us, TBDATAL = 22.
= 15 us = (TBDATAH + 2) /fx = (TBDATAH + 2) x 1us, TBDATAH = 13.
LOW
HIGH
When TBOF = 1,
t
t
= 15 us = (TBDATAL + 2) /fx = (TBDATAL + 2) x 1us, TBDATAL = 13.
HIGH
LOW
= 24 us = (TBDATAH + 2) /fx = (TBDATAH + 2) x 1us, TBDATAH = 22.
11-7
8-BIT TIMER A/B
S3C8245/P8245/C8249/P8249
0H
Timer B Clock
TBOF = '0'
TBDATAL = 01-FFH
TBDATAH = 00H
Low
High
Low
High
TBOF = '0'
TBDATAL = 00H
TBDATAH = 01-FFH
TBOF = '0'
TBDATAL = 00H
TBDATAH = 00H
TBOF = '1'
TBDATAL = 00H
TBDATAH = 00H
0H
100H
200H
Timer B Clock
E0H
E0H
TBOF = '1'
TBDATAL = DEH
TBDATAH = 1EH
20H
TBOF = '0'
TBDATAL = DEH
TBDATAH = 1EH
20H
TBOF = '1'
80H
TBDATAL = 7EH
TBDATAH = 7EH
80H
TBOF = '0'
80H
TBDATAL = 7EH
TBDATAH = 7EH
80H
Figure 11-6. Timer B Output Flip-Flop Waveforms in Repeat Mode
11-8
S3C8245/P8245/C8249/P8249
8-BIT TIMER A/B
F
PROGRAMMING TIP — To generate 38 kHz, 1/3duty signal through P3.0
This example sets Timer B to the repeat mode, sets the oscillation frequency as the Timer B clock source, and
TBDATAH and TBDATAL to make a 38 kHz,1/3 Duty carrier frequency. The program parameters are:
8.795 ms
17.59
ms
37.9 kHz 1/3 Duty
— Timer B is used in repeat mode
— Oscillation frequency is 4 MHz (0.25 ms)
— TBDATAH = 8.795 ms/0.25 ms = 35.18, TBDATAL = 17.59 ms/0.25 ms = 70.36
— Set P3.0 to TBPWM mode.
ORG
DI
•
0100H
;
Reset address
START
•
•
LD
LD
LD
TBDATAL,#(70-2)
TBDATAH,#(35-2)
TBCON,#00000110B
;
;
;
;
;
Set 17.5 ms
Set 8.75 ms
Clock Source ¬ fxx
Disable Timer B interrupt.
Select repeat mode for Timer B.
; Start Timer B operation.
; Set Timer B Output flip-flop (TBOF) high.
;
LD
P3CONL,#02H
;
;
Set P3.0 to TBPWM mode.
This command generates 38 kHz, 1/3 duty pulse signal
through P3.0.
•
•
•
11-9
8-BIT TIMER A/B
S3C8245/P8245/C8249/P8249
F
PROGRAMMING TIP — To generate a one pulse signal through P3.0
This example sets Timer B to the one shot mode, sets the oscillation frequency as the Timer B clock source, and
TBDATAH and TBDATAL to make a 40 ms width pulse. The program parameters are:
40 ms
— Timer B is used in one shot mode
— Oscillation frequency is 4 MHz (1 clock = 0.25 ms)
— TBDATAH = 40 ms / 0.25 ms = 160, TBDATAL = 1
— Set P3.0 to TBPWM mode
ORG
DI
•
0100H
;
Reset address
START
•
•
LD
LD
LD
TBDATAH,# (160-2)
TBDATAL,# 1
TBCON,#00000001B
;
;
;
Set 40 ms
Set any value except 00H
Clock Source ¬
f
OSC
;
;
Disable Timer B interrupt.
Select one shot mode for Timer B.
; Stop Timer B operation.
; Set Timer B output flip-flop (TBOF) high
LD
•
P3CONL, #02H
;
Set P3.0 to TBPWM mode.
•
Pulse_out:
LD
TBCON,#00000101B
;
;
;
;
Start Timer B operation
to make the pulse at this point.
After the instruction is executed, 0.75 ms is required
before the falling edge of the pulse starts.
•
•
•
11-10
S3C8245/P8245/C8249/P8249
16-BIT TIMER 0/1
12 16-BIT TIMER 0/1
16-BIT TIMER 0
OVERVIEW
The 16-bit timer 0 is an 16-bit general-purpose timer. Timer 0 has the interval timer mode by using the appropriate
T0CON setting.
Timer 0 has the following functional components:
— Clock frequency divider (fxx divided by 256, 64, 8 or 1) with multiplexer
— TBOF (from timer B) is one of the clock frequencies.
— 16-bit counter (T0CNTH/L), 16-bit comparator, and 16-bit reference data register (T0DATAH/L)
— Timer 0 interrupt (IRQ2, vector E6H) generation
— Timer 0 control register, T0CON (set 1, Bank 1, F1H, read/write)
FUNCTION DESCRIPTION
Interval Timer Function
The timer 0 module can generate an interrupt, the timer 0 match interrupt (T0INT). T0INT belongs to interrupt level
IRQ2, and is assigned the separate vector address, E6H.
The T0INT pending condition is automatically cleared by hardware when it has been serviced. Even though T0INT is
disabled, the application’s service routine can detect a pending condition of T0INT by the software and execute it’s
sub-routine. When this case is used, the T0INT pending bit must be cleared by the application subroutine by writing
a “0” to the T0CON.0 pending bit.
In interval timer mode, a match signal is generated when the counter value is identical to the values written to the T0
reference data registers, T0DATAH/L. The match signal generates a timer 0 match interrupt (T0INT, vector E4H) and
clears the counter.
If, for example, you write the value 0010H to T0DATAH/L and 0FH to T0CON, the counter will increment until it
reaches 10H. At this point, the T0 interrupt request is generated, the counter value is reset, and counting resumes.
12-1
16-BIT TIMER 0/1
S3C8245/P8245/C8249/P8249
TIMER 0 CONTROL REGISTER (T0CON)
You use the timer 0 control register, T0CON, to
— Enable the timer 0 operating (interval timer)
— Select the timer 0 input clock frequency
— Clear the timer 0 counter, T0CNT
— Enable the timer 0 interrupt and clear timer 0 interrupt pending condition
T0CON is located in set 1, at address F1H, and is read/write addressable using register addressing mode.
A reset clears T0CON to "00H". This sets timer 0 to disable interval timer mode, selects the TBOF, and disables
timer 0 interrupt. You can clear the timer 0 counter at any time during normal operation by writing a “1” to T0CON.3
To enable the timer 0 interrupt (IRQ2, vector E6H), you must write T0CON.2, and T0CON.1 to "1". To generate the
exact time interval, you should write T0CON.3 and 0, which cleared counter and interrupt pending bit. To detect an
interrupt pending condition when T0INT is disabled, the application program polls pending bit, T0CON.0. When a "1"
is detected, a timer 0 interrupt is pending. When the T0INT sub-routine has been serviced, the pending condition
must be cleared by software by writing a "0" to the timer 0 interrupt pending bit, T0CON.0.
Timer 0 Control Registers (T0CON)
F1H, Set 1, Bank 1, R/W
MSB
.7
.6
.5
.4
.3
.2
.1
.0
LSB
Timer 0 input clock selection bits:
000 = TBOF
Timer 0 interrupt pending bit:
0 = No interrupt pending
010 = fXX/256
100 = fXX/64
0 = Clear pending bit (when write)
1 = Interrupt is pending
110 = fXX/8
XX1 = fXX
Timer 0 interrupt enable bit:
0 = Disable interrupt
1 = Enable interrupt
Not used
Timer 0 count enable bit:
0 = Disable counting operation
1 = Enable counting operation
Timer 0 counter clear bit:
0 = No affect
1 = Clear the timer 0 counter (when write)
NOTE:
For normal operation T0CON.3 bit must be set 1.
Figure 12-1. Timer 0 Control Register (T0CON)
12-2
S3C8245/P8245/C8249/P8249
BLOCK DIAGRAM
16-BIT TIMER 0/1
Bits 7, 6, 5
Data Bus
8
Bit 3
TBOF
fxx/256
fxx/64
M
U
X
16-bit up-Counter H/L
(Read Only)
R
Clear
Match
fxx/8
fxx/1
Pending
Bit 0
T0INT
IRQ2
16-bit Comparator
Timer 0 Buffer Reg
Bit 2
Bit 1
Counter clear signal (T0CON.3)
Timer 0 Data H/L Reg
(Read/Write)
8
Data Bus
NOTES:
1. To be loaded T0DATA value to buffer register for comparing, T0CON.3 bit must be set 1.
2. Timer 0 input clock must be slower than CPU clock.
Figure 12-2. Timer 0 Functional Block Diagram
12-3
16-BIT TIMER 0/1
S3C8245/P8245/C8249/P8249
Timer 0 Counter Register, High-Byte (T0CNTH)
F2H, Set 1, Bank 1, R
MSB
MSB
.7
.7
.6
.5
.4
.3
.2
.1
.0
LSB
Reset Value: 00H
Timer 0 Counter Register, Low-Byte (T0CNTL)
F3H, Set 1, Bank 1, R
.6
.5
.4
.3
.2
.1
.0
LSB
Reset Value: 00H
Figure 12-3. Timer 0 Counter Register (T0CNTH/L)
Timer 0 Data Register, High-Byte (T0DATAH)
F4H, Set 1, Bank 1, R/W
MSB
MSB
.7
.7
.6
.5
.4
.3
.2
.1
.0
LSB
LSB
Reset Value: FFh
Timer 0 Data Register, Low-Byte (T0DATAL)
F5H, Set 1, Bank 1, R/W
.6
.5
.4
.3
.2
.1
.0
Reset Value: FFh
Figure 12-4. Timer 0 Data Register (T0DATAH/L)
12-4
S3C8245/P8245/C8249/P8249
16-BIT TIMER 0/1
16-BIT TIMER 1
OVERVIEW
The 16-bit timer 1 is an 16-bit general-purpose timer/counter. Timer 1 has three operating modes, one of which you
select using the appropriate T1CON setting:
— Interval timer mode (Toggle output at T1OUT pin)
— Capture input mode with a rising or falling edge trigger at the T1CAP pin
— PWM mode (T1PWM)
Timer 1 has the following functional components:
— Clock frequency divider (fxx divided by 1024, 256, 64, 8 or 1) with multiplexer
— External clock input pin (T1CLK)
— 16-bit counter (T1CNTH/L), 16-bit comparator, and 16-bit reference data register (T1DATAH/L)
— I/O pins for capture input (T1CAP), or PWM or match output (T1PWM, T1OUT)
— Timer 1 overflow interrupt (IRQ3, vector EAH) and match/capture interrupt (IRQ3, vector E8H) generation
— Timer 1 control register, T1CON (set 1, FBH, Bank 1, read/write)
12-5
16-BIT TIMER 0/1
S3C8245/P8245/C8249/P8249
FUNCTION DESCRIPTION
Timer 1 Interrupts (IRQ3, Vectors E8H and EAH)
The timer 1 module can generate two interrupts, the timer 1 overflow interrupt (T1OVF), and the timer 1
match/capture interrupt (T1INT). T1OVF is interrupt level IRQ3, vector EAH. T1INT also belongs to interrupt level
IRQ3, but is assigned the separate vector address, E8H.
A timer 1 overflow interrupt pending condition is automatically cleared by hardware when it has been serviced.
A timer 1 match/capture interrupt, T1INT pending condition is also cleared by hardware when it has been serviced.
Interval Timer Function
The timer 1 module can generate an interrupt: the timer 1 match interrupt (T1INT). T1INT belongs to interrupt level
IRQ3, and is assigned the separate vector address, E8H. When a timer 1 measure interrupt occurs and is serviced
by the CPU, the pending condition is cleared automatically by hardware.
In interval timer mode, a match signal is generated and T1OUT is toggled when the counter value is identical to the
value written to the T1 reference data register, T1DATAH/L. The match signal generates a timer 1 match interrupt
(T1INT, vector E8H) and clears the counter.
If, for example, you write the value 0010H to T1DATAH/L and 06H to T1CON, the counter will increment until it
reaches 0010H. At this point, the T1 interrupt request is generated, the counter value is reset, and counting
resumes.
Pulse Width Modulation Mode
Pulse width modulation (PWM) mode lets you program the width (duration) of the pulse that is output at the T1PWM
pin. As in interval timer mode, a match signal is generated when the counter value is identical to the value written to
the timer 1 data register. In PWM mode, however, the match signal does not clear the counter but can generate a
match interrupt. The counter runs continuously, overflowing at FFFFH, and then repeat the incrementing from 0000H.
Whenever an overflow is occurred, an overflow (OVF) interrupt can be generated.
Although you can use the match or the overflow interrupt in PWM mode, interrupts are not typically used in PWM-
type applications. Instead, the pulse at the T1PWM pin is held to Low level as long as the reference data value is
less than or equal to (£) the counter value and then pulse is held to High level for as long as the data value is greater
than (>) the counter value. One pulse width is equal to t
CLK
Capture Mode
In capture mode, a signal edge that is detected at the T1CAP pin opens a gate and loads the current counter value
into the T1 data register. You can select rising or falling edges to trigger this operation.
Timer 1 also gives you capture input source, the signal edge at the T1CAP pin. You select the capture input by
setting the value of the timer 1 capture input selection bit in the port 1 control register low, P1CONL, (set 1 bank 0,
E5H). When P1CONL.1.0 is 00, the T1CAP input or normal input is selected .When P1CONL.1.0 is set to 11,
normal output is selected.
Both kinds of timer 1 interrupts can be used in capture mode, the timer 1 overflow interrupt is generated whenever a
counter overflow occurs, the timer 1 match/capture interrupt is generated whenever the counter value is loaded into
the T1 data register.
By reading the captured data value in T1DATAH/L, and assuming a specific value for the timer 1 clock frequency,
you can calculate the pulse width (duration) of the signal that is being input at the T1CAP pin.
12-6
S3C8245/P8245/C8249/P8249
16-BIT TIMER 0/1
TIMER 1 CONTROL REGISTER (T1CON)
You use the timer 1 control register, T1CON, to
— Select the timer 1 operating mode (interval timer, capture mode, or PWM mode)
— Select the timer 1 input clock frequency
— Clear the timer 1 counter, T1CNTH/L
— Enable the timer 1 overflow interrupt or timer 1 match/capture interrupt
— Clear timer 1 match/capture interrupt pending conditions
T1CON is located in set 1 and Bank 1 at address FBH, and is read/write addressable using Register addressing
mode.
A reset clears T1CON to ‘00H’. This sets timer 1 to normal interval timer mode, selects an input clock frequency of
fxx/1024, and disables all timer 1 interrupts. To disable the counter operation, please set T1CON.7-.5 to 111B. You
can clear the timer 1 counter at any time during normal operation by writing a “1” to T1CON.3.
The timer 1 overflow interrupt (T1OVF) is interrupt level IRQ3 and has the vector address EAH. When a timer 1
overflow interrupt occurs and is serviced interrupt (IRQ3, vector E8H), you must write T1CON.1 to “1”. To generate
the exact time interval, you should write T1CON by the CPU, the pending condition is cleared automatically by
hardware.
To enable the timer 1 match/capture which clear counter and interrupt pending bit. To detect a match/capture or
overflow interrupt pending condition when T1INT or T1OVF is disabled, the application program should poll the
pending bit. When a “1” is detected, a timer 1 match/capture or overflow interrupt is pending.
When her sub-routine has been serviced, the pending condition must be cleared by software by writing a “0” to the
interrupt pending bit.
Timer 1 Control Register (T1CON)
FBH, Set 1, Bank 1, R/W
MSB
.7
.6
.5
.4
.3
.2
.1
.0
LSB
Timer 1 overflow interrupt enable:
1 = Enable overflow interrupt
0 = Disable overflow interrupt
Timer 1 input clock selection bits:
000 = fXX/1024
010 = fXX/256
100 = fXX/64
110 = fXX/8
001 = fXX/1
011 = External clock (T1CLK) falling edge
101 = External clock (T1CLK) rising edge
111 = Counter stop
Timer 1 match/capture interrupt enable bit:
0 = Disable interrupt
1 = Enable interrupt
Timer 1 counter clear bit:
0 = No effect
1 = Clear the timer 1 counter (when write)
Timer 1 operating mode selection bits:
00 = Interval mode
01 = Capture mode (capture on rising edge, counter running, OVF can occur)
10 = Capture mode (capture on falling edge, counter running, OVF can occur)
11 = PWM mode (OVF & match interrupt can occur)
Figure 12-5. Timer 1 Control Register (T1CON)
12-7
16-BIT TIMER 0/1
S3C8245/P8245/C8249/P8249
BLOCK DIAGRAM
T1CON.0
T1OVF
IRQ3
OVF
Pending
T1CON.7-5
Data Bus
8
T1CON.2
Clear
f
/1024
fXX /256
fXXXX /64
M
U
X
T1CON.1
f
/8
16-bit Up-Counter
(Read Only)
fXXXX /1
R
T1CLK
M
U
X
T1INT
V
SS
16-bit Comparator
Timer 1 Buffer Reg
Pending
IRQ3
Match
M
U
X
T1OUT
T1PWM
T1CAP
T1CON.4-.3
Counter Clear Signal or Match
T1CON.4-.3
Timer 1 Data H/L
Register
8
Data Bus
Pending Pending bit is located at INTPND register
NOTES:
1. 16-bit PWM frequency. Where 10 MHz clock is used and fxx/8 is selected,
PWM frequency = 1 / { (8/10 MHz) x FFFFh } = 19.07 Hz
2. Timer 1 input clock must be slower than CPU clock.
Figure 12-6. Timer 1 Functional Block Diagram
12-8
S3C8245/P8245/C8249/P8249
16-BIT TIMER 0/1
Timer 1 Counter Register, High-Byte (T1CNTH)
FCH, Set 1, Bank 1, R
MSB
.7
.7
.6
.5
.4
.3
.2
.1
.0
LSB
LSB
Reset Value: 00H
Timer 1 Counter Register, Low-Byte (T1CNTL)
FDH, Set 1, Bank 1, R
MSB
.6
.5
.4
.3
.2
.1
.0
Reset Value: 00H
Figure 12-7. Timer 1 Control Register (T1CNTH/L)
Timer 1 Data Register,High-Byte (T1DATAH)
FEH, Set 1, Bank 1, R/W
MSB
MSB
.7
.7
.6
.5
.4
.3
.2
.1
.0
LSB
LSB
Reset Value: FFh
Timer 1 Data Register, Low-Byte (T1DATAL)
FFH, Set 1, Bank 1, R/W
.6
.5
.4
.3
.2
.1
.0
Reset Value: FFh
NOTE:
Pending bit is located in INTPND (D2H, set1) register.
Figure 12-8. Timer 1 Data Register (T1DATAH/L)
12-9
S3C8245/P8245/C8249/P8249
WATCH TIMER
13 WATCH TIMER
OVERVIEW
Watch timer functions include real-time and watch-time measurement and interval timing for the system clock.
To start watch timer operation, set bit1 and bit 6 of the watch timer mode register, WTCON.1and 6, to “1”. After the
watch timer starts and elapses a time, the watch timer interrupt is automatically set to “1”, and interrupt requests
commence in 1.955 ms or 0.125, 0.25 and 0.5-second intervals.
The watch timer can generate a steady 0.5 kHz, 1 kHz, 2 kHz, or 4 kHz signal to the BUZZER output. By setting
WTCON.3 and WTCON.2 to “11b”, the watch timer will function in high-speed mode, generating an interrupt every
1.955 ms. High-speed mode is useful for timing events for program debugging sequences.
The watch timer supplies the clock frequency for the LCD controller (f
the LCD controller does not operate.
). Therefore, if the watch timer is disabled,
LCD
— Real-time and Watch-time measurement
— Using a main system or subsystem clock source
— Clock source generation for LCD controller
— Buzzer output frequency generator
— Timing tests in high-speed mode
13-1
WATCH TIMER
S3C8245/P8245/C8249/P8249
WATCH TIMER CONTROL REGISTER (WTCON: R/W)
FBH
WTCON.7 WTCON.6 WTCON.5 WTCON.4 WTCON.3 WTCON.2 WTCON.1 WTCON.0
nRESET
"0"
"0"
"0"
"0"
"0"
"0"
"0"
"0"
Table 13-1. Watch Timer Control Register (WTCON): Set 1, Bank 1, FAH, R/W
Bit Name
Values
Function
Select (fxx/128) as the watch timer clock
Select subsystem clock as watch timer clock
Disable watch timer interrupt
Address
WTCON.7
0
1
0
1
FAH
WTCON.6
Enable watch timer interrupt
WTCON.5–.4
0
0
1
1
0
0
1
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0.5 kHz buzzer (BUZ) signal output
1 kHz buzzer (BUZ) signal output
2 kHz buzzer (BUZ) signal output
4 kHz buzzer (BUZ) signal output
Set watch timer interrupt to 0.5 s.
Set watch timer interrupt to 0.25 s.
Set watch timer interrupt to 0.125 s.
Set watch timer interrupt to 1.955 ms.
Disable watch timer, clear frequency dividing circuits
Enable watch timer
WTCON.3–.2
WTCON.1
WTCON.0
0
1
0
1
Interrupt is not pending, clear pending bit when write
Interrupt is pending
NOTE: Watch timer clock frequency (fw) is assumed to be 32.768 kHz.
13-2
S3C8245/P8245/C8249/P8249
WATCH TIMER
WATCH TIMER CIRCUIT DIAGRAM
BUZZER Output
WTCON.6
WTCON.5
WTCON.4
MUX
WTINT
fW/64 (0.5 kHz)
WTCON.3
WTCON.2
f
W
/32 (1 kHz)
/16 (2 kHz)
W/8 (4 kHz)
fW
f
Enable/Disable
Selector
Circuit
WTCON.1
WTCON.0
fW
/26
fW
/212
/213
/214
Frequency
Dividing
Circuit
f
W
Clock
WTCON.7
fW
Selector
f
VLD (4096 HZ)
f
W
1 Hz
32.768 kHz
f
BOOSTER (4096 HZ)
fLCD (512 HZ)
f
xt
fxx/128
f
xx = Main System Clock (4.19 MHz)
xt = Subsystem Clock (32.768 kHz)
fw = Watch timer
f
Figure 13-1. Watch Timer Circuit Diagram
13-3
S3C8245/P8245/C8249/P8249
LCD CONTROLLER/DRIVER
14 LCD CONTROLLER/DRIVER
OVERVIEW
The S3C8245/C8249 micro-controller can directly drive an up-to-16-digit (32-segment) LCD panel. The LCD module
has the following components:
— LCD controller/driver
— Display RAM (00H–0FH) for storing display data in page 4
— 32 segment output pins (SEG0–SEG31)
— Four common output pins (COM0–COM3)
— Three LCD operating power supply pins (V
V
)
LC0– LC2
— LCD bias by voltage booster
— LCD bias by voltage dividing resistors
Bit settings in the LCD mode register, LMOD, determine the LCD frame frequency, duty and bias, and the segment
pins used for display output. When a subsystem clock is selected as the LCD clock source, the LCD display is
enabled even during stop and idle modes.
The LCD control register LCON turns the LCD display on and off and switches current to the charge-pump circuits for
the display. LCD data stored in the display RAM locations are transferred to the segment signal pins automatically
without program control.
CA-CB
2
V
LC0-VLC2
LCD
Controller/
Driver
3
4
8
COM0-COM3
SEG0-SEG31
32
Figure 14-1. LCD Function Diagram
14-1
LCD CONTROLLER/DRIVER
LCD CIRCUIT DIAGRAM
S3C8245/P8245/C8249/P8249
OFH.7
8
8
OFH.6
OFH.5
OFH.4
SEG31
SEG30
SEG29
SEG28
SEG27
SEG26
MUX
MUX
MUX
05H.1
05H.0
04H.7
04H.6
Segment
Driver
SEG16
SEG15
SEG14
SEG13
SEG12
SEG11
00H.3
00H.2
00H.1
00H.0
8
8
8
f
LCD
SEG0
COM3
COM2
COM1
COM0
Timing
Controller
COM
Control
LMOD
LCON
VLC0
VLC1
VLC2
LCD
Voltage
Control
CA
CB
NOTE:
fLCD = fW W W W
/26, f /27, f /28, f /29
Figure 14-2. LCD Circuit Diagram
14-2
S3C8245/P8245/C8249/P8249
LCD RAM ADDRESS AREA
LCD CONTROLLER/DRIVER
RAM addresses 00H - 0FH of page 4, or page 2, according to ROM size, are used as LCD data memory. When the
bit value of a display segment is "1", the LCD display is turned on; when the bit value is "0", the display is turned off.
Display RAM data are sent out through segment pins SEG0–SEG31 using a direct memory access (DMA) method
that is synchronized with the fLCD signal. RAM addresses in this location that are not used for LCD display can be
allocated to general-purpose use.
00H
BIT.3
BIT.7
BIT.2
BIT.6
BIT.1
BIT.5
BIT.0
BIT.4
SEG0
SEG1
08H
09H
0AH
0BH
0CH
0DH
0EH
0FH
BIT.3
BIT.7
BIT.3
BIT.7
BIT.3
BIT.7
BIT.3
BIT.7
BIT.3
BIT.7
BIT.3
BIT.7
BIT.3
BIT.7
BIT.3
BIT.7
BIT.2
BIT.6
BIT.2
BIT.6
BIT.2
BIT.6
BIT.2
BIT.6
BIT.2
BIT.6
BIT.2
BIT.6
BIT.2
BIT.6
BIT.2
BIT.6
BIT.1
BIT.5
BIT.1
BIT.5
BIT.1
BIT.5
BIT.1
BIT.5
BIT.1
BIT.5
BIT.1
BIT.5
BIT.1
BIT.5
BIT.1
BIT.5
BIT.0
BIT.4
BIT.0
BIT.4
BIT.0
BIT.4
BIT.0
BIT.4
BIT.0
BIT.4
BIT.0
BIT.4
BIT.0
BIT.4
BIT.0
BIT.4
SEG16
SEG17
SEG18
SEG19
SEG20
SEG21
SEG22
SEG23
SEG24
SEG25
SEG26
SEG27
SEG28
SEG29
SEG30
SEG31
COM3
COM2
COM1
COM0
Figure 14-3. LCD Display Data RAM Organization
14-3
LCD CONTROLLER/DRIVER
S3C8245/P8245/C8249/P8249
LCD CONTROL REGISTER (LCON), D0H
Table 14-1. LCD Control Register (LCON) Organization
Description
LCON Bit
Setting
LCON.7
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
0
1
0
1
0
P5.4–P5.7 I/O is selected
SEG28–SEG31 is selected, P5.4–P5.7 I/O is disabled
P5.0–P5.3 I/O is selected
LCON.6
LCON.5
LCON.4
SEG24–SEG27 is selected, P5.0–P5.3 I/O is disabled
P4.4–P4.7 I/O is selected
SEG20–SEG23 is selected, P4.4–P4.7 I/O is disabled
P4.0–P4.3 I/O is selected
SEG16–SEG19 is selected, P4.0–P4.3 I/O is disabled
This bit is used for internal testing only; always logic zero.
Enable LCD initial circuit (internal bias voltage).
LCON.3
LCON.2
Disable LCD initial circuit for external LCD dividing resistors(external bias voltage).
Stop voltage booster(clock stop and cut off current charge path)
Run voltage booster(clock run and turn on current charge path)
LCON.1
LCON.0
LCD output low; turn display off, COM and SEG output Low
Cut off voltage booster (Booster clock disable).
1
COM and SEG output is in display mode; turn display on.
Table 14-2. Relationship of LCON.0 and LMOD.3 Bit Settings
LCON.0
LMOD.3
COM0–COM3
Output low; LCD display off
SEG0–SEG31
Output low; LCD display off
0
1
x
0
1
Output low; LCD display off
Output low; LCD display off
COM output corresponds to display mode
SEG output corresponds to display mode
NOTE: "X" means don’t care.
14-4
S3C8245/P8245/C8249/P8249
LCD CONTROLLER/DRIVER
LCD MODE REGISTER (LMOD)
The LCD mode control register LMOD is mapped to RAM addresses D1H.
LMOD controls these LCD functions:
— Duty and bias selection (LMOD.3–LMOD.0)
— LCDCK clock frequency selection (LMOD.5–LMOD.4)
The LCD clock signal, LCDCK, determines the frequency of COM signal scanning of each segment output. This is
also referred to as the 'frame frequency.' Since LCDCK is generated by dividing the watch timer clock (fw), the watch
timer must be enabled when the LCD display is turned on. Reset clears the LMOD register values to logic zero. This
produces the following LCD control settings:
— Display is turned off
9
— LCDCK frequency is the watch timer clock (fw)/2 = 64 Hz
The LCD display can continue to operate during idle and stop modes if a subsystem clock is used as the watch
timer source. The LCD output voltage level is always 3 V, supplied by the voltage booster.
Table 14-3. LCD Clock Signal (LCDCK) Frame Frequency
LCDCK Frequency
Static
1/2 Duty
1/3 Duty
1/4 Duty
9
64
32
21
16
fw/2 (64 Hz)
8
128
256
512
64
43
85
32
64
fw/2 (128 Hz)
7
128
256
fw/2 (256 Hz)
6
171
128
fw/2 (512 Hz)
NOTE: ‘fw’ is the watch timer clock frequency of 32.768 kHz.
14-5
LCD CONTROLLER/DRIVER
S3C8245/P8245/C8249/P8249
Table 14-4. LCD Mode Control Register (LMOD) Organization, D1H
LMOD.7
LMOD.6
Always logic zero.
Always logic zero.
LMOD.5
LMOD.4
LCD Clock (LCDCK) Frequency
9
0
0
1
0
1
32.768 kHz watch timer clock (fw)/2 = 64 Hz
8
0
1
1
32.768 kHz watch timer clock (fw)/2 = 128 Hz
7
32.768 kHz watch timer clock (fw)/2 = 256 Hz
6
32.768 kHz watch timer clock (fw)/2 = 512 Hz
LMOD.3
LMOD.2
LMOD.1
LMOD.0
Duty and Bias Selection for LCD Display
0
1
1
1
1
1
x
0
0
0
0
1
x
0
0
1
1
x
x
0
1
1
0
x
LCD display off (COM and SEG output Low)
1/4 duty, 1/3 bias
1/3 duty, 1/3 bias
1/3 duty, 1/2 bias
1/2 duty, 1/2 bias
Static
NOTE: ‘x’ means don’t care.
Table 14-5. Maximum Number of Display Digits per Duty Cycle
LCD Duty
Static
1/2
LCD Bias
Static
1/2
COM Output Pins
COM0
Maximum Seg Display
32
COM0–COM1
COM0–COM2
COM0–COM2
COM0–COM3
32 x 2
32 x 3
32 x 3
32 x 4
1/3
1/2
1/3
1/3
1/4
1/3
14-6
S3C8245/P8245/C8249/P8249
LCD DRIVE VOLTAGE
LCD CONTROLLER/DRIVER
The LCD display is turned on only when the voltage difference between the common and segment signals is greater
than V . The LCD display is turned off when the difference between the common and segment signal voltages is
LCD
less than V
The turn-on voltage, + V
or - V
, is generated only when both signals are the selected signals
LCD.
LCD
LCD
of the bias. Table 14-7 shows LCD drive voltages for static mode, 1/2 bias, and 1/3 bias.
Table 14-6. LCD Drive Voltage Values
LCD Power Supply
Static Mode
1/2 Bias
1/3 Bias
V
V
V
V
LC2
LCD
LCD
LCD
V
–
–
V
2/3 V
LC1
LCD
LCD
V
1/2 V
1/3 V
LC0
LCD
LCD
V
0 V
0 V
0 V
ss
NOTE: The LCD panel display may deteriorate if a DC voltage is applied that lies between the common and segment
signal voltage. Therefore, always drive the LCD panel with AC voltage.
LCD SEG/SEG SIGNALS
The 32 LCD segment signal pins are connected to corresponding display RAM locations at 00H–0FH.
Bits 0-3 (and 4-7) of the display RAM are synchronized with the common signal output pins COM0, COM1, COM2,
and COM3.
When the bit value of a display RAM location is "1", a select signal is sent to the corresponding segment pin. When
the display bit is "0", a 'no-select' signal is sent to the corresponding segment pin. Each bias has select and no-
select signals.
Select
Non-Select
FR
1 Frame
V
V
LC2
SS
COM
V
V
LC2
SS
SEG
V
V
LC2
SS
COM-SEG
-VLC2
Figure 14-4. Select/No-Select Bias Signals in Static Display Mode
14-7
LCD CONTROLLER/DRIVER
S3C8245/P8245/C8249/P8249
Select
Non-Select
FR
1 Frame
V
V
V
LC1, 2
LC 0
ss
COM
SEG
V
V
V
LC1, 2
LC 0
ss
V
V
V
LC1, 2
LC 0
ss
COM-SEG
-VLC 0
-VLC1, 2
Figure 14-5. Select/No-Select Bias Signals in 1/2 Duty, 1/2 Bias Display Mode
Select
Non-Select
FR
1 Frame
V
V
LC 2
SS
COM
V
V
LC 2
SS
SEG
V
V
LC 2
SS
COM-SEG
-VLC 2
Figure 14-6. Select/No-Select Bias Signals in 1/3 Duty, 1/3 Bias Display Mode
14-8
S3C8245/P8245/C8249/P8249
LCD CONTROLLER/DRIVER
0
1
0
1
SEG0.0 x C0
SEG1.0 x C0
SEG2.1 x C1
1 Frame
FR
V
V
V
LC1, 2
COM0
LC0
SS
V
V
V
LC1, 2
COM1
SEG0
SEG1
LC0
SS
V
V
V
LC1, 2
LC0
SS
V
V
V
LC1, 2
LC0
SEG3.1 x C1
SS
V
V
V
LC1, 2
LC0
COM0
-SEG0
SS
-VLC0
-VLC1, 2
V
V
V
LC1, 2
LC0
COM0
-SEG1
SS
-VLC0
-VLC1, 2
V
V
V
LC1, 2
LC0
COM1
-SEG0
SS
-VLC0
-VLC1, 2
V
V
V
LC1, 2
LC0
COM1
-SEG1
SS
-VLC0
-VLC1, 2
NOTE:
VLC1 = VLC0
Figure 14-7. LCD Signal and Wave Forms Example in 1/2 Duty, 1/2 Bias Display Mode
14-9
LCD CONTROLLER/DRIVER
S3C8245/P8245/C8249/P8249
0
1
2
0
1
2
SEG2.0 x C0
SEG2.1 x C1
SEG0.2x C2
1 Frame
FR
V
LC2
V
LC1
LC0
COM0
V
VSS
V
LC2
LC1
V
COM1
COM2
V
LC0
SS
V
VLC2
VLC1
VLC0
VSS
VLC2
VLC1
VLC0
VSS
SEG0
SEG1
SEG1.6 x C2
VLC2
VLC1
VLC0
VSS
V
V
V
V
-VLC0
-VLC1
-VLC2
LC2
LC1
LC0
SS
COM0
-SEG0
V
V
V
V
-VLC0
-VLC1
-VLC2
LC2
LC1
LC0
SS
COM0
-SEG1
V
V
V
V
-VLC0
-VLC1
-VLC2
LC2
LC1
LC0
SS
COM1
-SEG0
V
V
V
V
-VLC0
-VLC1
-VLC2
LC2
LC1
LC0
SS
COM1
-SEG1
Figure 14-8. LCD Signals and Wave Forms Example in 1/3 Duty, 1/3 Bias Display Mode
14-10
S3C8245/P8245/C8249/P8249
LCD CONTROLLER/DRIVER
0
1
2
3
0
1
2
3
SEG1.4 x C0
SEG0.1 x C1
SEG0.3 x C3
FR
1 Frame
V
LC2
LC1
LC0
SS
V
COM0
V
V
V
LC2
LC1
LC0
SS
V
COM1
COM2
COM3
SEG0
SEG1
V
V
V
LC2
LC1
LC0
SS
V
V
V
V
LC2
LC1
LC0
SS
V
V
V
SEG1.7 x C3
V
LC2
LC1
LC0
SS
V
V
V
V
LC2
LC1
LC0
SS
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
-VLC0
-VLC1
-VLC2
LC2
LC1
LC0
SS
COM0
-SEG0
V
V
V
V
LC2
LC1
LC0
SS
-VLC0
-VLC1
-VLC2
COM0
-SEG1
V
V
V
V
-VLC0
-VLC1
-VLC2
LC2
LC1
LC0
SS
COM1
-SEG0
V
V
V
V
LC2
LC1
LC0
SS
-VLC0
-VLC1
-VLC2
COM1
-SEG1
Figure 14-9. LCD Signals and Wave Forms Example in 1/4 Duty, 1/3 Bias Display Mode
14-11
LCD CONTROLLER/DRIVER
S3C8245/P8245/C8249/P8249
LCD VOLTAGE DRIVING METHOD
By Voltage Booster
For run the voltage booster
— Make enable the watch timer for f
booster
— Set LCON.2 to "0" and LCON.1 to "1" for make enable voltage booster
— Recommendable capacitance value is 0.1 uF (CAB, C0, C1, C2)
By Voltage Dividing Resistors (Externally)
For make external voltage dividing resistors
— Make enable the watch timer
— Set LCON.2 to "1" and LCON.1 to "0" for make disable voltage booster
— Make floating the CA and CB pin
— Recommendable R = 100 kW
Static and 1/3 Bias (VLCD = 3 V at VDD = 5 V)
1/2 Bias (VLCD = 3.3 V at VDD = 5 V)
VDD
VDD
2 x R
R
V
V
V
LC2
LC1
LC0
V
V
V
LC2
LC1
LC0
R
R
R
R
R
V
SS
V
SS
Static and 1/3 Bias (VLCD = 5 V at VDD = 5 V)
VDD
V
V
V
LC2
LC1
LC0
R
R
R
NOTE:
3.0 V £ VLCD £ 5.5 V
V
SS
Figure 14-10. Voltage Dividing Resistor Circuit Diagram
14-12
S3C8245/P8245/C8249/P8249
A/D CONVERTER
15 10-BIT ANALOG-TO-DIGITAL CONVERTER
OVERVIEW
The 10-bit A/D converter (ADC) module uses successive approximation logic to convert analog levels entering at one
of the eight input channels to equivalent 10-bit digital values. The analog input level must lie between the AV
and
REF
AV values. The A/D converter has the following components:
SS
— Analog comparator with successive approximation logic
— D/A converter logic (resistor string type)
— ADC control register (ADCON)
— Eight multiplexed analog data input pins (ADC0–ADC7)
— 10-bit A/D conversion data output register (ADDATAH/L)
— 10-bit digital input port (Alternately, I/O port.)
— AV
and AV pins, AV is internally connected to V
SS SS SS
REF
FUNCTION DESCRIPTION
To initiate an analog-to-digital conversion procedure, at the first you must set ADCEN signal for ADC input enable at
port 2, the pin set with 1 can be used for ADC analog input. And you write the channel selection data in the A/D
converter control register ADCON.4–.7 to select one of the eight analog input pins (ADC0–7) and set the conversion
start or enable bit, ADCON.0. The read-write ADCON register is located in set 1, bank 0, at address F3H. The pins
witch are not used for ADC can be used for normal I/O.
During a normal conversion, ADC logic initially sets the successive approximation register to 200H (the approximate
half-way point of an 10-bit register). This register is then updated automatically during each conversion step. The
successive approximation block performs 10-bit conversions for one input channel at a time. You can dynamically
select different channels by manipulating the channel selection bit value (ADCON.6–4) in the ADCON register. To
start the A/D conversion, you should set the enable bit, ADCON.0. When a conversion is completed, ADCON.3, the
end-of-conversion(EOC) bit is automatically set to 1 and the result is dumped into the ADDATAH/L register where it
can be read. The A/D converter then enters an idle state. Remember to read the contents of ADDATAH/L before
another conversion starts. Otherwise, the previous result will be overwritten by the next conversion result.
NOTE
Because the A/D converter has no sample-and-hold circuitry, it is very important that fluctuation in the analog level at
the ADC0–ADC7 input pins during a conversion procedure be kept to an absolute minimum. Any change in the input
level, perhaps due to noise, will invalidate the result. If the chip enters to STOP or IDLE mode in conversion process,
there will be a leakage current path in A/D block. You must use STOP or IDLE mode after ADC operation is finished.
15-1
A/D CONVERTER
S3C8245/P8245/C8249/P8249
CONVERSION TIMING
The A/D conversion process requires 4 steps (4 clock edges) to convert each bit and 10 clocks to set-up A/D
conversion. Therefore, total of 50 clocks are required to complete an 10-bit conversion: When fxx/8 is selected for
conversion clock with an 8 MHz fxx clock frequency, one clock cycle is 1 us. Each bit conversion requires 4 clocks,
the conversion rate is calculated as follows:
4 clocks/bit ´ 10 bits + set-up time = 50 clocks, 50 clock ´ 1us = 50 ms at 1 MHz
A/D CONVERTER CONTROL REGISTER (ADCON)
The A/D converter control register, ADCON, is located at address F7H in set 1, bank 0. It has three functions:
— Analog input pin selection ( bits 4, 5, and 6 )
— End-of-conversion status detection ( bit 3)
— A/D operation start or enable ( bit 0 )
After a reset, the start bit is turned off. You can select only one analog input channel at a time. Other analog input
pins (ADC0–ADC7) can be selected dynamically by manipulating the ADCON.4–6 bits. And the pins not used for
analog input can be used for normal I/O function.
A/D Converter Control Register (ADCON)
F7H, Set 1, Bank 1, R/W (EOC bit is read-only)
MSB
.7
.6
.5
.4
.3
.2
.1
.0
LSB
Always logic zero
Start or enable bit:
0 = Disable operation
1 = Start operation
A/D input pin selection bits:
Clock Selection bit:
0 0 = fxx/16
0 1 = fxx/8
1 0 = fxx/4
1 1 = fxx/1
0 0 0 = ADC0
0 0 1 = ADC1
0 1 0 = ADC2
0 1 1 = ADC3
1 0 0 = ADC4
1 0 1 = ADC5
1 1 0 = ADC6
1 1 1 = ADC7
End-of-conversion bit:
0 = Conversion not complete
1 = Conversion complete
Figure 15-1. A/D Converter Control Register (ADCON)
15-2
S3C8245/P8245/C8249/P8249
A/D CONVERTER
A/D Converter Data Register, High Byte (ADDATAH)
F8H, Set 1, Bank 1, Read Only
MSB
.7
.6
.5
.4
.3
.2
.1
.0
LSB
LSB
A/D Converter Data Register, Low Byte (ADDATAL)
F9H, Set 1, Bank 1, Read Only
MSB
.1
.0
Figure 15-2. A/D Converter Data Register (ADDATAH/L)
INTERNAL REFERENCE VOLTAGE LEVELS
In the ADC function block, the analog input voltage level is compared to the reference voltage. The analog input level
must remain within the range AV to AV (usually, AV = V ).
SS
REF
REF
DD
Different reference voltage levels are generated internally along the resistor tree during the analog conversion process
for each conversion step. The reference voltage level for the first conversion bit is always 1/2 AV
.
REF
15-3
A/D CONVERTER
S3C8245/P8245/C8249/P8249
BLOCK DIAGRAM
ADCON.2-.1
ADCON.4-.6
(Select one input pin of the assigned pins)
To ADCON.3
(EOC Flag)
Clock
Selector
ADCON.0
(AD/C Enable)
M
Analog
Comparator
Successive
Approximation
Logic & Register
-
Input Pins
U
X
ADC0-ADC7
(P2.0-P2.7)
.
+
.
.
ADCON.0
(AD/C Enable)
Upper 8-bit is loaded to
A/D Conversion
Data Register
ADCEN.0-.7
(Assign Pins to ADC Input)
Conversion
Result (ADDATAH/L
F8, F9H, Set 1, Bank 1)
AVREF
AVSS
10-bit D/A
Converter
Figure 15-3. A/D Converter Functional Block Diagram
15-4
S3C8245/P8245/C8249/P8249
A/D CONVERTER
V
DD
Reference
Voltage
Input
R
V
AVREF
+
-
C
10 pF
103
C
DD
Analog
Input Pin
ADC0-ADC7
101
S3C8245/C8249
V
SS
NOTE: The symbol "R" signifies an offset resistor with a value of from 50
W to 100W.
If this resistor is omitted, the absolute accuracy will be maximum of 3 LSBs.
Figure 15-4. Recommended A/D Converter Circuit for Highest Absolute Accuracy
15-5
S3C8245/P8245/C8249/P8249
SERIAL I/O INTERFACE
16 SERIAL I/O INTERFACE
OVERVIEW
Serial I/O module, SIO can interface with various types of external device that require serial data transfer. The
components of each SIO function block are:
— 8-bit control register (SIOCON)
— Clock selector logic
— 8-bit data buffer (SIODATA)
— 8-bit prescaler (SIOPS)
— 3-bit serial clock counter
— Serial data I/O pins (SI, SO)
— External clock input/output pins (SCK)
The SIO module can transmit or receive 8-bit serial data at a frequency determined by its corresponding control
register settings. To ensure flexible data transmission rates, you can select an internal or external clock source.
PROGRAMMING PROCEDURE
To program the SIO modules, follow these basic steps:
1. Configure the I/O pins at port (SO, SCK, SI) by loading the appropriate value to the P1CONH register if
necessary.
2. Load an 8-bit value to the SIOCON control register to properly configure the serial I/O module. In this operation,
SIOCON.2 must be set to "1" to enable the data shifter.
3. For interrupt generation, set the serial I/O interrupt enable bit (SIOCON.1) to "1".
4. When you transmit data to the serial buffer, write data to SIODATA and set SIOCON.3 to 1, the shift operation
starts.
5. When the shift operation (transmit/receive) is completed, the SIO pending bit (SIOCON.0) is set to "1" and an
SIO interrupt request is generated.
16-1
SERIAL I/O INTERFACE
S3C8245/P8245/C8249/P8249
SIO CONTROL REGISTER (SIOCON)
The control register for serial I/O interface module, SIOCON, is located at F0H in set 1, bank 0. It has the control
settings for SIO module.
— Clock source selection (internal or external) for shift clock
— Interrupt enable
— Edge selection for shift operation
— Clear 3-bit counter and start shift operation
— Shift operation (transmit) enable
— Mode selection (transmit/receive or receive-only)
— Data direction selection (MSB first or LSB first)
A reset clears the SIOCON value to "00H". This configures the corresponding module with an internal clock source
at the SCK, selects receive-only operating mode, and clears the 3-bit counter. The data shift operation and the
interrupt are disabled. The selected data direction is MSB-first.
Serial I/O Module Control Registers (SIOCON)
F0H, Set 1, Bank 0, R/W
MSB
.7
.6
.5
.4
.3
.2
.1
.0
LSB
SIO interrupt pending bit
0 = No interrupt pending
0 = Clear pending condition
(when write)
SIO shift clock selection bit
0 = Internal clock (P.S Clock)
1 = External clock (SCK)
1 = Interrupt is pending
Data direction control bit
0 = MSB-first mode
1 = LSB-first mode
SIO interrupt enable bit
0 = Disable SIO interrupt
1 = Enable SIO interrupt
SIO mode selection bit
0 = Receive only mode
1 = Transmit/receive mode
SIO shift operation enable bit
0 = Disable shifter and clock counter
1 = Enable shifter and clock counter
Shift clock edge selection bit
SIO counter clear and shift start bit
0 = No action
1 = Clear 3-bit counter and start shifting
0 = T
X
at falling edeges, Rx at rising edges
at rising edeges, Rx at falling edges
1 = T
X
Figure 16-1. Serial I/O Module Control Registers (SIOCON)
16-2
S3C8245/P8245/C8249/P8249
SERIAL I/O INTERFACE
SIO PRE-SCALER REGISTER (SIOPS)
The control register for serial I/O interface module, SIOPS, is located at F2H in set 1, bank 0.
The value stored in the SIO pre-scale registers, SIOPS, lets you determine the SIO clock rate (baud rate) as follows:
Baud rate = Input clock (fxx/4)/(Pre-scaler value + 1), or SCK input clock, where the input clock is fxx/4
SIO Pre-scaler Register (SIOPS)
F2H, Set 1, Bank 0 R/W
MSB
.7
.6
.5
.4
.3
.2
.1
.0
LSB
Baud rate = (fXX /4)/(SIOPS + 1)
Figure 16-2. SIO Pre-scale Registers (SIOPS)
BLOCK DIAGRAM
SIO INT
3-Bit Counter
SIOCON.0
Pending
IRQ4
Clear
CLK
SIOCON.1
(Interrupt Enable)
SIOCON.3
SIOCON.7
SIOCON.4
SIOCON.2
(Edge Select)
(Shift Enable)
SIOCON.5
M
U
X
SCK
(Mode Select)
SIOPS (F2H, bank 0)
8-bit P.S. 1/2
CLK
8-Bit SIO Shift Buffer
SO
(SIODATA, F1H, bank 0)
fxx /2
SI
SIOCON.6
(LSB/MSB First
Mode Select)
Prescaler Value = 1/(SIOPS +1)
8
Data Bus
Figure 16-3. SIO Functional Block Diagram
16-3
SERIAL I/O INTERFACE
S3C8245/P8245/C8249/P8249
SERIAL I/O TIMING DIAGRAM
SCK
SI
DI7
DI6
DI5
DI4
DI3
DI2
DI1
DI0
SO
DO7
DO6
DO5
DO4
DO3
DO2
DO1
DO0
Transmit
Complete
IRQS
Set SIOCON.3
Figure 16-4. Serial I/O Timing in Transmit/Receive Mode (Tx at falling, SIOCON.4 = 0)
SCK
DI7
DI6
DI5
DI4
DI3
DI2
DI1
DI0
SI
SO
DO7
DO6
DO5
DO4
DO3
DO2
DO1
DO0
Transmit
Complete
IRQS
Set SIOCON.3
Figure 16-5. Serial I/O Timing in Transmit/Receive Mode (Tx at rising, SIOCON.4 = 1)
16-4
S3C8245/P8245/C8249/P8249
VOLTAGE BOOSTER
17 VOLTAGE BOOSTER
OVERVIEW
This voltage booster works for the power control of LCD : generates 3 ´ VR(VLC2), 2 ´ VR(VLC1), 1 ´ VR(VLC0). This
voltage booster allows low voltage operation of LCD display with high quality. This voltage booster circuit provides
constant LCD contrast level even though battery power supply was lowered.
This voltage booster include voltage regulator, and voltage charge/pump circuit.
FUNCTION DESCRIPTION
The voltage booster has built for driving the LCD. The voltage booster provides the capability of directly connecting
an LCD panel to the MCU without having to separately generate and supply the higher voltages required by the LCD
panel. The voltage booster operates on an internally generated and regulated LCD system voltage and generates a
doubled and a tripled voltage levels to supply the LCD drive circuit. External capacitor are required to complete the
power supply circuits.
The V power line is regulated to get the V (VR) level, which become a base level for voltage boosting. Then a
DD
LC0
doubled and a tripled voltage will be made by capacitor charge and pump circuit.
17-1
VOLTAGE BOOSTER
S3C8245/P8245/C8249/P8249
BLOCK DIAGRAM
CAB
CAB
VDD
V
LC0 (V
R)
VLC1 (2 x V
R
)
VLC2 (3 x VR)
Voltage
Regulator
Clock
C0
C1
C2
LCON.1
LCON.0
VSS
LCON.2
Figure 17-1. Voltage Booster Block Diagram
COM0-3
COM0-3
LCD
LCD
Drive
Drive
SEG0-SEG31
SEG0-SEG31
V
LC0
VLC0
V
V
LC1
LC2
V
V
LC1
LC2
CA
CB
CA
CB
CAB
CAB
C1
Voltage
Booster
Voltage
Booster
V
V
LC2
V
LC2
LC1
C2
C1
V
LC1
LC0
V
LC0
VLC0
Voltage
Regulator
(1.5 V)
Voltage
Regulator
(1.5 V)
C0
C0
V
VLC0
1/3 Bias
1/2 Bias and Static
Figure 17-2. Pin Connection Example
17-2
S3C8245/P8245/C8249/P8249
VOLTAGE LEVEL DETECTOR
18 VOLTAGE LEVEL DETECTOR
OVERVIEW
The S3C8245/C8249 micro-controller has a built-in VLD (Voltage Level Detector) circuit which allows detection of
power voltage drop or external input level through software. Turning the VLD operation on and off can be controlled by
software. Because the IC consumes a large amount of current during VLD operation. It is recommended that the
VLD operation should be kept OFF unless it is necessary. Also the VLD criteria voltage can be set by the software.
The criteria voltage can be set by matching to one of the 4 kinds of voltage below that can be used.
2.2 V, 2.4 V, 3.0 V or 4.0 V (V reference voltage), or external input level (External reference voltage)
DD
The V block works only when VLDCON.2 is set. If V level is lower than the reference voltage selected with
LD
DD
VLDCON.1–.0, VLDCON.3 will be set. If V level is higher, VLDCON.3 will be cleared. When users need to
DD
minimize current consumption, do not operate the VLD block.
VDD Pin
Voltage
Level
Detector
fVLD
VLDCON.3
VLD Out
VLDCON.4
MUX
VLDCON.2
VLD Run
ExtRef/P2.7
Voltage
Level
Setting
P2CONH.7-.6
VLDCON.1
VLDCON.0
ExtRef Input
Enable
Set the Level
Figure 18-1. Block Diagram for Voltage Level Detect
18-1
VOLTAGE LEVEL DETECTOR
S3C8245/P8245/C8249/P8249
VOLTAGE LEVEL DETECTOR CONTROL REGISTER (VLDCON)
The bit 2 of VLDCON controls to run or disable the operation of Voltage level detect. Basically this V
is set as
VLD
2.2 V by system reset and it can be changed in 4 kinds voltages by selecting Voltage Level Detect Control register
(VLDCON). When you write 2 bit data value to VLDCON, an established resistor string is selected and the V is
VLD
fixed in accordance with this resistor. Table 18-1 shows specific V
of 4 levels.
VLD
Resistor String
Voltage Level Detect Control
F6H, Set 1, Bank 1, R/W, Reset : 00H
MSB
.7
.6
.5
.4
.3
.2
.1
.0
LSB
Not use
RVLD
V
IN
+
Comparator
M
VLDOUT
V
REF
Bias
V
BAT
ExtRef
BANDGAP
VLD Enable/Disable
P2CONH.7-.6
NOTE: The reset value of VLDCON is #00H.
Figure 18-2. Voltage Level Detect Circuit and Control Register
Table 18-1. VLDCON Value and Detection Level
VLDCON .1–.0
V
VLD
0 0
0 1
1 0
1 1
2.2 V
2.4 V
3.0 V
4.0 V
18-2
S3C8245/P8245/C8249/P8249
ELECTRICAL DATA
19 ELECTRICAL DATA
OVERVIEW
In this chapter, S3C8245/C8249 electrical characteristics are presented in tables and graphs.
The information is arranged in the following order:
— Absolute maximum ratings
— Input/output capacitance
— D.C. electrical characteristics
— A.C. electrical characteristics
— Oscillation characteristics
— Oscillation stabilization time
— Data retention supply voltage in stop mode
— Serial I/O timing characteristics
— A/D converter electrical characteristics
19-1
ELECTRICAL DATA
S3C8245/P8245/C8249/P8249
Table 19-1. Absolute Maximum Ratings
°
(T = 25 C)
A
Parameter
Symbol
Conditions
Rating
Unit
Supply voltage
V
– 0.3 to +6.5
V
DD
Input voltage
V
– 0.3 to V + 0.3
I
DD
Output voltage
Output current high
V
– 0.3 to V + 0.3
O
DD
I
One I/O pin active
– 18
mA
OH
All I/O pins active
One I/O pin active
– 60
+ 30
Output current low
I
OL
Total pin current for port
+ 100
°
Operating temperature
Storage temperature
T
– 40 to + 85
C
A
T
– 65 to + 150
STG
Table 19-2. D.C. Electrical Characteristics
°
°
(T = -25 C to + 85 C, V
= 1.8 V to 5.5 V)
DD
A
Parameter
Symbol
Conditions
= 10 MHz
CPU
Min
Typ
Max
Unit
Operating voltage
V
f
2.7
–
5.5
5.5
V
DD
f
1.8
–
–
–
–
= 3 MHz
CPU
Input high voltage
Input low voltage
V
All input pins except V
0.8 V
V
IH1
IH2
IL2
DD
DD
V
X
XT
V
-0.1
DD
,
IH2
IN
IN
V
All input pins except V
XT
–
0.2 V
IL1
DD
V
X
0.1
,
IL2
IN
IN
19-2
S3C8245/P8245/C8249/P8249
ELECTRICAL DATA
Table 19-2. D.C. Electrical Characteristics (Continued)
°
°
(T = -25 C to + 85 C, V = 1.8 V to 5.5 V)
A
DD
Parameter
Symbol
Conditions
Min
V –1.0
DD
Typ
Max
Unit
Output high voltage
V
V
= 5 V; I = -1 mA
–
–
0.4
3
V
OH
DD
OH
All output pins
= 5 V; I = 2 mA
OL
Output low voltage
V
V
–
–
–
–
OL
DD
All output pins
= V
Input high leakage
current
I
V
uA
LIH1
IN
DD
All input pins except I
LIH2
I
V
V
= V
X
XT
IN
20
-3
,
LIH2
IN
DD, IN
Input low leakage
current
I
= 0 V
–
–
LIL1
IN
All input pins except I
LIL2
I
V
V
= 0 V, X XT , nRESET
-20
3
,
IN
LIL2
IN
IN
Output high leakage
current
I
= V
–
–
–
–
LOH
OUT
DD
All I/O pins and output pins
= 0 V
Output low leakage
current
I
V
-3
LOL
OUT
All I/O pins and output pins
°
Oscillator feed back
resistors
R
300
600
1500
kW
V
= 5.0 V T = 25 C
osc1
A
DD
X = V , X
= 0 V
IN
DD OUT
Pull-up resistor
R
V
= 0 V; V = 5 V ±10 %
25
50
100
310
L1
IN
DD
°
Port 0,1,2,3,4,5 T = 25 C
A
R
V
= 0 V; V = 5 V ±10%
110
210
1.0
L2
IN
DD
°
T =25 C, nRESET only
A
V
out voltage
V
T = 25 °C, (1/3 bias mode)
0.9
1.4
1.15
1.7
V
LC0
LC0
A
(Booster run mode)
T = 25 °C, (1/2 bias mode)
1.5
–
A
V
out voltage
V
T = 25 °C (1/2 and 1/3 bias 2V
- 0.1
2V
3V
+ 0.1
LC1
LC1
A
LC0
LC0
(Booster run mode)
out voltage
mode)
V
V
T = 25 °C (1/3 bias mode)
3V
- 0.1
–
+ 0.1
LC2
LC2
A
LC0
LC0
(Booster run mode)
COM output
voltage deviation
V
V
= V = 3 V
LC2
–
± 60
± 120
± 120
mV
DC
DD
(V
-COMi)
LCD
IO = ± 15 mA (i = 0-3)
= V = 3 V
SEG output
V
V
–
± 60
Ds
DD
LC2
voltage deviation
(V
-SEGi)
LCD
IO = ± 15 mA (i = 0-31)
NOTE: Low leakage current is absolute value.
19-3
ELECTRICAL DATA
S3C8245/P8245/C8249/P8249
Table 19-2. D.C. Electrical Characteristics (Concluded)
°
°
(T = -25 C to + 85 C, V = 1.8 V to 5.5 V)
A
DD
Parameter
Symbol
Conditions
= 5 V ± 10 %
Min
Typ
Max
Unit
(1)
(2)
V
–
12
25
mA
Supply current
I
DD
DD1
10 MHz crystal oscillator
3 MHz crystal oscillator
4
3
10
8
V
= 3 V ± 10 %
DD
10 MHz crystal oscillator
3 MHz crystal oscillator
1
3
5
I
Idle mode: V = 5 V ± 10 %
DD
–
10
DD2
10 MHz crystal oscillator
3 MHz crystal oscillator
1.5
1.2
4
3
Idle mode: V = 3 V± 10 %
DD
10 MHz crystal oscillator
3 MHz crystal oscillator
Sub operating: main-osc stop
0.5
20
1.5
40
I
–
–
–
uA
DD3
V
= 3 V ± 10 %
DD
32.768 kHz crystal oscillator
OSCCON.4 = 1
I
Sub idle mode: main-osc stop
7
14
DD4
V
= 3 V ± 10 %
DD
32.768 kHz crystal oscillator
OSCCON.4 = 1
I
Main stop mode : sub-osc stop
1
3
2
DD5
°
V
= 5 V ± 10 %, T = 25 C
A
DD
°
0.5
V
= 3 V ± 10 %, T = 25 C
A
DD
NOTES:
1. Supply current does not include current drawn through internal pull-up resistors or external output current loads.
2.
I
and I
include a power consumption of subsystem oscillator.
DD1
DD2
3.
I
and I
are the current when the main system clock oscillation stop and the subsystem clock is used.
DD4
DD3
And does not include the LCD and Voltage booster and voltage level detector
is the current when the main and subsystem clock oscillation stop.
4.
I
DD5
19-4
S3C8245/P8245/C8249/P8249
ELECTRICAL DATA
In case of S3C8245, the characteristic of V and V is differ with the characteristic of S3C8249 like as following.
OH
OL
Other characteristics are same each other.
Table 19-3. D.C Electrical Characteristics of S3C8245
°
°
(T = -25 C to +85 C, V = 1.8 V to 5.5 V)
A
DD
Parameter
Symbol
Conditions
Min
-1.0
Typ
Max
Unit
Output high voltage
V
V
= 5 V; I = -1 mA
V
V
–
–
V
OH1
DD
OH
DD
All output pins except V
OH2
V
V
= 5 V; I = -6 mA
-0.7
DD
OH2
DD
OH
Port 3.0 only in S3C8245
= 5 V; I = 2 mA
Output low voltage
V
V
–
–
0.4
0.7
OL1
DD
OL
All output pins except V
OL2
V
V
= 5 V; I = 12 mA
DD OH
OL2
Port 3.0 only in S3C8245
19-5
ELECTRICAL DATA
S3C8245/P8245/C8249/P8249
Table 19-4. A.C. Electrical Characteristics
°
°
(T = -25 C to +85 C, V = 1.8 V to 5.5 V)
A
DD
Parameter
Symbol
Conditions
Min
Typ
Max
Unit
Interrupt input
high, low width
(P0.0–P0.7)
tINTH,
tINTL
P0.0–P0.7, V = 5 V
–
–
–
ns
DD
nRESET input low
width
tRSL
V
= 5 V
5
–
–
us
DD
NOTE: User must keep more large value then min value.
tTIL
tTIH
0.8 VDD
0.2 VDD
0.2 VDD
Figure 19-1. Input Timing for External Interrupts (Ports 0)
tRSL
nRESET
0.2 VDD
Figure 19-2. Input Timing for nRESET
19-6
S3C8245/P8245/C8249/P8249
ELECTRICAL DATA
Table 19-5. Input/Output Capacitance
°
°
(T = -25 C to +85 C, V = 0 V )
A
DD
Parameter
Symbol
Conditions
Min
Typ
Max
Unit
Input
C
f = 1 MHz; unmeasured pins
–
–
10
pF
IN
capacitance
are returned to V
SS
Output
C
OUT
capacitance
I/O capacitance
C
IO
Table 19-6. Data Retention Supply Voltage in Stop Mode
°
°
(T = -25 C to + 85 C)
A
Parameter
Symbol
Conditions
Min
Typ
–
Max
Unit
Data retention
supply voltage
V
2
5.5
V
DDDR
Data retention
supply current
I
V
= 2 V
DDDR
–
–
3
uA
DDDR
nRESET
Occurs
Oscillation
Stabilization
Time
Stop Mode
Normal
Operating Mode
Data Retention Mode
V
DD
V
DDDR
Execution of
STOP Instrction
nRESET
0.2 VDD
tWAIT
NOTE:
tWAIT is the same as 4096 x 16 x 1/fxx
Figure 19-3. Stop Mode Release Timing Initiated by nRESET
19-7
ELECTRICAL DATA
S3C8245/P8245/C8249/P8249
Oscillation
Stabilization Time
Idle Mode
Stop Mode
Data Retention Mode
VDD
VDDDR
Normal
Execution of
STOP Instruction
Operating Mode
Interrupt
0.2 VDD
t
WAIT
NOTE:
tWAIT is the same as 16 x BT clock.
Figure 19-4. Stop Mode (Main) Release Timing Initiated by Interrupts
Oscillation
Stabilization Time
Idle Mode
Stop Mode
Data Retention Mode
VDD
V
DDDR
Normal
Execution of
STOP Instruction
Operating Mode
Interrupt
0.2 VDD
t
WAIT
NOTE:
When the case of select the fxx/128 for basic timer input
clock before enter the stop mode.
tWAIT = 128 x 16 x (1/32.768) = 62.5 ms
Figure 19-5. Stop Mode (Sub) Release Timing Initiated by Interrupts
19-8
S3C8245/P8245/C8249/P8249
ELECTRICAL DATA
Table 19-7. A/D Converter Electrical Characteristics
(T = -25 °C to +85 °C, V
A
= 2.7 V to 5.5 V, V = 0 V)
DD
SS
Parameter
Resolution
Symbol
Conditions
Min
–
Typ
10
–
Max
Unit
bit
–
Total accuracy
V
= 5.12 V
–
±3
LSB
DD
AV
= 5.12 V
REF
AV = 0 V
SS
Integral Linearity
Error
ILE
CPU clock = 10 MHz
–
–
±2
±1
Differential Linearity
Error
DLE
Offset Error of Top
EOT
EOB
±1
±3
±2
Offset Error of
Bottom
±0.5
(1)
t
–
–
–
–
40
–
–
fxx
V
Conversion time
CON
Analog input voltage
V
AV
AV
REF
IAN
SS
Analog input
impedance
R
2
1000
–
MW
AN
Analog reference
voltage
AV
–
2.5
–
V
V
REF
DD
Analog ground
Analog input current
Analog block
AV
–
V
–
–
1
V + 0.3
SS
SS
SS
I
AV
AV
= V = 5 V
–
–
10
uA
ADIN
REF
REF
DD
I
= V = 5 V
3
mA
ADC
DD
(2)
current
AV
AV
= V = 3 V
0.5
1.5
REF
REF
DD
= V = 5 V
100
500
nA
DD
When power down mode
NOTES:
1. 'Conversion time' is the time required from the moment a conversion operation starts until it ends.
2. is an operating current during A/D conversion.
I
ADC
19-9
ELECTRICAL DATA
S3C8245/P8245/C8249/P8249
Table 19-8. Voltage Booster Electrical Characteristics
(T = 25 °C, V = 2.0 V to 5.5 V, V = 0 V)
A
DD
SS
Parameter
Symbol
Test Conditions
Min
2.0
0.9
Typ
–
Max
5.5
Unit
Operating Voltage
Regulated Voltage
VDD
V
V
I
= 5 uA (1/3 bias)
1.0
1.15
LC0
LC1
LC0
Booster Voltage
V
Connect 1 MW load between
and V
2V
–
2VLC0
+ 0.1
LC0
V
SS
LC1
- 0.1
V
Connect 1 MW load between
3V
–
3VLC0
+ 0.1
LC2
LC0
V
and V
SS
LC2
- 0.1
Regulated Voltage
Booster Voltage
V
V
I
= 6 uA (1/2 bias)
1.4
1.5
–
1.7
LC0
LC1
LC0
Connect 1 MW load between
and V
2V
2VLC0
+ 0.1
LC0
V
SS
LC1
- 0.1
V
Connect 1 MW load between
and V
LC2
V
SS
LC2
Table 19-9. Characteristics of Voltage Level Detect Circuit
°
(T = 25 C)
A
Parameter
Symbol
Conditions
Min
Typ
Max
Unit
Operating Voltage of VLD
V
1.8
–
5.5
V
V
DDVLD
Voltage of VLD
V
VLDCON.1.0 = 00b
2.05
2.2
2.35
VLD
VLDCON.1.0 = 01b
VLDCON.1.0 = 10b
VLDCON.1.0 = 11b
VLCDCON.1-.0=00
IVB+IVLD+IDD4,
2.25
2.8
3.7
–
2.4
3.0
4.0
10
2.55
3.2
4.3
100
40
Hysteresys Voltage of VLD
DV
mV
uA
Sum of Voltage Booster,
Voltage Detector and Sub-
idle current
IVBVLD
–
15
VDD=3.0V
19-10
S3C8245/P8245/C8249/P8249
ELECTRICAL DATA
Table 19-10. Synchronous SIO Electrical Characteristics
(T = -25 C to +85 C, V = 1.8 V to 5.5 V, V = 0 V, fxx = 10 MHz oscillator)
°
°
A
DD
SS
Parameter
Symbol
Conditions
Min
Typ
Max
Unit
SCK Cycle time
t
–
–
–
–
200
–
–
–
ns
CYC
Serial Clock High Width
Serial Clock Low Width
t
60
60
–
–
–
–
SCKH
t
–
SCKL
Serial Output data delay
time
t
50
OD
Serial Input data setup
time
t
–
–
40
–
–
–
–
ID
Serial Input data Hold time
t
100
IH
tCYC
t
SCKL
tSCKH
SCK
0.8 VDD
0.2 VDD
t
ID
tIH
0.8 VDD
0.2 VDD
SI
Input Data
tOD
SO
Output Data
Figure 19-6. Serial Data Transfer Timing
19-11
ELECTRICAL DATA
S3C8245/P8245/C8249/P8249
Table 19-11. Main Oscillator Frequency (f
)
OSC1
°
°
(T = -25 C to +85 C, V
= 1.8 V to 5.5 V)
DD
A
Oscillator
Crystal
Clock Circuit
Test Condition
Min
Typ
Max
Unit
Crystal oscillation frequency
1
–
10
MHz
X
IN
XOUT
C1
C2
Ceramic
External clock
RC
Ceramic oscillation frequency
1
1
1
–
–
–
10
10
2
MHz
MHz
MHz
X
IN
XOUT
C1
C2
X input frequency
X
IN
XOUT
IN
V
= 5 V
X
IN
XOUT
DD
R
Table 19-12. Main Oscillator Clock Stabilization Time (t
)
ST1
°
°
(T = -25 C to +85 C, V = 2.0 V to 5.5 V)
A
DD
Oscillator
Test Condition
= 2.0 V to 5.5 V
Min
Typ
Max
Unit
Crystal
V
–
–
40
ms
DD
Ceramic
Stabilization occurs when V is equal to the minimum
–
–
4
ms
DD
oscillator voltage range.
External clock
X input high and low level width (t , t
)
50
–
500
ns
IN
XH XL
NOTE: Oscillation stabilization time (t
) is the time required for the CPU clock to return to its normal oscillation
ST1
frequency after a power-on occurs, or when Stop mode is ended by a nRESET signal.
The nRESET should therefore be held at low level until the t time has elapsed
ST1
19-12
S3C8245/P8245/C8249/P8249
ELECTRICAL DATA
1/fosc1, 1/fosc2
tXL , tXTL
tXH, tXTH
XIN, XT IN
VDD - 0.1V
0.1V
Figure 19-7. Clock Timing Measurement at X
Table 19-13. Sub Oscillator Frequency (f
IN
)
OSC2
°
°
(T = -25 C + 85 C, V
= 1.8 V to 5.5 V)
DD
A
Oscillator
Clock Circuit
XT IN XT OUT
R
Test Condition
Min
Typ
32.768
Max
Unit
Crystal
Crystal oscillation frequency
32
35
kHz
C1 = 22 pF,
C2 = 33 pF
R = 39 kW
C1
C2
External Clock
XT input frequency
32
–
100
kHz
XTIN XTOUT
IN
19-13
ELECTRICAL DATA
S3C8245/P8245/C8249/P8249
Table 19-14. Sub Oscillator(crystal) Stabilization Time (t
)
ST2
°
(T = 25 C)
A
Oscillator
Test Condition
Min
Typ
Max
Unit
Crystal Normal
mode
V
=4.5V to 5.5V
–
1
2
sec
DD
V
V
=2.0V to 4.5V
–
–
–
–
10
6
sec
sec
DD
Crystal Strong
mode
=3.0V to 5.5V
DD
V
V
=2.0V to 3.0V
–
5
–
–
2
sec
DD
External clock
=2.0V to 5.5V
15
ms
DD
XT input high and low level width(t
, t
)
IN
XTH XTL
NOTE: Oscillation stabilization time (t
) is the time required for the oscillator to it’s normal oscillation when stop mode
ST2
is released by interrupts.
f
CPU
B
10 MHz
8 MHz
A
3 MHz
1 MHz
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
1.8
2.7
Supply Voltage (V)
5.5
Minimum instruction clock = 1/4 x oscillator frequency
Figure 19-8. Operating Voltage Range
19-14
相关型号：
S3P825A-TW
Microcontroller, 8-Bit, OTPROM, SAM88RC CPU, 8MHz, CMOS, PQFP80, 12 X 12 MM, TQFP-80
SAMSUNG
S3P8454-TW
Microcontroller, 8-Bit, OTPROM, SAM87RC CPU, 25MHz, CMOS, PQFP80, 12 X 12 MM, TQFP-80
SAMSUNG
©2020 ICPDF网 联系我们和版权申明